Street Furniture Product Selector - Marshalls

Uniclass 

L811 

Street Furniture Product Selector 

www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture 

CI/SfB 

January 2010 

(90.7) X 

EPIC 

Q12

1 

How to use this Product Selector 

This brochure has been specifically designed to work in conjunction with our new 

website. Together they form an integrated way of exploring everything that Marshalls 

Street Furniture has to offer. The website can help you access the information you 

Contact details 

Contact details are clearly listed 

at the top of each page. 

*Please note NBS is a live database and classification codes are subject to change. 

PS3+ Quick Find 

Select the Product Search Tab on the website 

and enter this code into Quick Find to 

instantly down load the page as a PDF or to 

find out more about the product. 

require quickly and easily. And because we’re constantly updating our site, you’ll 

always have the latest access to the very latest information at your fingertips. 

NBS Plus 

Choose the Product Search Tab 

on the website and choose this 

code to easily download the full 

NBS Specification.* 

Coordinating Items 

Coordinating products in 

ranges are listed at the top 

of each product page. 

Colour Coding 

Each of our categories is colour 

coded so you can quickly flick 

through to the product category 

you need. 

Photography 

There are hundreds of new project 

images both in the brochure and on 

the website. Visit the new website 

to download and print high quality 

photographs of products and case 

studies. 

Swatches 

We’ve improved the product 

swatches, go online if you need to 

see a closer view. 

Product Tables 

Clear concise product information, 

including optional extras, to assist in 

your specification. 

How to use www.marshalls.co.uk/street furniture 

On the website, to go directly to the product information that you are looking for, 

simply choose the Product Search Tab and use Quick Find Function. 

Marshalls Specialists 

Direct access to Marshalls 

specialist business areas. 

Brochures 

Download or order the very 

latest product brochures 

Product Page 

Fast access to all the latest 

information about a specific 

product or range. 

Link 

Click here to quickly link 

through to your specialist 

business website 

1910 85 

560 

Drawings 

Drawings detailing outline 

dimensions of standard 

specifications. 

430 

My Basket 

Store any PDF or photograph until you’re 

ready to download or print. Just pop 

them in your basket, there’s no lengthy 

registration process. 

Product Range 

Search the entire library for PDFs, project 

photography, case studies and even 

product swatches. The search engine 

is fully integrated with the brochure so 

everything is simple to find. 

Product Search 

Search by product category or by material. 

Find a product quickly by using the PS3+ 

number. Access photography, swatches, 

literature and NBS Specifications. 

Quick Find 

To find a PDF from the catalogue quickly, 

just enter the PS3+ number at the top 

of the page and you’ll instantly get the 

PDF version.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Contents 

Introduction 3-30 

Bollards 31-86 

Seating 87-170 

Litter Bins 171-216 

Cycle Parking 217-228 

Planters 229-264 

Tree Protection 265-286 

Notice Boards 287-302 

Signage and Lamp Columns 303-318 

Protective Barriers 319-328 

Post and Rail 329-350 

Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavillions 351-366 

Traffic Management 367-382 

Material Specifications 383-394 

Installation Information 395-404 2

3 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Marshalls Street Furniture 

Marshalls Street Furniture specialise in the design, manufacture and sourcing of 

street furniture. We have used our expertise to bring together an extensive portfolio 

of street furniture brands so you can create distinctive and unique landscape 

transformations. The product range is available in a wide variety of designs, materials, 

textures and colours, which can be used to complement and enhance the external 

environment. We offer furniture to meet the budgets, functional requirements and 

aesthetics of almost any project or scheme. 

The Portfolio 

Marshalls Street Furniture are unique as a street furniture supplier in that we have 

manufacturing capabilities in a wide variety of materials including concrete, natural 

stone, cast iron, steel, stainless steel and polyurethane. Products and ranges in each 

of these materials are presented within the brands Monoscape, Geoform, Imperial, 

Ollerton and Ferrocast®. For more information on these brands please refer to 

pages 13 to 28. 

Widely specified in retail parks, car dealerships and retail and industrial units 

Rhino Perimeter Protection products offer security and peace of mind. Bollards and 

hoop barriers are available in a variety of specifications and styles, enabling you to 

choose items that will deliver both the look and security your project requires. 

An introduction to Rhino Perimeter Protection can be found on pages 23 to 24. 

Our portfolio is further enhanced by long-term partnerships with leading European 

street furniture manufacturers enabling us to supply prestigious, design-led ranges. 

Bellitalia offer a collection of beautifully formed concrete pieces from Italy and 

Sineu Graff, one of the foremost French manufacturers of street furniture provide 

innovative concepts and stylish, functional pieces. Learn more about Bellitalia and 

Sineu Graff on pages 15 to 16 and 25 to 26. 

We are delighted to continue our exclusive partnership with Intruplas, an award 

winning manufacturer who specialises in making products from recycled plastic 

composite. The recycling process and the benefits of recycled plastic composite are 

shown on page 29 and 30. 

With this varied portfolio we offer architects and specifiers choice, allowing 

them to select and coordinate street furniture to make strong statements within 

their schemes. 

Design and Innovation 

Working with industry designers we commission inspirational new concepts and 

ranges to enhance the built environment. Aiming to pre-empt customer needs, 

we develop new products to comply with regulations and guidelines such as DDA, 

B.S.I. and RoSPA. 

Design Service for Bespoke Commissions 

Where architects and specifiers wish to commission bespoke pieces we offer a full 

technical advice and design service, helping to take a creative concept through to 

final production. We have some excellent examples of projects where our engineers 

have worked alongside architects to create truly unique schemes.

Product Specification 

All items in this Product Selector have a current product specification in NBS format, 

giving the specifier confidence that the most current and accurate information is 

being used to complete as specification. The NBS Plus reference, at the top of each 

page, can point you to the specific work section and 

specification required. 

Marshalls Street Furniture has successfully achieved registration with Constructionline. 

A government-backed accreditation standard, it demonstrates that we have met the 

high standards of excellence required. A national online database, Constructionline 

provides a fast and efficient way for buyers to find pre-qualified suppliers in the 

construction sector, who are in a position to tender. Constructionline is a public 

private partnership between the Department of Business, Enterprise and Regulatory 

Reform (formerly the DTI) and Capita Business Services. Its aim 

is to improve efficiencies for buyers and suppliers in the 

construction industry, specifically by reducing the duplication 

of work and administration relating to the process of 

pre-qualifying suppliers for construction contracts. 

Manufacturing Standards 

To ensure that products meet the requirements and specifications of our customers, 

Marshalls Street Furniture has established a quality system confirmed by registration 

under BS EN ISO 9001:2000. All sites have gained accreditation and this covers 

processes that include the design, manufacture, supply and installation of street 

furniture. Through continued assessment of our quality procedures, Marshalls Street 

Furniture continually improve all aspects of product quality, performance and 

customer service. 

In 2007 The Royal Society for Prevention of Accidents presented Marshalls Street 

Furniture the Silver Award for Occupational Health and Safety. Granted in recognition 

of the achievement of satisfactory health and safety management, systems and 

culture, the award took into account, amongst other criteria, improved compliance 

with control measures for principal risks and action on health issues. 

Marshalls Street Furniture has gained the Interpon Powder Coatings approved PZ 77O 

applicators status and is now an Akzo Nobel associated quality coater. In order to be 

approved by Akzo Nobel and Interpon Powder Coatings, twelve months of stringent 

auditing have been undertaken measuring that steel is pre-treated to the correct 

standard, the powder system applied correctly and that consistency is maintained 

over time. 

Site Survey and Installation Service 

Marshalls Street Furniture has fully experienced in-house specialists that can help 

at any stage in a project. For large projects pre-design and pre-construction site 

appraisals are recommended. Our site survey engineers will attend your site at 

your convenience to carry out a full detailed survey of your site. Data is collected 

using a robotic total station, which then enables us to use site data in the product 

specification and ensures that ultimately, installation runs as smoothly as possible. 

Our project managers will liaise closely with architects, contractors and site managers 

to ensure the best specification and plans are created. We also have fully qualified, 

experienced installation teams who can be commissioned to undertake the entire 

installation project. 

Personnel have a CSCS scheme card and each has been the subject of a CRB (Criminal 

Records Bureau) check, enabling them to work on school sites. 

Marshalls Street Furniture has also achieved registration with CHAS, 

which demonstrates compliance with important parts of health 

and safety law and enables buyers to assess competence quickly 

and efficiently. 

Ex Stock 

Marshalls Street Furniture are committed to offering the best lead times 

possible, products marked Ex Stock are held in stock and are available for 

delivery within 3 days. Standard specifications only are held. Subject to availability. 

STOCK 

Specialist Businesses 

Marshalls Street Furniture also encompasses two specialist businesses; Marshalls 

Urban Structures and Woodhouse. Urban Structures specialise in the design and 

installation of canopies, walkways and shelters, including smoking and cycle shelters. 

Urban Structures shelters are often specified in conjunction with Marshalls Street 

Furniture. Woodhouse offer premium ranges of exterior lighting and coordinated 

street furniture. Further details for Urban Structures can be found on page 11 and for 

Woodhouse on page 12. 

Marshalls Street Furniture receive ROSPA silver award 

Production at North Shields factory, hand finishing 

Marshalls Urban Structures Gullwing Canopy used to cover Sheffield Cycle Stands 

4

5 

www.marshalls.co.uk/select 

Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Literature Request: 0870 241 2463 

Marshalls Commercial Landscaping 

Marshalls plc is the UKs leading manufacturer of superior concrete and natural stone 

products which transform landscapes and redefine the built enviroment. With more 

than 120 years’ experience, Marshalls expertise in materials, sourcing, manufacturing, 

distribution, technical advice and customer service is respected within the industry, 

making us the preferred supplier for prestigious projects. 

Marshalls Commercial Landscaping comprises specialist business areas, their 

combined expertise in practise can provide fully intergrated landscape solutions 

Marshalls Specialist Businesses 

n Paving 

n Block Paving 

n Water Management 

n Kerb 

n Street Furniture 

n Traffic Management 

n Urban Structures 

n Walling 

n Mortars 

n Sectional Buildings.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


How our specialists work together 

Marshalls specialists provide high quality products and expertise from project 

conception and design, to installation and maintenance to help redefine the 

built environment. 

Marshalls seven specialist areas bring expertise to every part of the landscape, 

with products ranging from street furniture and traffic management solutions to 

high capacity land drainage, innovative SUD solutions and our extensive block and 

flag paving ranges. 

Case Study 

Blackwood Pedestrian Link, South Wales 

Marshalls used its combined expertise in paving, kerb, water management, 

traffic management and street furniture to assist the design team in 

formulating a hard landscaping and street furniture solution for the project. 

Products: 

Tegula Traditional Setts Sineu Graff Series 9600 

Special Conservation Kerbs Stainless Steel Guardrail 

Saxon Buff Paving, coarse textured Rhino RS001 Bollard 

Mistral Silver Grey Paving Ollerton M3 Seat 

Birco Landscape Drain RS004 Bollard 

6

7 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Sustainability 

Land restoration at Marshalls Eaglescliffe Works 

Sustainability is not just about the environment. At Marshalls we believe that 

Sustainability must be at the heart of our business and it must balance the social, 

the environmental and the economic. We call this our triple bottom line: 

n Social progress which recognises the needs of everyone. 

n Effective protection of the environment. 

n Maintenance of stable levels of economic growth. 

Achieving our goal of Sustainability involves judging the long term merits of our 

business decisions against this triple bottom line. 

We are currently the only company in the hard landscaping industry to belong to the 

Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI), a diverse alliance of retailers, brands, trade unions and 

NGOs working collectively to tackle the complex questions posed by ethical trade. 

We are also working closely and in conjunction with the communities in which we 

operate to deliver constructive projects in a number of areas such as schools, sports 

associations and government backed incentives. 

From an environmental perspective we are committed to reducing the amount of 

carbon produced as a result of our operations. This involves researching, developing 

and implementing new environmentally friendlier innovative mix designs used in 

the manufacture of our leading product range; plus concerted action in sourcing 

our materials, and reviewing our manufacturing, logistical and administration 

processes. 

Environmental impact also includes issues such as waste reduction, recycling and 

re-use. In this area we continue to achieve significant measurable reductions yearon-year 

in areas such as water management and packaging. 

As a mark of our work in the area of biodiversity, our Maltby site is the first active 

manufacturing site in the UK to be accredited the Wildlife Trusts’ Biodiversity 

Benchmark for Land Management. 

The third element of Sustainability, the economic, is built upon the way Marshalls 

specialists do business. At the end of 2006 over 80% of our production tonnage 

was covered by an Integrated Management System to PAS 99 covering ISO 9000 for 

Quality Management, ISO 14001 for Environmental Management and ISO 18001 for 

Safety Management. 

Finally, we believe we cannot maximise long term profits by exploiting workers, 

destroying the environment and abusing our economic power – it is simply not 

sustainable. Operating our business in a sustainable manner means that we must 

not only make a profit but also take a proactive stance on our corporate social 

responsibilities measured against our triple bottom line.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Corporate Social Responsibility 

We believe in conducting business in a manner which achieves sustainable growth 

whilst demonstrating a high degree of social responsibility. We believe that this 

approach creates a source of competitive advantage for our business. 

Our responsibility encompasses interaction with: 

n Our marketplace. 

n Our environment. 

n Our community. 

n Our people. 

Demonstrating our commitment to Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is a 

journey, in the course of which we aim to align our business values, purpose 

and strategy with the social and economic needs of our stakeholders, 

whilst embedding responsible, ethical business policies and practices into 

everything we do. 

By working together with all our stakeholders and embracing CSR, we open doors 

to new markets, opportunities and relationships, increasing competitiveness 

and profitability, and demonstrating our continued commitment to sustainable 

development. 

Marshalls is committed to the following CSR principles: 

n We manage our business with pride and integrity. 

n We are committed to full legal compliance in all that we do. 

n We aim to provide a safe, fulfilling and rewarding career for all our employees. 

n We will continue to develop community programmes which support our brand 

values and further promote our recognition as an active contributor to local 

community development. 

n We actively assess and manage the environmental impacts of all our operations. 

n We will further develop our standing as a responsible business in 

the community. 

n We will benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to constantly improve our 

competitive edge in the marketplace. 

n We will continually benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to improve our 

CSR performance. 

Marshalls volunteers installing an Intruplas Recycled Plastic Composite Bench in Halifax 

8

9 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) 

Marshalls natural Sandstone supplier’s factory, India 

Marshalls is funding Hadoti Hast Shlip Sansthan (HHSS), an NGO that helps migrant workers 

Marshalls Indian Sandstone suppliers, 

independently audited, certificate of 

compliance to the ETI Base Code 

Marshalls is very conscious of its Corporate Ethical Responsibilities in trading 

with developing nations such as China and India. We have conducted a rigorous 

screening process to ensure that our imported natural stone is manufactured and 

supplied to the highest ethical standards. 

In December 2005, Marshalls plc became a member of the Ethical Trade Initiative 

(ETI). The ETI is a unique organisation that brings global companies such as GAP, 

Inditex, Tesco, Marks & Spencer, trade union organisations and NGOs together 

to work out the solutions to ethical trade and then implement them. Members 

commit to adopting the ETI Base Code on a progressive basis throughout their 

supply chains. The Code is based on ILO conventions and as such is widely 

acknowledged as a model code of labour practice. It contains provisions based on 

the following principles: 

ETI Base Code: 

n Employment is freely chosen. 

n Freedom of association and the right to collective bargaining are respected. 

n Working conditions are safe and hygienic. 

n Child labour shall not be used. 

n Living wages are paid. 

n Working hours are not excessive. 

n No discrimination is practised. 

n Regular employment is provided. 

n No harsh or inhumane treatment is allowed.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) 

As well as adopting the ETI Base Code, members also commit to: 

n Monitoring and independent verification of their supply chains. 

n Reporting annually to ETI on their progress. 

n Awareness-raising and training. 

n Driving year-on-year improvements. 

n Assessing the impact of their core business activities on labour standards. 

n Participating in ETI projects. 

Marshalls has employed independent organisations such as SGS to audit both 

our Chinese Granite suppliers and our sole Indian Sandstone supplier for their 

compliance with the ETI Base Code. 

Our granite supplier in China and our natural stone supplier in India have both 

achieved full compliance. 

The audits that we have undertaken, using these independent experts, have clearly 

shown that: 

n There is no use of child labour in our supply chain. 

n Our supply chain produces the best possible working conditions within the 

quarrying environment, together with provisions for both safety and hygiene. 

n Our supply chain provides regular employment, fair rates of pay and reasonable 

hours of working. 

n The granite factories visited were operating 3 x 8 hour shifts (7 days/week) and 

provided accommodation on site for the workers (and the workers’ families), 

together with hot meals. The operatives typically work 1 x 8 hour shift, 6 days per 

week. 

n The Indian sandstone factories visited were operating a single 9 hour shift 

for an average 5-6 days a week depending on the time of year/seasonal weather 

conditions. 

n Our suppliers carry out a controlled quality audit at all stages of production. 

We believe it is our duty to be able to demonstrate the highest ethical standards. 

We will continue to undertake regular screening and auditing to ensure that the 

highest standards are maintained at all times. 

As a company, we only work with reputable and reliable suppliers who meet our 

own stringent requirements and those within our industry. In China and India, our 

supplier partners have both achieved ISO 9002 Quality Assurance accreditation. 

An example of workers at Sandstone quarries in India 

Marshalls Sandstone supplier workers 

10

11 

www.urbanengineering.co.uk 

Sales Office: 01704 540 405 


Marshalls Urban Structures 

Portico Canopy, Harrop Fold High School, Salford 

ADI Walkway, Peugeot, Citroen Automobiles UK Ltd, Coventry 

Marshalls Urban Structures are specialists in the design, manufacture and installation 

of stylish and cost-effective canopy and shelter products, comprising: 

n Canopies and Walkways 

n Cycle Storage 

n Tensile Structures 

n Youth Shelters 

n Smoking Shelters 

n Waiting Shelters 

urban structures 

Marshalls Urban Structures have a wealth of experience in the education sector, 

including work on new build schools as part of the Building Schools for the Future 

Initiative (BSF). Marshalls Urban Structures also have strong experience in the 

commercial, retail and transport sectors. 

Urban Structures offer a comprehensive service, from initial client consultation and 

site visit, through to the manufacture and installation of the product. 

Marshalls Urban Structures offer a full UK-wide installation service, carried out by 

professional installation teams in accordance with health and safety guidelines.

www.woodhouse.co.uk 

Sales Office: 01926 314313 


Woodhouse 

Oxford Street, London, Selux Genus 3 Lighting System 

Woodhouse design and manufacture exterior lighting and street furniture to the 

highest international standards. Systems have been used on many of the most 

prestigious public and private sector projects in the UK and overseas, ranging from 

the award-winning reconstruction of Kensington High Street to the stunning new 

development of Dubai. Woodhouse specialise in coordinated systems: families of 

lighting, signs, seats, bollards and other street furniture sharing common design 

themes and materials. The Woodhouse philosophy is to help reduce street clutter 

and create visual links between public spaces. With extensive experience of project 

specific design, Woodhouse have both the engineering skills and the manufacturing 

resources needed to turn clients’ concepts into functioning and practical reality. 

The Woodhouse website contains full specification details along with a project 

based image library and publication downloads. 

Coordinated systems: 

n AUBRILAM 

n CAMPUS 

n ESCOFET 

n GEO 

n MOTIS 

n SELUX 

n SPECIALS 

Urbis Centre, Manchester, GEO Asymmetrical Parklight 

Selux Fiore Lantern, Park Central 

12

Bespoke seating/bollards, King’s Dock, Liverpool 

13 

Bespoke Monoscape Treepave tree frame and paving, Milton Keynes 

Monoscape Cubes, Leeds Valley Business Park


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Monoscape 

Monoscape Street Furniture is produced in high quality precast concrete. The high 

physical density of concrete makes pieces robust and durable and well suited to 

withstand the rigours of the toughest modern urban environment. Due to the 

natural weathering properties of concrete, pieces will require minimal maintenance 

and upkeep. By installing Monoscape street furniture you can be assured that you 

have invested in pieces that will have a long life span and deliver excellent value 

for money. 

Monoscape street furniture features designs from the simple and utilitarian as in the 

Boulevard and Strada ranges, to those which showcase German design from Stein 

and Design and are cast in more decorative forms as seen in Scala, Ovito and Riva. 

All are functional and are available in a number of shapes and sizes. 

Highly versatile, heavy duty pieces of concrete street furniture such as planters and 

bollards can be used effectively to guide the flow of pedestrians or traffic, limit 

vehicular access, prevent parking or act as ram raid deterrents. Other street furniture 

items such as seating and litter bins can be used not just for functional purposes but 

also to enhance the aesthetic appeal of a landscape. 

Each piece of street furniture can be used independently or specified together 

to create a fully coordinating scheme. Layouts can be created easily and where 

necessary, revisions can be effected simply and economically by moving, adding or 

interchanging products. This provides a vast amount of choice for pedestrianised 

and trafficked areas particularly in residential, retail, leisure, commercial and 

industrial sites. Communal public areas can be maximised by adding seating, cycle 

racks and functional or commemorative signage. 

Monoscape street furniture is available in four finishes; polished, ground, exposed 

and etched. Marshalls vast experience in concrete products means that we can offer 

a wide range of colours which complement and coordinate with our paving ranges. 

For full details on colours available please refer to the swatches on page 384. 

This unique offering allows Monoscape street furniture to be easily integrated into 

any scheme that features Marshalls paving products. 

Monoscape offers freedom and flexibility for Architects and Specifiers. Marshalls 

Street Furniture is able to work with Designers to make concepts a reality. Bespoke 

commissions are undertaken and our experienced team can can advise on designs, 

provide prototypes and recommend appropriate methods of installation. 

Contact our sales order office for more information. 

Spherical 500 Bollards, Odeon Cinema and Leisure Complex, Tunbridge Wells 

Boulevard 700 Bollards, Monk’s Cross Retail Park, York 

Truro Bollards, Southport 

14

Belluno Benches with natural stone inset, Classica Planters and Citta Litter Bin, Welsh Development Agency 

15 

Detail of Romana Curved Bench in Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset 

Estate Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Bellitalia 

A collection of Italian street furniture. In a balance between tradition and innovation, 

Bellitalia is manufactured from concrete, yet each piece is innovative and design led, 

resulting in strong sculptural forms that will make an architectural statement in any 

landscape. 

Bellitalia has been designed to demonstrate durability, functionality and style. The 

solidity provided by concrete is married with innovative features such as planters 

with self levelling systems and planters with integral seats which extend their use. 

In its simplest form furniture is cast using either high quality pozzolanic concrete 

or Portland Cement. A high quality finish and enhanced weathering protection are 

created by vibration, sandblasting and coating with a clear acrylic resin. A selection 

of planters, litter bins and bollards are also decorated with polished copper bands. 

Polished concrete furniture has a lustrous finish and is available in seven beautiful 

colourways. Each piece is cast using a fine marble aggregate mixed with concrete, 

a smooth finish is created by a rigorous polishing process, the piece is then coated 

with a protective varnish and further polished. 

Bellitalia also features products which are a fusion of concrete and metals. Concrete 

is imaginatively combined with steel or stainless steel to create street furniture with 

a unique appearance. In addition, selected pieces of furniture are combined with 

copper plating to provide a warm, lustrous finish. 

Furniture can be used in almost any type of landscape, however popular uses are 

retail, commercial, residential developments and harbour and coastal areas. Bellitalia 

provides the Architect and Specifiers with a fantastic choice of unique and individual 

products with which to create a scheme. 

Bespoke commissions can be undertaken on request. Our team will liase with 

Bellitalia to ensure products are taken from concept to production smoothly. 

The large Giove Planter, commissioned as a large capacity planter for trees and large 

shrubs, was required to coordinate with current urban planting in the standard size 

Giove. Marshalls Street Furniture included holes in the base of the planter to take 

cabling for uplighters and advised on transporting and installing. 

Large Giove Planter, Tuero, St David’s, Cardiff 

Saturnia Planter and Romana Benches in Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset 

Primavera Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff 

16

Stonelements Seat with Tapered Legs in Polished Black on Marshalls Conservation Paving in Silver Grey 

17 

Simply Stone Bollards 

Simply Stone Bollards, detail


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Geoform 

Marshalls Street Furniture is proud to offer Geoform, which includes two ranges of 

distinctive street furniture, manufactured from Natural Stone. 

Marshalls Street Furniture commissioned award-winning designer Terence 

Woodgate to design a portfolio of street furniture from natural stone. The result 

is Stonelements; a unique collection of street furniture made from high quality, 

natural granite. Created from elements with smooth clean lines and rounded edges, 

Stonelements furniture allows you to introduce a purposeful, sophisticated aesthetic 

to your scheme. 

Simply Stone is a range of street furniture the design of which allows the quality of 

the granite to be the central focus. Based on simple, geometric shapes each piece 

comprises clean lines and angular edges. The simplicity of the designs combined 

with the natural beauty of granite makes Simply Stone street furniture a distinctive 

and attractive proposition. 

Both ranges are available in six stunning colourways, available in polished or fine 

picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished effects. Polished granite 

enhances the natural beauty of the stone providing an elegant finish with advanced 

aesthetic. Fine picked granite yields a matt, textured finish with superior slip resistant 

properties. For colour and finish swatches please refer to page 103. 

Natural Stone street furniture offers ideal solutions for those landscapes and 

projects which require highest quality products combined with leading design. 

Stonelements and Simply Stone offer Architects and Specifiers a range of prestigious 

street furniture which be used to add individuality to their projects. 

All of Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the company’s 

principal Chinese supplier who complies with the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base 

Code and the Principles of Implementation. 

Simple 2000 Bench, Contemporary Style, Silver Grey Fine 

Picked with bespoke detailing, Grace Darling Museum, Bamburgh 

Stonelements Seat with conical legs in fine picked silver grey 

Stonelements Stool and oval bench with conical legs in polished black 

18

Kingston Seat 

19 

Imperial Water Standpipe Imperial Noticeboard, Edinburgh 

Imperial Basket Bracket with motif


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Imperial 

Imperial features traditionally styled street furniture in cast iron or cast aluminium. 

Designs are reverent to more historical landscapes and ensure that Architects and 

Specifiers can specify street furniture that will retain the integrity of traditional 

landscapes ensuring that long-standing aesthetics are not compromised. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full range of cast iron furniture including: seats, bins, 

bollards and tree grilles. Cast iron designs are unmistakably Victorian in origin with 

ornate styling and intricate embellishments. Each piece is created to complement 

streets and town centres that were styled in the Victorian era. Logos, dates, insignia 

and sponsorship plaques can be incorporated subject to design suitability. 

Imperial street furniture is ideal for the more traditional landscaping project. Larger 

pieces, such as finger posts and hanging basket containers are cast in aluminium. 

Also, our extensive range of cast iron bollards now includes the versatile Imperial 

Bollard which is cast in aluminium. The Imperial Bollard can be specified as a water 

standpipe bollard or an electrical supply bollard. 

The use of a high quality ductile cast iron or cast aluminium in the manufacturing 

process means that products can withstand the arduousness of today’s urban 

environments. 

Imperial Hanging Basket Column, Malton 

Heritage Seat, Bourne 

20

M3 Seats and Tree Grille, Newby Primary School 

21 

Festival Curved Seat, Newgate Centre, Bishop Auckland Festival Litter Bin and Seat, Wishaw Hospital, Glasgow


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Ollerton 

Ollerton street furniture is recognised as being versatile, functional and stylish. 

Modular seating systems allow configurations to be created that will maximise 

the functionality of public spaces. The stainless steel M3 and steel Festival seating 

systems have been specified in almost endless permutations such as circles, squares 

and sweeping serpentine curves. These retain the strength, safety and vandal 

resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. Other seating designs 

include the Delta Festival which uses the contemporary design of the Festival range 

but is mounted on end castings with integral armrests and Buffalo which is offered 

in two colours to brighten school playgrounds and play areas in parks. 

Seating heights are compliant with the requirements of the Disability Discrimination 

Act. Armrests can be specified on certain models along with a full range of other 

optional extras. Coordinating items are also available including cycle stands, planters, 

tree protection signage and bollards. 

Furniture can be personalised with individual emblems. Seats can be customised 

with plaques, cast motifs and engraved slats or armrests. Tree guards and planters 

can be adorned with commemorative features. Hanging basket columns and notice 

boards can carry special dedications. 

Designed to a specification that will withstand the rigours of the modern urban 

landscape, furniture is always manufactured to the highest standards, providing 

confidence that it will have a long lifespan and will retain optimal appearance with 

only minimal maintenance. 

Ollerton also offer bandstands, pavilions and gazebos in traditional, oriental and 

modern octagonal designs. These structures are ideal to help create sheltered 

performance, rest and meeting areas for all types of landscapes. Gazebos and 

Pavilions also add a touch of charm to gardens. A performing arts structure has 

been added to the range, providing a versatile and modern bandstand system for 

the 21st century. 

Festival Curved Seat, Queen Elizabeth School, Cumbria 

M3 Serpentine Bench, Litter Bin, Bollards and Curved Seat, Chichester College 

Festival Seat, Birmingham 

22

RB 111 Steel Bollards with reflective banding on Tegula block paving in Traditional and Pennant Grey, Harrop Fold High School, Salford. 

23 

RS001 Liftout and Lockable bollards with 

bespoke cycle stands, Crown Point, Denton 

RS001, Galleries Retail Park, Washington


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Rhino 

Rhino specialise in perimeter protection, providing exceptional security and peace 

of mind. We provide comprehensive ranges of static bollards, telescopic bollards and 

hoop barriers. Each range includes products in different specifications and styles 

so that you can choose items that will deliver both the security and look that your 

project requires. 

With Rhino products you can be assured that you have specified the best protection 

for your scheme, whether it be to provide access control, ram raid deterrence or 

pedestrian walkways 

Static Bollards 

Static bollards are available in a range of styles in steel and stainless steel. Bollards 

can be specified to meet your specific requirements, with a full choice of standard 

RAL colour and reflective banding options available. DDA compliant specifications 

are also available. 

Steel bollards act as a true deterrent and provide an exceptionally strong solution to 

clients’ perimeter protection needs. 

Stainless steel bollards are extremely robust. Manufactured from grade 316L 

stainless steel, they require very little maintenance to retain their original, 

contemporary appearance. 

Telescopic Bollards 

Rhino telescopic bollards provide a secure method of protecting premises and 

vehicles, whilst still allowing access when required. Telescopic bollards are raised 

vertically and easily locked into place to provide excellent security and can be 

lowered into the ground in no time to allow vehicle access if needed. 

Rhino Perimeter Protection provides a comprehensive range of telescopic bollards 

in a variety of materials, to suit any application, from domestic driveways to areas of 

high ram-raid risk. 

Selected bollards are now available with a lift assist mechanism. Lift Assist bollards 

are fitted with an internal gas spring, which helps to aid manual handling and 

reduces the operating weight by approximately 70%. 

Hoop Barriers 

Hoop barriers are an ideal method of securing large perimeters, allowing pedestrian 

access whilst denying vehicular entry. Hoop barriers may be supplied in a static or 

detachable form. 

Detachable barriers can be part lifted to act as a gate, allowing quick vehicle access 

and can be completely removed if required, whilst static barriers provide a more 

permanent method of protection. 

RB105 Bollard, Galleon’s Reach, Becton 

RT SS5 Telescope Bollards, Mini/BMW Garage, Borehamwood 

RB60/SS Hoop Barriers, Mini/BMW Garage, Borehamwood 

24

Bicentenary Glasshouse, RHS Wisley 

25 

Garden City Seat, Chair and Low Table, Manchester 

Optima 2 Seater Seats, Cheshire


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Sineu Graff 

Sineu Graff is an elegant and prestigious collection of French street furniture 

showcasing both contemporary and classic styles. Sineu Graff facilitates the 

integration of designs into the most varied of settings by offering ranges in a 

choice of materials from cast iron, steel, stainless steel and timber. 

Sineu Graff manufacture in Viogenneim, Alsace. They have ISO9001 Bureau Veritos 

certification and are FSC accredited. Street Furniture is manufactured in a state-ofthe-art 

plant. Cast iron is sourced from a local French foundry, then cast iron and 

steel are treated by the powder-blast process: after cleaning and shot blasting, they 

are coated with a base layer of epoxy powder and an outer layer of powder coating. 

Innovation is at the forefront of design and Sineu Graff work in consultation with 

designers, architects, town planners, and end users. Recognising the changing 

attitudes to the use of public spaces, Sineu Graff developed ranges to meet the 

modern lifestyle requirements of any environment. Their street furniture can be used 

to create social meeting places, areas of rest and relaxation and comfortable waiting 

areas. Fashioned to match urban architectures, Sineu Graff furniture installations can 

enhance any scheme whether modern, traditional or rustic. 

An innovative new concept in street furniture is ‘Outdoor Living Rooms’. Five 

collections of furniture that include seats, benches, individual chairs, footstools, low 

tables and even loungers. Pieces can be grouped together to create convivial spaces. 

Outdoor Living Rooms aim to promote the creation of public spaces that encourage 

social interaction and participation, ultimately building a better feeling of community. 

Sineu Graff offer a large collection of street furniture including: seating, litter bins, 

tree grilles, bollards, and safety barriers. Furniture is of an exceptional quality and is 

always a good investment, with ranges including pieces that will suit any budget. 

Where full schemes are to be specified, coordinated items are offered. Individual 

pieces can also be specified in a colour of your choice from a full range of sable 

colours which provide a high quality lustrous, matt finish. A large range of standard 

RAL colours is also provided where a high gloss finish is preferred. 

Sineu Graff work closely with landscape architects in French municipalities and have 

undertaken many commissions in seating, litter bins, tree protection and planters, 

both to create new bespoke pieces and for individual customisation. Together 

Marshalls Street Furniture and Sineu Graff are able to offer new and innovative 

solutions for urban landscaping. 

Urban Trio Seat, Stainless Steel, Sunderland 

Stainless Steel machined top bollard, Sunderland 

Wishbone Cycle Stand, Sunderland 

26

1 2 3 

4 5 6 

27


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Ferrocast® 

Ferrocast is a polyurethane of an engineering grade specification which was 

developed from its use in the mining, quarrying and North Sea Oil Industries. These 

harsh environments were perfect testing conditions to prove that it would be an 

ideal material for manufacturing street furniture that would withstand the rigours of 

the urban environment. 

The durability of Ferrocast makes it a preferred material in the specification of street 

furniture. It has a longer, maintenance-free lifespan and helps to reduce ongoing 

maintenance costs. 

Ferrocast is an organic, plastic-like material which in raw state, is liquid. It is then 

mixed and poured around a steel core into the desired street furniture shape to form 

a solid, durable material. Originally Ferrocast was used to replicate Victorian cast iron 

street furniture that had perished or to create new items sympathetic to an existing 

scheme. Ferrocast is now used to create modern designs and today Ferrocast 

street furniture is specified to create both traditional landscapes and contemporary 

schemes. 

No other material can provide the variety of solutions required by today’s 

streetscape designers. The versatility of the material and the flexibility of the 

manufacturing process make it possible to offer standard products with customised 

detailing, including crests and logos. 

For larger projects, it is possible to commission bespoke pieces of Ferrocast street 

furniture with the minimum of capital investment due to Marshalls low-cost tooling 

system. Items can be made to your design and specifications or produced to your 

brief by in-house designers. Marshalls offer a full technical advice and design service 

to take creative concepts through to production. For post and rail systems, a full site 

survey and installation service is also offered. 

Benefits of Ferrocast Street Furniture 

Corrosion Resistance: Ferrocast will not rust or corrode as it is resistant to many 

chemicals including saline and uric acid. 

Impact and Abrasion Resistance: Ferrocast will not dent or scratch as the material 

has a hardness rating of 70 on the shore D scale. 

Maintains Optimum Appearance: Ferrocast polyurethane is through-coloured 

with a pigment that will match the eventual paint colour. Should any surface 

damage occur it will not be apparent. 

Inherent Structural Strength: Ferrocast pieces cast around an internal steel core 

have increased structural strength. For bollards, an anti-ram specification is available. 

Reduced Weight: Ferrocast bollards are approximately one third the weight of cast 

iron. This reduces delivery and installation costs; no on site lifting is required and 

installation is quicker and easier. 

1. Large WaterSide Bin, in profile, Blackpool. 

2. Red Route Cycle Stand, Islington. 

3. S8P Series Tree Grille, Leeds Valley Business Park. 

4. Scarborough Post and Rail, Scarborough. 

5. Reproduction Lamp Column, Wrexham. 

6. Finger Post with Pointed Finial. 

Fixed and removable Seaham Bollards, Bewdley 

Bespoke Seating, commissioned by Burnes and Nice Consultancy for 

Gallow Tree Gate Leicester 

Bespoke seating, Torbay Post and Wire System, Waterside Bins, Torbay 

28

1 2 3 4 

29


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Intruplas 

Marshalls Street Furniture has an exclusive partnership agreement with Intruplas, 

a recycled plastic composite (RPC) manufacturer, to work together to develop and 

distribute street furniture made from recycled plastic and other recyclable materials. 

Intruplas has a very strong environmental ethos and contribute to helping develop 

a sustainable environment. Their core belief is that what is good for business can 

be good for the environment. In keeping with their ethos, Intruplas ensure that all 

electricity used on their site comes from renewable resources. Furthermore they are 

accredited by the Environment Agency as recyclers of plastic waste. 

All of Intruplas’s hard work and commitment to the environment has not gone 

unnoticed as they have received awards for excellence including an award from 

former Prime Minister, Tony Blair. The award was presented to them for achieving all 

of the targets set out in Agenda 21. Additionally Intruplas were awarded with the 

Eco Design for Profit Award from the Environmental Business Network. 

Our RPC products are manufactured from 100% waste plastic material, no paint, 

preservation or surface treatments are added to the mix. Intruplas are also unique in 

the fact that they can process many forms of waste plastic including plastic which is 

deemed to be contaminated. 

Intruplas Recycling Process 

1. Plastic waste arrives in a variety of sizes and formats, as a first step it is granulated 

to make it easier to handle. 

2. Different types of plastic are blended together to create the correct mix for the 

composite. Using various plastics creates a high strength product that is very 

durable and will not sag over time. 

3. The blended mix is melted, effectively resulting in a new material. 

4. The material is then extruded into profiles. 

5. Profiles are hand-finished then assembled into the complete finished piece 

of furniture. 

6. Each piece of furniture can then be recycled itself! 

5 6 

30


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Bollards 

Concrete Bollards 33 

Monoscape 34 

Bellitalia: Concrete, concrete with metals and polished concrete 37 

Natural Stone Bollards 39 

Geoform: Simply Stone 40 

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards 41 

Imperial 42 

Sineu Graff 44 

Antony Gormley 45 

PAS 68 Impact Tested Bollards 47 

RhinoGuard 47 

Steel Bollards 49 

Rhino 49 


Stainless Steel Bollards 53 

Rhino 54 


Telescopic Bollards 58 

Rhino 58 

Rhino Hoop Barriers 65 

Polyurethane Bollards 67 

Ferrocast® Bollards 67 

Ferrocast Special Bollards 76 

Plastic Bollards 79 

Plastic Bollards 79 

Plastic Vergemarkers 82 

Plastic Low Level Signage 83 

Recycled Plastic Composite Bollards 85 

Intruplas 85 

Timber Bollards 86 


‹ RS 001 Bollards, Galleries Retail Park, Washington 32

33 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Concrete Bollards 

Spherical 700 Bollard 

Spherical 500 Bollard in blue and Spherical 700 Bollard in blue with leaf pattern 

Concrete bollards provide effective security and perimeter protection, whilst also 

being incredibly durable and cost effective. 

Our comprehensive range of concrete bollards contains numerous designs and 

finishes encompassing the purely utilitarian and those with contemporary styling, 

providing real choice in precincts, trafficked routes, residential and urban areas. 

All bollards are manufactured from high quality aggregates and are fully reinforced. 

Quality control cubes are tested in accordance with EN 12390-3:2001 at seven and 

28 days to a minimum strength requirement of 30N/mm2 at 28 days. 

Colours and Finishes 

Bollards are available in a wide variety of colours, including mixes manufactured to 

coordinate with Marshalls concrete paving. 

Four finishes are available: polished, ground, exposed and etched. 

A bespoke specialist finish can be created to order whereby a surface is sandblasted 

to show a name, logo or pattern. 

The Beadalite finish is a highly reflective coating which is composed of glass micro 

beads that are applied to the product, acting like thousands of tiny cats’-eyes and 

making the bollard ‘light up’ when vehicle headlights are shone across them. 

Colours 

Precise colour and surface texture should be judged from actual materials rather 

than photographic representations. 

Smooth Grey 

Conservation 

Harvest Buff Charcoal 

Smooth White Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Cream 

New mixes to co-ordinate with Marshalls Paving 

Exposed White 

Exposed Black Exposed Brown Exposed Black/White Exposed River Gravel Etched Silver Grey 

Etched Pale Buff Beadalite 

Saxon 

Silver Grey 

Natural Buff Charcoal Red Marigold 

Finishes 

Polished Ground 

Exposed Etched Patterned


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD01 Bollards Q50 190 Seating ............................ page 90 

Litter Bins ........................ page 174 


Cubes in Silver Grey, Leeds Valley Business Park 

SPHERICAL 500 SPHERICAL 700 

SPHERICAL ILLUMINATED BOLLARD CUBE 

275 

400 2 

500Ø 

275 

700Ø 

Coordinating items 

Cycle Parking ................... page 219 

Planters ........................... page 232 

Customised Products 

n Bollards and columns may be customised to receive a motif disc. Manufactured 

to special order the disc may convey instructions or provide information such 

as no entry, no parking, keep left or cycle path, alternatively they may hold 

commemorative plaques or corporate branding. 

n Other options such as reflective bands and high visibility discs can be specified. 

Please contact our Sales Office for information on colours and sizes. 

n Marshalls continue to produce a large back catalogue and would be pleased to 

quote for products not shown here. 

n For safe handling and placing, spherical and cube bollards are available with 

lifting hoops to order. 

Fixing 

n Bollards are root fixed. 

STOCK 

Ex Stock products are 

available in standard 

colours and finishes only 

50 

596 2 

660 

700Ø 

100 

200 

70 

600 

34

35 

WOODHOUSE 

RICHMOND 

COMPTON 

BOULEVARD 500 

150Ø 

230Ø 

305Ø 

305Ø 

245Ø 

260Ø 

455 

460 

BRIDGFORD 

STOCK 150Ø 

STOCK 

STOCK 

535 

455 

565 

380 

495 

247 

WILMSLOW 

TRURO 

BOULEVARD 700 

270Ø 

305Ø 

380Ø 

280Ø 

Shown with reflective band 

915 

455 

990 

460 

730 

365 

760 

460

WEXHAM 

CAMBRIDGE 

LARGE MARKER BOLLARD 

230Ø 

245Ø 

760 

460 

800 

450 

WEXHAM MAJOR 

MILLBANK WITH RIBBED TOP 

OVITO BOLLARD 

OPTIONS 

Product Diameter Length HAG Weight Standard Reflective Hazard Lift Out 

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish/Colour Discs Banding Removable 

Boulevard 500 Bollard* 260Ø 742 495 93 Exposed Black Brown n 

Boulevard 700 Bollard 280Ø 1095 730 152 Exposed Black Brown n 

Bridgford Bollard 270Ø 1370 915 102 Smooth Grey n n 

Cambridge Bollard 245Ø 1250 800 138 Exposed River Gravel n 

Compton Bollard 245Ø 945 565 114 Smooth Grey 

Cube 660 2 670 600 350 Etched Top/Silver Grey Sides 

Large Marker Bollard 450 2 1155 705 441 Exposed Silver Grey n 

Millbank Bollard 230Ø 1460 1000 140 Exposed n 

Richmond Bollard 305Ø 990 535 152 Smooth Grey 

Spherical 500 Bollard 500Ø 775 500 166+69 Exposed Silver Grey 

Spherical 700 Bollard 700Ø 1000 700 444+165 Exposed Silver Grey 

Spherical Illuminated Bollard 700Ø 1000 700 450+165 Exposed White 

Truro Bollard 380Ø 1220 760 305 Smooth Grey 

Wexham Bollard 230Ø 1220 760 102 Exposed Silver Grey n 

Wexham Major Bollard 330Ø 1200 750 200 Exposed Silver Grey 

Wilmslow Bollard 305Ø 1450 990 253 Smooth Grey 

Woodhouse Bollard 230Ø 915 455 57 Smooth Grey n 

Ovito Bollard 260Ø 1200 900 95 Grey Granite 

*Also available as 300ø or 900ø sizes 

705 

450 

250 

STOCK STOCK 

Shown with 

beadalite band 

330Ø 

230Ø 

260 

900 

300 

750 

450 

1000 

460 

Ovito Bollard is available in grey granite 

and anthracite basalt (black) as shown. 

36

37 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD02 Bollards Q50 190 Seating ............................. page 96 




Concrete, concrete with metals and polished 

Basso Castrocaro Bollard 

ALTO TIPO BOLLARD WITH COPPER BAND 

ALTO COPPER BOLLARD 33 

720 

915 

210Ø 

500 

1165 


Planters ........................... page 235 

Tree Protection ................ page 286 

Alto Tipo and Basso Castrocaro Bollards are steel reinforced bollards manufactured in 

white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected using an acrylic 

resin coating. The Alto Tipo Bollard consists of two elements linked by a threaded 

stainless steel bar and divided by a decorative copper band. Each bollard is fitted with 

a lifting hook for ease of installation. To install, simply place in the required position. 

Alto and Low Copper Bollards are manufactured from steel-reinforced precast concrete, 

vibrated, sandblasted and protected with a natural copper coating to a thickness of 

1mm. Bollards are formed from a copper shell filled with concrete and internally resin 

bonded, reinforced with a single hot dip galvanised steel rod 48mm in diameter. 

The Alto 33 is a removable system using floor socket fixings. Drill a 350mm deep, 

120mm wide hole and set the bollard’s floor socket in the hole in a cement bed. 

The bollard may be fixed permanently by drilling a 300mm deep, 100mm wide hole 

and setting the base directly in the hole in a cement bed. The bollard is also available 

with a key-operated floor socket system to open and close access routes. 

Polished Bollards are manufactured from a marble aggregate with a maximum particle 

size of 25mm, finished smooth and treated with a protective varnish to create 

an elegant polished effect. The upper level features a 40mm diameter brass plate. 

To facilitate moving, the Titano bollard framework consists of a hook and axle box 

complete with eyebolt, the Plutone has a threaded steel bar anchored to an axle box and 

eyebolt. To install either bollard, simply place in the desired position. The Sfera consists of 

a pipe and steel stirrups anchored to two axle boxes at each end of the bollard, and an 

eyebolt is screwed into the top axle box. To install, drill a hole, place the bollard vertically 

with the tang in the hole, fix with liquid cement then restore the paving. 

BASSO CASTROCARO BOLLARD 

BASSO COPPER BOLLARD 15 

450 

305 

406 

310

TITANO 

SFERA 400 

PLUTONE 

Polished Colours 

497 

500 

515 

294 394 494 

294 394 494 

214 

283 

400Ø 



637 

260 

377 

750 

827 

497 

SFERA 300 

SFERA 500 

Rosso Bianco Giallo Veneziano Verde Nero Porfido 

214 

357 

283 

470 

637 

260 

377 

PLUTONE BOLLARD WITH ASHTRAY 

Diameter Overall 

Product Colour Width Length HAG Weight 

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) 

Alto Tipo Bollard with Copper Band White or Grey 500 720 720 200 

Basso Castrocaro Bollard White or Grey 406 450 450 116 

Alto Copper Bollard 33 Copper 210 1165 915 28 

Basso Copper Bollard 15 Copper 305 310 310 36 

Titano Bollard See Swatch 500 515 515 200 

Sfera Bollard (300) See Swatch 294 497 283 41 



Plutone Bollard See Swatch 400 750 750 174 

Plutone Bollard with Ashtray See Swatch 400 685 685 168 

827 

685 

497 

294 394 

400 

214 

283 

357 

470 

637 

38 

260

39 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD03 Bollards Q50 190 Seating ........................... page 104 

Natural Stone Bollards 

Riva Barioni Bench and Sphere Bollard 

Simply Stone is a range of functional and flexible pieces. Basic bollard shapes such as 

a cube, a sphere and a monolith are complemented by two angular benches, all will 

create clean and simple solutions for any urban space. 

The Simply Stone range uses high quality granite, one of the hardest stones which 

can be used to create bollards that are strong, durable and enduring. Simply Stone 

is available in six beautiful, harmonising colourways and available in polished or fine 

picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished effects. 

Designed to form an aesthetic option for boundary marking applications, the 

Simple 150 Monolith Bollard provides clean, elegant lines to enhance any 

architectural style. This contemporary bollard is designed to stand at 1000mm 

above ground, with a 300mm securing root. 

At the forefront of design simplicity, the versatile and practical Simple 550 Cube 

is a dual purpose freestanding seat or bollard. For a smooth, comfortable finish, all 

corners and sides of the cube are chamfered and rounded off to eliminate angular 

edges. The unique base design allows the cube to be easily moved when required, 

using the appropriate equipment. 

Creating a calm and serene effect for urban schemes, the Simple 500/700 Spheres 

are elegantly rounded and available in 500mm and 700mm diameters, attaching to 

a fixing base via a spigot. All spheres are provided fully assembled for site installation. 

All Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the company’s 

principal supplier who complies to the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base Code and 

the Principles of Implementation. 

For details of the Simple 2000 contemporary and trestle benches refer to page 104. 


Colours 



Silver Grey 

Polished 

Mid Grey 

Fine Picked 

Polished Fine Picked 

Black 


Pink 


Light Beige 


Dark Green 

Polished Fine Picked



Natural Stone Bollards 

Simply Stone 

SIMPLE 150 MONOLITH BOLLARD 

SIMPLE 500 SPHERE 

500 

150 

300 

1000 

300 

SIMPLE 550 CUBE 

Diameter 

Product Colour Width Length HAG Weight 


Simple 150 Monolith Bollard See Swatch 150 1300 1000 88 

Simple 550 Cube See Swatch 550 550 550 493 

Simple 500 Sphere See Swatch 500 500 + 100 plinth 600 214 

Simple 700 Sphere See Swatch 700 700 + 122 plinth 822 560 

100 238 

SIMPLE 700 SPHERE 


700 

550 

550 

400 

550 

122 355 

550 

40 

40

41 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards 

MSF 102 Cast Iron Bollard with white tape 

Imperial Water Standpipe 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of traditional cast iron bollards which allow 

you to either create or preserve a Victorian look within your landscape. All of our 

cast iron bollards are manufactured from ductile iron. Ductile iron retains all of cast 

iron’s qualities of machinability and corrosion resistance but has additional strength, 

toughness and ductility making it ideal for use as a bollard. 

All cast iron bollards are coated with a rust preventative primer and painted with a 

black gloss 9017 as standard. Bollards are also available in other RAL and BS colours 

as special order items. 

All our cast iron bollards are manufactured to BS EN 1563 1997. 

The following customised options are also available: 

Fixing Method: Root fixing is standard with the option of lift out and lockable fixing. 

Second Colour: Hand painted detailing and embellishments can be specified. 

Hazard Banding: Reflective tapes and discs can be added for increased visibility 

and safety. 

Crests, Logos and Coats of Arms: Marshalls can also personalise cast iron bollards 

with crests, logos and coats of arms on special request. These will be hand painted 

by our finishing team. 

The Imperial Bollard is cast in aluminium and can be coated in a colour of your choice. 

It is available as a standard bollard, a water standpipe and an electricity supply.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD04 Bollards Q50 190 

Removable Bollards Q50 196 

Cast Iron and Aluminium Bollards 

MSF 101 STANDARD CANNON BOLLARD 

MSF 103 BOLLARD 

MSF 108 LARGE CANNON BOLLARD 

MSF 120 HENRY BOLLARD 

155Ø 

170Ø 

125Ø 

185Ø 

150Ø 

200Ø 

150Ø 

1200 

350 

800 

300 

1100 

300 

1025 

300 


Seating ........................... page 110 


Planters ........................... page 263 


MSF 102 MANCHESTER 3 RING TOP BOLLARD 

MSF 105 HALF CANNON BOLLARD 

160Ø 

200Ø 

210Ø 

240Ø 

MSF 114 FLUTED BOLLARD WITH DISC TOP 

MSF 121 GEORGE BOLLARD 

200Ø 

200Ø 

155Ø 

Notice Boards .................. page 297 

Signage & Lamp Columns .. page 307 

Bandstands ..................... page 353 

1000 

300 

100Ø 

1000 

325 

1000 

300 

1000 

300 

42

43 

MSF 123 

MSF 131 

130Ø 

160Ø 

130Ø 

170 2 

IMPERIAL BOLLARD (ALUMINIUM) SHOWN AS WATER STANDPIPE 

765 

300 

960 

300 

1025 

325 

MSF 128 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method Add Ons Utility Options 

Overall Lift Out 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard and Hazard Chain Water Electricity 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Lockable Banding Connectors Standpipe Supply 

Dome Top Bollard with One Decorative Ring MSF 101 170 1550 1200 49 Painted Black n n n 

Gloss 9017 

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering MSF 102 200 1300 1000 42 Painted Black n n n 

Pillar and Two Decorative Rings Gloss 9017 

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering Pillar MSF 103 185 1100 800 34 Painted Black n n n 

and One Decorative Ring Gloss 9017 

Exposed Cannon Ball Top Robust Bollard MSF 105 240 1325 1000 68 Painted Black n n n 

with Two Decorative Rings Gloss 9017 

Dome Top Robust Bollard with One MSF 108 200 1400 1100 68 Painted Black n n n 

Decorative Ring Gloss 9017 

Rounded Top Bollard with Tapering MSF 114 200 1300 1000 53 Painted Black n n n 

Fluted Pillar Gloss 9017 

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Pillar MSF 120 150 1325 1025 60 Painted Black n n n 

and One Decorative Ring Gloss 9017 

Exposed Cannon Ball Top Bollard with MSF 121 155 1300 1000 70 Painted Black n n n 

Tapering Pillar and Three Decorative Rings Gloss 9017 

Cannon Ball Top Robust Bollard with MSF 123 160 1065 765 38 Painted Black n n n 

Tapering Pillar Gloss 9017 

Dome Top Bollard with Two Slim Decorative Rings MSF 128 135 1250 950 65 Painted Black n n n 

Gloss 9017 

Cannon Ball Top Bollard with Circular Pillar MSF 131 170 1260 960 80 Painted Black n n n 

and Square Base Gloss 9017 

Locking Socket for Cast Iron Bollard MSF 39A 221 - - 10 Painted Black n 

Gloss 9017 

Semi Dome Top Bollard with Tapering Fluted Imperial 200 1350 1025 31 Painted Black n n n n 

Pillar and One Decorative Ring (Aluminium) Gloss 9017 

1025 

325 

135Ø 

1025 

325 

950 

300 

Door




Cast Iron Bollards 


Seating ........................... page 114 Litter Bins ........................ page 195 

CLASSIC CLASSIC 40 351 

CLASSIC 40 352 

CLASSIC 40 354 

STYLE STYLE 40 341 

STYLE 40 342 

STYLE 40 344 

CONTEMPORARY CONTEMPORARY 40 335 CONTEMPORARY 40 336 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method Add Ons 

Overall Ground Concealed Lift Out 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard Post Base and Chain 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Fixing (H) Plate (E) Lockable (D) Connectors 

Classic 40.351 110 n/a 1150 37 Black Polyester Paint n n n n 

40.352 110 n/a 800 21 Black Polyester Paint n n n n 


Style 40.341 120 n/a 1150 30 Black Polyester Paint n n n n 



Contemporary 40.335 140 n/a 800 24 Black Polyester Paint n n n 

40.336 140 n/a 600 19 Black Polyester Paint n n n 

*For full installation instructions please see page 397 

110Ø 

120Ø 

140Ø 

1150 

1150 

800 

110Ø 

120Ø 

140Ø 

800 

800 

600 

110Ø 

120Ø 

600 

600 

44

45 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Antony Gormley Bollards 

Antony Gormley Bollards, Peckham High Street 

World-renowned British sculptor Antony Gormley became involved in a 

regeneration project local to his studio which was in the middle of the ‘Bellenden 

Renewal Area.’ The objective was to introduce pieces of art into the urban landscape, 

which would be both functional and enjoyable at the same time. Working with his 

foundry men, Hargreaves Foundry in Halifax, he decided to create further pieces 

inspired by his sculpture ‘Coat Peg.’ ‘Coat Peg’ was designed as part of the Tate’s 

1999 DIY project to get artist-designed objects into ordinary households. With 

this principal in mind three other pieces were designed that would be sculptural 

pieces in their own right, would enhance the urban environment and of course 

provide protection for those that used the road. Following some controversy over 

the designs, the project and the sculptured bollards were so popular that the local 

business people funded the improvements themselves. 

Speaking about the project Mr Gormley said, “I love cast iron for its strength and 

earthiness. I hope these simple forms will sit on the street confidently and be 

guardians of its two users, the pedestrians and the car. I look forward to them slowly 

popping up in the urban world like mushrooms in the night.” 

Each design stands at 1000mm above ground and weigh approximately 95 

kilograms. Each piece is individually numbered before it leaves the foundry and is 

accompanied by a certificate of authenticity.



Bollards 

Antony Gormley 

No. 1 No. 2 

No. 3 No. 4 

240 

345 

1300 

1300 


HeIgHT 

Overall 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish 

Antony Gormley No. 1 240 1300 1000 95 Naturalised Cast Iron 




330 

400 

1300 

1300 

46

47 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

PAS 68 Impact Tested Bollards 

RhinoGuard 25/40, successfully impact tested using a 2.5 tone 4x4 at 40mph 

Following events in recent years, the threat of international terrorism in the UK has 

risen to unprecedented levels. International terrorist groups have stated their intent 

to deliberately target innocent people, with the aim of inflicting mass casualties, 

maximum damage and destruction. 

To combat these threats, the UK government has devised an integrated counter 

terrorism strategy to help ensure that the areas considered to be at greatest risk are 

appropriately safeguarded. A key element of this strategy is to reduce the threat of 

vehicle borne terrorism. 

The Agencies 

OSCT – The Office for Security and Counter-Terrorism leads the work on counter 

terrorism in the UK, working closely with the police and security services. 

NaCTSO – The National Counter Terror Security Office is a police unit co-located 

with the CPNI. NaCTSO work closely with the CPNI to provide advice and guidance 

on protecting ‘crowded places’ and reducing opportunities for terrorism through 

environmental design. 

CPNI – The Centre for the Protection of National Infrastructure provides integrated 

security advice, training and awareness on designing out vehicle borne terrorism. 

A key objective of the CPNI is to encourage the implementation of proportionate 

physical security measures to locations at potential risk. These are considered to 

be those which make up the critical national infrastructure (transport, emergency 

services and key utilities) and also any ‘crowded places’. 

It is of key importance to keep hostile vehicles (including Vehicle Borne Improvised 

Explosive Devices and ram raiding criminals) as far away from buildings and 

pedestrian areas as possible, through ‘designing in’ security measures to our streets 

and landscapes. 

By implementing these measures, we can create safe ‘stand off distances’ between 

vehicles and potential targets, which protect people and buildings in the event of 

an attack. 

BSI PAS 68 

The BSI PAS 68 standard, devised by the CPNI, specifies a performance classification for 

vehicle security barriers and their foundations, when subjected to a horizontal impact. 

BSI PAS 68 involves the physical impact testing of perimeter security products at 

varying speeds with different vehicle types. This ranges from medium sized saloon 

cars to large trucks travelling at various speeds, measuring the penetration of the 

load carrying part of the vehicle beyond the barrier. 

This enables businesses and organisations to make informed and proportionate 

decisions on protective security based on the levels of risk and vulnerability at a site, 

the traversability of the surrounding landscape and the overall project budget. 

It is only through specifying products successfully tested to PAS 68 that protective 

security can truly be assured, however this does not always mean that the highest 

specifications of PAS 68 protection are required. 

Depending on site specific conditions and access, it is often not physically possible 

for larger vehicles to reach the required speed to carry out a successful ram attack. 

In these cases, lower, more cost effective levels of security can be employed.

RhinoGuard Bollards 

Designed to fulfil the needs of locations which do not necessarily require the highest 

specification of PAS 68 security, Marshalls has developed and successfully impact 

tested two new security bollards. 

Tested at the MIRA independent research facility, the RhinoGuard 15/30 and 25/40 

bollards, provide guaranteed impact performance at two distinct levels of protection 

and budget. 

RhinoGuard 15/30: 

n Successfully impact tested using a 1.5 tonne saloon car travelling at 30mph 

(48km/h). 

n The vehicle was brought to rest, immobilising it completely, making a second ram 

attempt impossible. 

n Designed for areas which are either at lower risk of a vehicle borne attack or have 

tighter vehicle access. 

n Provides the ideal solution for a wide range of applications which previously would 

have used a generic, untested ‘anti ram’ specification, including retail parks, garage 

forecourts and supermarkets. 

RhinoGuard 25/40: 

n Successfully impact tested using a 2.5 tonne 4x4 utility vehicle travelling at 40mph 

(64 km/h). 

n The vehicle was brought to a complete stop, with zero penetration beyond the 

point of the bollard. 

n Designed for sites which are at moderate risk of an attack, and where a medium 

sized vehicle could reach considerable speed. This includes rail stations, sports 

stadia, shopping centres, ports and public realm projects. 

STAINLESS STEEL 

STEEL FERROCAST (Example Styles) 

*Sleeves shown apply to RhinoGuard 15/30 bollard 

The RhinoGuard 15/30, successfully stopped a 1.5 tone car at 30mph 

Sleeve Options 

RhinoGuard bollard cores are tested so that they can be finished in a variety of 

standard cosmetic sleeve designs in steel and stainless steel, to meet the requirements 

of any project. 

The standard styles shown to the left apply to the RhinoGuard 15/30 bollard; however 

the same options are also available for the RhinoGuard 25/40, in larger diameters. 

Standard Sleeve Diameters: 

RhinoGuard 15/30 - Steel: 168mm 

- Stainless Steel: 129mm 

RhinoGuard 25/40 - Steel: 194mm 

- Stainless Steel 204mm 

Bespoke Design 

A fully bespoke design service is also available for RhinoGuard 

bollards specified in Ferrocast polyurethane. 

This service enables clients to specify bollards in any style to 

complement any landscape and meet exact project requirements. Bollards can be 

designed to recreate existing traditional themes, ideal for heritage sites, or to create 

a more unique contemporary styling. 

Examples of some of the styles which can be achieved are shown to the left 

(Manchester, Westminster and Waterside styles shown). 

Please contact our sales order office for more information on our bespoke design 

service for RhinoGuard bollards. 

48

49 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Steel 

RB 111 Steel Bollards with yellow banding on Tegula block paving in Traditional and Pennant Grey, Harrop Fold High School, Salford 

Rhino static steel bollards provide security to any landscape. The exceptional 

strength of steel makes it ideal for ram-raid deterrence, protected parking and the 

demarcation of pedestrian walkways. 

Manufactured to the highest standard, Rhino steel bollards are hot dip galvanised 

to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). Bollards are polyester powder coated in RAL black 9005 

as standard, and can be specified to match almost any British Standard or RAL colour 

if required. 

Specification options 

Dependent on the level of protection required, a number of specification options 

are available: 

Standard: Standard steel bollards are exceptionally strong and will not fracture 

on impact. 

Anti Ram: For increased internal strength, a steel joist can be added. This makes the 

bollards ideal for ram raid deterrence and preventing any vehicles from penetrating 

beyond the bollard. 

Fixing Options 

Root Fixing: Rhino 1000mm bollards are supplied with a 500mm root depth as 

standard, which is to be placed underground and secured using concrete. A cross 

bar keys into the concrete for added strength, ensuring that the bollard cannot 

be moved or twisted. A variety of heights are available, however the required root 

depths will differ based on the option selected. Specific lengths are also available 

on request. 

Base Plate: Bollards can be supplied complete with an integral base fixing plate 

which is attached to the ground using bolts. This option is ideal for applications 

where ground excavation is not an option. 

Lift out and Lockable: Removable bollards allow temporary vehicle access and can 

be replaced when works are complete. 

Customisation Options 

Hazard Banding 

• Rhino Bollards are available with an option of Class 2 reflective banding for 

increased visibility and safety. 

• Banding is available in a choice of three standard colour options; Amber, red and 

white. Additional colours are available on request. 

Chain Connectors: Allows a chain to be fixed to the bollards to form sections that 

cannot be opened.





Steel 

RB 101 

Flat Cap 

version available 

ex-stock 

RB 109 

RB 119 

RB 150 

Also available 

ex-stock 

114 x 1500 

97 

150 

28 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

STOCK 

STOCK 

RB 105 

RB 111 

RB 123 

LEEDS BOLLARD 


Traffic Management ......... page 368 

50 

28 

28 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

1000 

500 

168Ø 

STOCK 

50

51 

AQUARIUS WATER STANDPIPE BOLLARD 

950 

350 

140Ø 

The Aquarius Water Standpipe bollard has a lockable access door behind which is a 

stop valve in line with the external BSP tap with ¾” or ½” hose tail. 

Product 

Description 

Semi dome top 

plain bollard 

Semi dome top 

double ring 

bollard 

Semi dome 

single indent 

bollard 

Semi dome 

double indent 

bollard 

Flat top large 

indent bollard 


Reference 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Overall 

Height 

(mm) 

ACKROYD STUART ASHTRAY BOLLARD 

1000 

350 

154Ø 

152.5Ø 

The Ackroyd Stuart Ashtray Bollard has a front filling cigarette end collector, stainless 

steel stubber plate and lockable hinged top to allow emptying. The bollard can have 

more than one stub plate and can also be used as anti-ram. 

OPTIONS 

Height Optional Heights Cap Fixing Method Spec Finish Add Ons 

HAG 

(mm) 

Weight 

(kg) 

Standard Finish Length 

1250/ 

HAG 900 

(mm) 

Length 

1800/ 

HAG 1200 

(mm) 

Flat Cap Separate 

Cap 

Base 

Plate 

Lift Out & 

Lockable** 

Anti 

Ram 

Galv. 

Only 

Hazard 

Banding 

RB 101 114 1500 1000 20 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n n n n 



RB 101 194 1500 1000 40 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n n n 

















Mitre top bollard RB 123 114 1500 1000 20 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n n 

RB 123 139 1500 1000 25 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n n 

RB 123 168 1500 1000 30 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n n 

RB 123 194 1500 1000 40 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n n 

Flat top bollard 

with single DDA 

band 

Leeds Bollard Leeds 

Bollard 

Ackroyd Stuart 

Ashtray Bollard 

Aquarius Water 

Standpipe Bollard 

RB 150 114 1500 1000 20 PC Black 9005 n n n n n n 



RB 150 194 1500 1000 40 PC Black 9005 n n n n n 

*Bold text indicates standard bollard option 

** Lift and Lockable option available dependant on diameter 

140 1300 1000 25 PC Grey 706 n 

154 1350 1000 PC Black 9017 n n n 

140 1300 950 25 Optional Colour 

PC Finish 

n 

Chain 

Connectors




Steel Bollards 

CLASSIC TOP 40.211 

MODERN TOP 40.221 

89Ø 

89Ø 

1000 

300 

1000 

300 

CONTEMPORARY TOP 40.231 

STAINLESS STEEL TOP 40.501A 


Seating ........................... page 149 




Protective Barriers ........... page 323 

Post and Rail .................... page 332 

OPTIONS 

Height Fixing Method 

Product Product Diameter Overall Height HAG Weight Standard Lift Out 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish and Lockable 

Classic Top Bollard 40.211 89 1300 1000 8.5 PC Body Met Grey/Top 8019 n 

40.218 89 1100 800 7 PC Body Met Grey/Top 8019 n 

Modern Top Bollard 40.221 89 1300 1000 8.5 PC Body Met Grey/Top 6028 n 


Contemporary Top Bollard 40.231 89 1300 1000 8.5 PC Body Met Grey/Top 5011 n 


Stainless Steel Top Bollard 40.501A 89 1100 800 8 PC Black 100 Sable/Polished Stainless Steel Cap n 

40.502A 89 900 600 6.5 PC Black 100 Sable/Polished Stainless Steel Cap n 

NB. Classic, Contemporary and Modern tops are available with bodies and tops in any standard RAL or Sable colour 

89Ø 

89Ø 

1000 

300 

800 

300 

52

53 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Stainless Steel Bollards 

RS 001 Bollards, Galleries Retail Park, Washington 

Rhino stainless steel static bollards provide perimeter protection whilst also adding 

contemporary style and elegance to the surrounding landscape. Bollards are 

available in a number of modern styles, with each bollard available in a variety of 

length and diameter options. 

Rhino stainless steel bollards are manufactured from a carefully selected grade 

of 316L stainless steel (1.4401). Exceptionally strong and requiring very little 

maintenance, they are ideal for a wide variety of applications including pedestrian 

walkways and areas of protected parking. 

The use of grade 316L (1.4401) stainless steel offers a number of significant 

advantages: 

Higher resistance to corrosion: Whilst stainless steel is corrosion resistant, the 

naturally forming chromium rich oxide film that protects it can be broken down 

over time by chlorine and chlorides. However, due to the increased levels of nickel 

in its alloy structure, grade 316L (1.4401) has a much higher resistance to corrosion. 

Greater resistance to pitting and staining: In comparison with other grades of 

stainless steel, grade 316L (1.4401) is less susceptible to surface pitting. 

Low Maintenance: As a result of its quality, grade 316L (1.4401) requires very little 

maintenance to retain its original appearance. This means that the material provides 

attractive ‘life cost’ benefits when compared to alternatives, such as carbon steels. 

Recyclable: Stainless steel is 100% recyclable. Around 90% of stainless steel is 

made from recycled scrap. Due to this, stainless steel has much less of an impact on 

the environment and scarce resources, providing an all round “Green” material for 

architects to specify. 

Specification options 

Rhino Stainless Steel Static bollards are available with a variety of specification 

options to meet the requirements of any application: 

Standard: Ideal for demarcation purposes, standard bollards provide visual 

separation between vehicle and pedestrian areas. Standard Rhino stainless steel 

bollards feature a 2mm wall thickness, with the exception of the M3 Flat and Mitre 

top bollards, which feature a greater 6mm thick wall for increased strength. 

Reinforced: A galvanised steel tube is added for increased internal strength. 

Suitable for areas where there is a higher risk to pedestrians or premises from 

moving vehicles. 

Anti Ram: Reinforced with two internal steel tubes to further increase the strength 

of the bollard. This specification is ideal for ram-raid deterrence and preventing 

vehicles from penetrating beyond the bollard. 

Reinforced Anti Ram: Bollards are reinforced with three mild steel tubes for areas 

requiring maximised ram-raid protection. 

Fixing Options: 

Root Fixing: Rhino 1000mm bollards are supplied with a 500mm root depth as 

standard, with the exception of the 114mm diameter RS 001 bollard, which has a 

300mm root. The root is placed underground and secured using concrete. A cross 

bar keys into the concrete for added strength, ensuring that the bollard cannot be 

moved or twisted. Differing heights are also available, however the required root 

depths differ dependent on the option selected. Specific lengths are also available 

on request. 

Base Plate: Bollards can be supplied complete with an integral base fixing plate 

which is attached to the ground using bolts. This option is ideal for applications 

where ground excavation is not an option. 

Lift out and Lockable: Removable bollards allow temporary vehicle access and can 

be replaced when works are complete. 

Please refer to page 56 for customisation and finish options.





RS 001 RS 002 

RS 004 

RS 007 

114Ø 

114Ø 

129Ø 

1000 

300 

1000 

500 

1000 

500 

STOCK 

Also available with a 500mm root depth 

RS 005 

RS 150 



114Ø 

114Ø 

150 

114Ø 

114Ø 

1000 

500 

1000 

500 

1000 

500 

54

55 





Stainless Steel 

M3 FLAT TOP BOLLARD 

Product Description Product 

Reference 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Overall 

Height 

(mm) 

1000 

500 

114Ø 

M3 MITRE TOP BOLLARD 

OPTIONS 


Shown with yellow reflective bands 1200mm option also available 

Shown with 

base plate 

1200mm option also available 

Semi dome top SS 

bollard 

Semi dome top 

engraved bollard 

Height Length Specification Fixing Method Optional Extras Utility Options 

HAG 

(mm) 

Weight 

(kg) 

Standard 

Finish 

Length 

1250 

HAG 

900 

Length 

1800 

HAG 

1200 

Reinforced Anti 

Ram 

Lift Out & 

Lockable 

Base 

Plate 

Hazard 

Banding 

1000 

500 

Stainless 

Steel Bezel 

RS001 101 1500 1000 8 Brushed Satin n n n n n n 

RS001 † 114 1300 1000 9 Brushed Satin n n n n n n n n 

RS001 129 1500 1000 10 Brushed Satin n n n n n n n n 

RS001 154 1500 1000 12 Brushed Satin n n n n n n n 

RS002 114 1500 1000 9 Brushed Satin 

n/a n n n n 

Mitre top ss bollard RS004 101 1500 1000 8 Brushed Satin n n n n n n n 

RS004 114 1500 1000 9 Brushed Satin n n n n n n n 

RS004 129 1500 1000 10 Brushed Satin n/a n n n n n n 

RS004 154 1500 1000 12 Brushed Satin n/a n n n n n n 

Flat top SS bollard RS005 114 1500 1000 9 Brushed Satin n n n n 

114Ø 

Water 

Standpipe 

Flat top matt band SS RS007 101 1500 1000 8 Bright Polish n/a n 

bollard 

RS007 114 1500 1000 9 Bright Polish n n 

RS007 129 1500 1000 10 Bright Polish n/a n 

RS007 154 1500 1000 12 Bright Polish n/a n 

Flat top Bollard with RS150 101 1500 1000 7 Brushed Satin n n n n n n 

single DDA Band 




M3 Flat Top SS Bollard 89 1500 1000 9 Brushed Satin n n 

114 1500 1000 10 Brushed Satin n n n n 

168 1500 1000 16 Brushed Satin n n n 

M3 45 Mitre top SS 

bollard 

† RS001 with 114mm diameter is also available with a total length of 1500mm. 

Products in bold text indicate standard option. 

89 1500 1000 8 Brushed Satin n n 

114 1500 1000 9 Brushed Satin n n n n 

168 1500 1000 15 Brushed Satin n n n 

Electrical 

Supply






FINISHES 

Finishes 

n Rhino stainless steel static bollards are supplied with a satin polished finish 

with the exception of the RS 007, which is supplied with a bright polished 

finish and two etched bands. 

REFLECTIVE BANDS 

Hazard Banding: For increased visibility and safety. 

n Rhino stainless steel bollards are available with an option of Class Ref 2 

reflective hazard banding for increased visibility and safety. 

n Banding is available in a choice of three standard colour options; amber, red 

and white. For additional options, please contact our sales office. 

BESPOKE BRANDING 

BEZEL 


Bespoke Branding 

n Stainless steel bollards are now available with the option of bespoke branding, 

machine engraved into the top. This enables you to fully customise your 

scheme with a logo, crest or emblem of your choice. Bespoke branding can be 

supplied unpainted or in full colour, to meet your individual requirements. 

Stainless Steel Bezel 

n Stainless steel bezels are available in a brushed satin finish in standard 

diameters. 

n The bezel is ideal for applications where the bollards are installed into existing 

paving, ensuring that any gaps or cracking caused during installation are 

completely hidden from view. 

56

57 





MACHINED TOP 40.501 


89Ø 

800 

300 

219Ø 

STOCK 

600 

200 




Seating ........................... page 151 



OPTIONS 


Overall 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard Base Plate Lift Out 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish and Lockable 

Sineu Graff Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard 40.501 89 1100 800 8 Polished Top/Shot Peened Body n n 

Sineu Graff Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard 40.502 89 900 600 7 Polished Top/Shot Peened Body n n 

Sineu Graff Wide Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard 40.503 219 800 600 17 Polished Top/Shot Peened Body n n 

Sineu Graff Wide Machined Top Stainless Steel Bollard 40.504 219 600 400 13 Polished Top/Shot Peened Body n n 

89Ø 

600 

300 

219Ø 

400 

200



Telescopic Bollards Q50 192 



RT SS5 stainless steel telescopic bollards, Borehamwood 

Specification 

Rhino Telescopic Bollards are available in steel, stainless steel and polyurethane: 

Steel: Bollards can be supplied in a galvanised or powder coated finish. All steel 

products are hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). Powder coating is available 

in most RAL or British Standard colours. 

Stainless steel: Bollards are manufactured in high quality grade 316 (1.4401) austenitic 

steel for maximised durability. 

Polyurethane: Bollards are made from Ferrocast, Marshalls’ two part polymer set 

around an internal steel core. Polyurethane bollards can also be supplied in a full range 

of colours. 

See page 63 for banding options. 

Installation, maintenance and replacement components 

Full Installation: Available on selected schemes. 

Repair or Full Service: Option available for all products. 

Locks and Keys 

Master Key Facilities: Locks can be keyed alike or to differ. 

Anti-tamper locking mechanism: Selected bollards feature a 10 pin ‘anti-drill’ 

push button lock. 

Overnight Service: Replacement of lost keys. 


Rhino Telescopic Security Posts provide a secure, simple and cost effective method of 

protecting premises and vehicles. Rhino posts can be located in forecourts, car parks or 

shop fronts to provide excellent levels of protection. Fully retractable, the bollards can 

be lifted out of the ground in seconds and lowered just as easily. 

The bollards lock into their upright position with an integral high security push button 

lock. When the posts are not required, they simply slide into their host tube below 

ground and the steel flap is closed flush. 

As a result of the continuing trend towards products offering maximum protection 

and security, Rhino now offer their reinforced anti-ram specification as standard 

throughout the entire commercial telescopic bollard range. For applications which do 

not require this level of security, non reinforced equivalents are available. Coordinating 

static posts are also available on request. 

Selected bollards are now available with a lift assist mechanism. Lift assisted bollards 

are fitted with an internal gas spring, which helps to reduce the operating weight by 

approximately 70%. The mechanism enables the bollards to be lifted effortlessly into 

place and gently lowered with a smooth, cushioned descent. The Rhino gas spring 

and surrounding body is manufactured from a grade 316L stainless steel, meaning 

that it will not rust or corrode, thus minimising ongoing maintenance costs. 

Rhino telescopic bollards are manufactured using an automated robot welding 

process for greater precision and accuracy. Our products are quality checked at each 

stage of manufacture to ensure they are always of the highest quality. 

Sold Secure 

The Sold Secure organisation is dedicated to reducing the risk of 

crime through assessing the performance of security products. 

Established in 1992 by Northumbria and Essex Police with the 

backing of the Home Office, Sold Secure is now administered by 

the Master Locksmiths Association. 

Selected telescopic bollards have been independently tested and 

certified by Sold Secure to the ‘Automotive Gold’ standard and are 

suitable for inclusion in the Sold Secure Approved Category List. 

The accreditation is awarded in reference to the Rhino 10 pin ‘anti-drill’ push button 

locking mechanism, which is used on selected bollards throughout the telescopic 

bollard range. 

Secured by Design 

Secured by Design is a UK Police Flagship initiative, 

supporting the principles of designing out crime, 

crime prevention and security standards for a range 

of applications. 

Managed by the association of Chief Police Officers Crime Prevention Initiatives 

(ACPO CPI), Secured by Design guarantees police approval of accredited security 

products. Marshalls Street Furniture is a Secured by Design Accredited Organisation. 

58

59 






Domestic 

RT RD4 SS Domestic Telescopic Bollard with single white band 

RT RD4 RT RD4 SS 


lifting handle 

10 pin push 

button lock 

76mm round 

section x 4mm 

gauge mild steel 

6mm gauge 

mild steel lid 

100mm square 

section 4mm 


5mm gauge 

base plate with 

drainage holes 

76Ø 

500 

100 2 

700 


Designed predominantly for domestic applications, Rhino domestic telescopic 

bollards are ideal for driveway installations to restrict access to properties and 

protect parked vehicles. 

RT RD4 

n A round telescopic bollard which locks securely into place with a 500mm height 

above ground and features a 76mm diameter. 

n Manufactured from mild steel to BS 1440, it is galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999) 

providing increased resistance to rust and corrosion. 

n The RT RD4 is supplied polyester powder coated in either RAL Black 9005 or 

Yellow 1021 as standard. Other RAL colours are also available on request. 

n A coordinating static post (Ref: RS D4) is also available 

RT RD4 SS 

n A round telescopic bollard manufactured from a carefully selected grade of 

316L (1.4401) stainless steel. 

n Exceptionally strong and requiring little maintenance, the RT RD4 SS offers a secure, 

durable and contemporary solution for domestic applications. 

n The RT RD4 SS is 500mm high when extended above ground and has a 

76mm diameter. 

n A coordinating static post is also available (Ref: RS001 D4). 

Stainless steel 


10 pin push 

button lock 

76mm round 

section x 3mm 

stainless steel 

6mm gauge 


100mm square 

section 4mm 


5mm gauge 



76Ø 

500 

100 2 

700






RT R8 HD telescopic bollards, Peugeot garage 

RT R8 HD RT SQ8 HD 



10 pin ‘anti drill’ 

push button lock 

90mm round 

section x 5mm 


76.1mm x 2mm 

gauge internal 

post sleeve 

reinforcement 

6mm gauge 


120mm square 

section 3mm 


high grade S355 

5mm gauge 



90Ø 

120 2 

670 

950 


Rhino commercial telescopic bollards are supplied with our heavy duty specification 

as standard, making them ideal for anti ram raid applications. For applications requiring 

a lower level of security, non reinforced bollards are also available. 

The RT R8 HD and RT SQ8 HD are manufactured from mild steel to BS 1440 and are 

galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). 

Designed for commercial usage, the bollards are ideal for providing ram raid 

protection to garage forecourts, driveways and pedestrian zones, town centres and 

commercial entrances. 

The bollards feature a 10 pin ‘anti-drill’ push button lock for added security. 

RT R8 HD 

n A round telescopic bollard with a height above ground of 670mm and a 90mm 

diameter. 

n The bollard is reinforced with a high strength inner post sleeve, manufactured 

from 76.1mm x 2mm steel, for increased performance on impact. 

n A non reinforced option (Ref: RT R5) is available on request for lower risk 

applications. A coordinating static post is also available (Ref: RSP R8). 

RT SQ8 HD 

n A square telescopic bollard with a height of 670mm and a 90mm x 90mm width. 

n As with the RT R8 HD, the SQ8 HD is reinforced with an inner post sleeve for added 

impact performance. 

n A non reinforced option (Ref: RT SQ5) is available on request for lower risk 

applications. A matching static post is also available (RSP SQ8). 





90mm square 

section x 5mm 


76.1mm x 2mm 


post sleeve 

reinforcement 

6mm gauge 


120mm square 

section 3mm 


high grade S355 

5mm gauge 



90 2 

120 2 

670 

950 

60

61 






RT SS5 telescopic bollards, BMW/Mini garage, Borehamwood 

RT SS5 

n A round telescopic bollard manufactured from grade 316L (1.4401) stainless steel. 

n The bollard rises to 710mm above ground and features a 101mm diameter. 

n Supplied with a brushed satin finish, the exceptionally strong stainless steel outer 

is 2mm thick and is reinforced with a 90mm x 5mm steel internal post sleeve for 

added performance. 

n A co-ordinating post (SSB01) is available on request. 

n The RT SS5 features a 10 pin push button lock for added security. 

RT SS5 Lift Assist 

n The RT SS5 is available with an internal lift assist mechanism to 

significantly reduce the operating weight and aid manual handling. 

n The bollard is fitted with an internal gas spring, which reduces the lifting weight to 

around one third of that of its standard equivalent. 

n The Rhino gas spring is manufactured from stainless steel, which means that it 

will not rust or corrode like some steel equivalents, thus minimising ongoing 

maintenance costs. 

RT SS5 


Stainless steel locking cylinder 

and lifting handle 

10 pin push 

button lock 

90 x 5mm 


post sleeve 

reinforcement 

101mm diameter 

x 2mm wall 

316 brushed 


6mm gauge 


120mm square 

section 3mm 


base post 

5mm gauge 



101Ø 

120 2 

710 

1000






RT 114/670 HD 

n A round telescopic bollard manufactured from high strength mild steel to 

BS 1440 and galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). 

n The bollard locks into place 670mm above ground and features a larger 

114mm diameter. 

n Features a 10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock for added security. 

n The RT 114/670 HD is reinforced with a 101mm x 4mm steel inner post sleeve for 

enhanced performance on impact, making the bollard ideal for high risk anti ram 

applications. 

n Supplied galvanised as standard, the RT 114/670 HD can be polyester powder 

coated to a RAL colour of your choice. 

RT 114/670 HD Lift Assist 

n The RT 114/670 HD is available with an internal lift assist 

mechanism to substantially reduce the operating weight and aid 

manual handling. 

n This stainless steel gas spring reduces the lifting weight by approximately 70%, 

from 22.5kg to around 6-7kg. 

RT R14 HD 

n A round telescopic bollard manufactured from high strength mild steel to BS 1440 

and galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999). 

n The RT R14 HD has a height above ground of 850mm and diameter of 114mm. 

n Features a 10 pin ‘anti drill’ push button lock for added security. 

n The bollard is reinforced as standard with a 101 x 4mm internal post sleeve for 

added strength and security, making it the ideal choice for anti ram applications. 

n A non reinforced option is also available for applications of lower risk (Ref: RT R14). 

A coordinating static post (Ref: RB 114) is available on request. 

RT R14 HD Lift Assist 

n The RT R14 HD is now available with a lift assist mechanism. 

This enables the specification of a telescopic bollard of significant 

size and operating weight, whilst reducing the lifting weight by 

approximately 70%, enabling effortless functionality. 

n The internal gas spring reduces the operating weight from 26.5kg to around 7kg. 

RT 114 / 670 HD 

RT R14 HD 






114mm round 

section x 5mm 


101 x 4mm 


post sleeve 

reinforcement 

6mm mild 

steel lid 

140mm square 

section x 5mm 


5mm gauge 







114mm round 

section x 5mm 


101 x 4mm 


post sleeve 

reinforcement 

6mm mild 

steel lid 

140mm square 

section x 5mm 


5mm gauge 



114Ø 

140 2 

114Ø 

140 2 

670 

960 

850 

1125 

62

63 






Ferrocast 

The RT SU5 Sunderland bollard is a telescopic post manufactured from Ferrocast 

Polyurethane. The bollard rises to 730mm above ground and has a 135mm diameter. 

A coordinating static bollard (Sunderland Low) is also available. 

Ferrocast bollards are manufactured from high quality polyurethane and cast around 

an internal steel core for increased strength. The strong, non ferrous exterior ensures 

that the bollards will not rust or corrode, thus minimising ongoing maintenance costs. 

Optional Extras 

Banding Options 

Rhino commercial telescopic bollards are available with a choice of three standard 

banding options: 

n Single Band: A single recessed 100mm band supplied with Class 2 reflective tape. 

Available in either one or two colours. 

n Double Band: Two recessed bands supplied with Class 2 reflective tape. 

n Hazard Banding Strip: For increased visibility and safety. 

Banding is available in three standard colours; amber, red and white. For additional 

options, please contact our sales office. 

Security Options 

Square security cover - To add further security to your bollard, a square security cover 

is available. The cover is suitable for use on the RT SQ8 HD and its non-reinforced 

equivalent (RT SQ5). The cover is 100mm x 100mm. 

Ornamental Locking Top - Suitable for use on the RT R8 HD telescopic bollard 

and its non reinforced equivalent (RT R5), the Ornamental Locking Top provides a 

traditional finish to the bollard, whilst providing the added security of a second locking 

mechanism. The cover features a diameter of 170mm. 

The RSP VIC8 is a galvanised steel static post with an ornamental locking top and 

decorative surface trim plate around the bottom. The bollard is 710mm high and has 

surface diameter of 90mm. The RSP VIC8 is designed to co-ordinate with telescopic 

bollards specified with the ornamental locking top option. 

RT SU5 SUNDERLAND TELESCOPIC BOLLARD (FERROCAST) 

BANDING OPTIONS 

SQUARE SECURITY COVER 

ORNAMENTAL LOCKING TOP 


6mm mild 

steel lid 

Base diameter 

135mm 

150mm square 

section x 5mm 


5mm gauge 



RSP VIC8 

730 

1016






Fold Down and Lift Out and Lockable 

RT KEY OP1 (FOLD DOWN) BOLLARD 

60.3Ø 

650 

The RT Key OP 1 steel bollard is 650mm high and has a 60mm diameter. Supplied 

powder coated in RAL Yellow 1021 as standard, the bollard can be folded down to 

temporarily allow vehicle access. 


Reference 

Domestic Telescopic Round 

76/500 

Diameter 

(mm) 

HAG 

(mm) 

RTL 80 (LIFT OUT LOCKABLE) BOLLARD 

The RTL 80 is a square lift out lockable bollard. Manufactured from galvanised steel, 

the bollard is 960mm high and 80 x 80mm wide. 

OPTIONS 

Height Weight Spec Finish Reflective Banding Add Ons 

HBG 

(mm) 

Weight 

(kg) 

Operating 

Weight 

(kg) * 

Standard Finish Available 

with Lift 

Assist 

RT RD4 76 500 700 22 6 PC Black 9005 or 

Yellow 1021 

Anti 

Ram 

Powder 

Coating 

Single 

Groove 

Band 

Double 

Groove 

Band 

960 

80 

Hazard 

Banding 

n 

Separate 

Locking Top 

Static Round 76/500 RS D4 76 500 300 7 n/a Galvanised n n 

Domestic Telescopic Round 

76/500 Stainless Steel 

RT RD4 SS 76 500 700 22 6 Stainless Steel n 

Domestic Static Round 


RS001 D4 76 500 250 18 n/a Stainless Steel n 

Telescopic Round 

90/670 Heavy Duty 

RT R8 HD 90 670 700 44 14 Galvanised n n n n n Ornamental 


90/670 Non Reinforced 

RT R5 90 670 950 42 11 Galvanised n n n n Ornamental 

Static Round 90/670 RS PR8 90 670 580 16 n/a Galvanised n n 

Telescopic Square 90/670 RT SQ8 HD 90 x 90 670 950 44 15 Galvanised n n n Square 

Telescopic Square 

90/670 Non Reinforced 

RT SQ5 90 x 90 670 950 42 13 Galvanised n n Square 

Static Square 90/670 RSP SQ8 90 x 90 670 580 19 n/a Galvanised n n 



RT SS5 101 710 1000 37 17 (5) Stainless Steel n n n n 

Static Round 

101/710mm Stainless Steel 

SSB 01 HD 101 710 540 43 n/a Stainless Steel n n 

Telescopic Round 114/670 Heavy 

Duty 

RT 114/670 114 670 960 55 22.5 (6-7) Galvanised n n n n n 


114/850 Heavy Duty 

RT R14 HD 114 850 1125 66 26.5 (7) Galvanised n n n n n n 

Telescopic Round 114/850 

Non Reinforced 

RT R14 114 850 1125 54 17 Galvanised n n n n 

Static Round 114/850 RB 114 114 850 650 18 n/a Galvanised n 

Telescopic Round 730mm 

Ferrocast 

RT SU5 135 730 1020 30 16 Polymer n n 

Static Ferrocast Sunderland Low RCB 74 89 730 300 42 n/a Polymer n 

Fold Down 650mm RT KEY OP 1 60 650 n/a 7 n/a PC Yellow 1021 n n 

Lift Out 960mm RTL 80 80 x 80 960 n/a 21 n/a Galvanised n 

* Figure in brackets indicates approximate operating weight with lift assist mechanism. 


64

65 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD13 Hoop Barriers Q41 135 

Hoop Barriers 

RB60/SS Hoop Barriers, BMW/Mini Garage, Borehamwood 

RDB 60 

RDB 76/HD 

1400 

60.3Ø x 4mm gauge 

Push button lock 

1400 


Push button lock 

500 

400 

650 

400 


Rhino Hoop Barriers are an effective method of access restriction within many 

landscapes. Popular uses include retail parks, car parks and garage forecourts, 

where effective perimeter protection is essential. 

The Rhino Hoop Barrier range consists of a number of styles and sizes, as well as 

both detachable and permanent options. 

Detachable Barriers 

n The detachable range of Rhino barriers consists of the RDB 60 and RDB 76/HD. 

The RDB 60 is manufactured from 60mm diameter steel and the RDB 76/HD 

features a larger 76mm diameter. 

n The steel is hot dip galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 (1999) to protect the barriers 

from the development of rust and corrosion. Powder coating is also available as 

an option. 

n The roots of each barrier are locked into place using a push button lock which 

allows for quick and easy locking and unlocking. 

n Root sockets are supplied complete with a dust cover for when the barrier is 

not in use. 

Permanent Barriers 

n The RB 60, RB 76/HD and RB 90/HD form our range of permanent Rhino barriers. 

The RB60 features a diameter of 60mm, whilst the RB 76/HD and RB 90/HD measure 

76mm and 90mm respectively. 

n Each barrier is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel and can be powder 

coated on request. A full range of British RAL colours is available for all steel 

hoop barriers. 

n The RB 60 and RB 76/HD Rhino barriers are also available in grade 316L stainless 

steel (Ref: RB 60 SS and RB 76 SS). However, the dimensions of the RB 60 SS differ 

slightly from that of its steel equivalent. See table on next page for more details. 

n Varying barrier lengths are available on request.

RB 60 

RB 76/HD 

RB 90/HD 


Reference 

Diameter 

(mm) 

Overall 

Height (mm) 

1400 


*Also available in stainless steel. See table below for more information 

1400 


*Also available in stainless steel. See table below for more information 

1400 


OPTIONS 

Height Fixing Method Finish 

HAG (mm) Weight (kg) Standard Finish Ground 

Fixing 

500 

400 

650 

400 

650 

400 

Base Plate Removable Powder 

Coated 

Removable Hoop Barrier 60Ømm RD B60 60Ø 900 500 28 Galvanised Steel n n n 

Removable Hoop Barrier 76Ømm RD B76/HD 76Ø 1050 650 37 Galvanised Steel n n n 

Hoop Barrier 60Ømm RB 60 60Ø 900 500 20 Galvanised Steel n n n 

Hoop Barrier 60Ømm Stainless Steel RB 60/SS 60Ø 950 650 20 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n 

Hoop Barrier 76Ømm RB 76/HD 76Ø 1050 650 27 Galvanised Steel n n n 

Hoop Barrier 76Ømm Stainless Steel RB 76/SS 76Ø 1050 650 25 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n 

Hoop Barrier 90Ømm RB 90/HD 90Ø 1050 650 37 Galvanised Steel n n n 

66

67 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Polyurethane Bollards 

Dixon Anti-Ram Bollards, PC World, Lancaster 

WATERSIDE 

175mm 

1000mm 

Ferrocast® Bollards are an ideal way to increase security around your perimeter. 

Suitable for use in almost any situation and available in a number of styles to 

coordinate with most landscapes, whether traditional or contemporary. 

Manufactured from an engineering grade polyurethane which is cast around a steel 

core, Ferrocast is extremely strong and has a non-ferrous exterior, meaning it will not 

rust. This makes Ferrocast ideal in coastal areas where high levels of saline are present. 

Bollards are supplied with a black, two part polyurethane coating finish which 

chemically bonds itself to Ferrocast. This increases chip resistance and weathering 

characteristics making it ideal for heavily trafficked areas. A pigment is also added to 

Ferrocast to make it the same colour as its paint finish. This ensures that in the event 

of any damage to the exterior paint bollards still appear aesthetically pleasing. 

Fixing: 

Root fixing is offered as standard, but base plate fixing is available as an option on 

most bollards. 

Options: 

We offer a range of options on bollards to tailor them to your individual needs. 

These are all available on request and include reflective discs, a second colour and 

coats of arms, crests and logos. 

Anti-Ram Specification: 

Bollards can be manufactured to an anti-ram specification. Anti-ram bollards are 

moulded around several steel inner cores making them even stronger than standard 

bollards. Marshalls are an approved supplier to several major retailers who specify 

Ferrocast Anti-ram Bollards at superstores, retail parks and supermarkets. 

Bespoke Design: 

In addition to our standard range of bollards, Marshalls Street Furniture offer a 

bespoke design service whereby we can design and manufacture bollards to a 

specific brief to fit in with a project theme. For more details on this please contact 

our Sales Office. 

n The Waterside Bollard, together with the Waterside seat, bench and bin form the 

Waterside Range. 

n The Waterside range is based around a unique elliptical form which results in a 

highly contemporary and functional design. 

n The range is available in silver as standard.





ABBEY 

ASHBY 

BEAUMONT 

1093mm 

940mm 

ALNWICK SMALL 

164mm 175mm 

181mm 

190mm 

785mm 

ASHTON 

BERESFORD 

150mm 130mm 

197mm 

395mm 

900mm 

920mm 

STOCK 

ALNWICK MEDIUM 

BARNSTAPLE 

BIDEFORD 

175mm 

275mm 


Seating ........................... page 163 





590mm 

983mm 

1295mm 





ALNWICK LARGE 

BELINDA 

BILLY 

300mm 

210mm 

220mm 

900mm 

1000mm 

1000mm 

68

69 

BIRMINGHAM BOROUGH 

BRADFORD 

BRISTOL 

200mm 

1034mm 

BURY CAMBRIDGE 

CAMDEN 

188mm 

CANNON – SMALL 

110mm 

815mm 

965mm 

CAPITAL 

200mm 

1134mm 

1210mm 

117mm 246mm 

240mm 

1050mm 

1130mm 

115mm 160mm 

1075mm 

CAPSTAN CARDIFF 

120mm 

900mm 

CANNON – LARGE 

134mm 

220mm 

1000mm 

895mm 

1000mm

CARRONADE 

CITY 

200mm 

DARLINGTON 

145mm 

165mm 

1140mm 

950mm 

1095mm 

CHELTENHAM 

CLAPHAM JUNCTION 

DAVENTRY 

165mm 

125mm 

210mm 

1220mm 

1000mm 

940mm 

STOCK 

CHERTSEY CHORLEY 

136mm 

1000mm 

CONSERVATION CORNWALL 

150mm 

1110mm 

DEAL DEANSGATE 

1000mm 

225mm 

124mm 

120mm 115mm 

1251mm 

1095mm 

1140mm 

70

71 

DELAVAL 

DURHAM 

GATESHEAD 

150mm 

175mm 

172mm 

800mm 

930mm 

845mm 

DEWSBURY 

EALING 

HACKNEY 

150mm 

200mm 

155mm 

920mm 

1005mm 

970mm 

STOCK 

DIXON ANTI RAM DUDLEY 

155mm 

1000mm 

EAST SUSSEX EASTBOURNE 

168mm 

915mm 

HARINGEY HAVANT 

167mm 

947mm 

222mm 

218mm 

180mm 

1155mm 

1178mm 

1220mm

HENDON 

KIER FLUTED 

147mm 

200mm 

LEYTONSTONE 

175mm 

917mm 

900mm 

950mm 

STOCK 

HEXHAM 

175mm 

LANGBAURGH 

310mm 

890mm 

ISLINGTON KENDAL 

LEICESTER 

170mm 

140mm 

LEICESTER HEAVY 

MAIDENHEAD MANCHESTER 

MANCHESTER MILLENNIUM 

165mm 

917mm 

918mm 

225mm 

990mm 

1000mm 

1000mm 

STOCK 

190mm 

156mm 

248mm 

910mm 

1000mm 

900mm 

72

73 

MELTON MOWBRAY 

NEWCASTLE 

186mm 

168mm 

OLD CAMDEN 

230mm 

960mm 

1000mm 

1200mm 

MIDDLETON MORPETH 

NEEDLE 

180mm 

1000mm 

110mm 

Also available as 1000mm high 

NEWCASTLE FLUTED NORWICH 

OBAN 

168mm 

1000mm 

120mm 

OLDHAM PENARTH 

PONTEFRACT 

225mm 

965mm 

168mm 

900mm 

1075mm 

970mm 

STOCK 

120mm 

190mm 

210mm 

1100mm 

1090mm 

1000mm

PUTNEY 

RENFREW 

170mm 

160mm 

1242mm 

RADLETT REDBRIDGE 

REDROUTE 

180mm 

900mm 

SANDWELL SEAHAM 

SLOUGH 

ST ANNES ST HELENS 

STOCKPORT 

SUNDERLAND LOW 

202mm 

750mm 

1005mm 

140mm 

180mm 

922mm 

1030mm 

190mm 

197mm 

150mm 

915mm 

850mm 

1215mm 

151mm 

150mm 

136mm 

950mm 

900mm 

STOCK 

780mm 

74

75 

SUNDERLAND SUTTON REDROUTE 

SWANSEA MEDIUM 

TEIGNMOUTH 

157mm 

896mm 

VICTORIANA WAKEFIELD 

WESTMINSTER 

WHITLEY 

120mm 

128mm 

900mm 

WILLIAM IV WOLVERHAMPTON 

YORK 

MSF121P 

140mm 

900mm 

1010mm 

236mm 

114mm 

700mm 

1000mm 

157mm 

130mm 

160mm 

1100mm 

1075mm 

780mm 

195mm 

185mm 

158mm 

1150mm 

980mm 

1000mm




Special Bollards 

Ferrocast Penguins 

Billy Bollard, Nottingham 


n Ferrocast® is a highly versatile material which can be used to create bespoke 

bollards to fit in with any project themes. We are able to offer a full design service 

to ensure that clients get the product they require. This is particularly useful 

to designers and landscape architects who may be looking to create a special 

bollard to fit in with their concepts. 

n We have a proven track record of working with local authorities, residents’ groups, 

artists and designers to produce many imaginative schemes. 

n Nottingham City Council: Billy and Belinda Bollards designed for ‘Safer Routes to 

School’ initiative. 

n Manchester City Council: Giant pencils to identify school crossing patrols. 

Giant Pencils, Manchester 

76

77 





Ferrocast® 


Seating ........................... page 163 









OPTIONS 


Product Product Diameter 

Overall 

Length HAG Weight Base Anti Removable Reflective Ballotini Hand Signs Locking Chain 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Plate Ram Tape Ring Paint Socket Connectors 

Abbey BL000 164 1393 1093 17 n n n n n n n 

Alnwick Small BL008 175 695 395 8 n n n n n n n 

Alnwick Medium BL012 175 890 590 14 n n n n n n n 

Alnwick Large BL016 300 1200 900 33 n n n n n n 

Ashby BL048 181 1085 785 31 n n n n n 

Ashton BL052 150 1200 900 27 n n n n n n 

Barnstaple BL056 130 1283 983 16 n n n n n n n n n 

Belinda Fixed Colour BL062 210 1300 1000 41 n n n n n 

Beaumont BL070 190 1240 940 26 n n 

Beresford BL068 197 1220 920 27 n n n 

Bideford BL072 275 1595 1295 60 n n n n n 

Billy Fixed Colour BL074 220 1300 1000 41 n n n n n 

Birmingham BL076 200 1334 1034 25 n n n n n n n n 

Borough BL080 200 1434 1134 35 n n n n n n n 

Bradford BL084 115 1430 1130 19 n n n n n n n n 

Bristol BL096 160 1195 895 23 n n n n n n n n n 

Bury BL100 188 1115 815 22 n n n n n n n n n 

Cambridge BL104 117 1510 1210 22 n n n n n 

Camden BL116 246 1375 1075 44 n n n n 

Cannon Large BL136 134 1300 1000 21 n n n n n n n n n 

Cannon Small BL132 110 1265 965 14 n n n n n n n n 

Capital BL144 240 1350 1050 39 n n n n n n 

Capstan BL150 120 1200 900 15 n n n n n n n n n 

Cardiff BL152 220 1300 1000 22 n n n n n n n n n 

Carronade BL156 200 1440 1140 49 n n n n n n n 

Cheltenham BL176 165 1520 1220 20 n n n n n n n n 

Chertsey BL184 136 1300 1000 21 n n n n n n n n 

Chorley BL188 225 1551 1251 31 n n n n n n n 

City BL196 145 1250 950 24 n n n n n n n n n 

Clapham Junction BL208 125 1300 1000 15 n n n n n n n n n 

Conservation BL224 150 1410 1110 24 n n n n n n n n 

Cornwall BL228 124 1395 1095 17 n n n n n n n n 

Darlington BL240 165 1395 1095 28 n n n n n n 

Daventry BL248 210 1240 940 23 n n n n n n n n 

Deal BL252 120 1300 1000 17 n n n n n n n n n 

Deansgate BL256 115 1440 1140 21 n n n n n n n n n 

Delaval BL260 150 1100 800 21 n n n n n n n n 

Dewsbury BL268 150 1220 920 18 n n n n n n n 

Dixon Anti-Ram BL272 155 1300 1000 34 n n n n 

Dudley BL280 222 1455 1155 60 n n n n n 

Durham BL284 175 1230 930 25 n n n n n n n n 

Ealing BL288 200 1305 1005 24 n n n n n n n n n 

East Sussex BL296 168 1215 915 17 n n n n n n n n n 

Eastbourne BL304 218 1478 1178 28 n n n n n n

OPTIONS 



Overall 

Length HAG Weight Base Anti Removable Reflective Ballotini Hand Signs Locking Chain 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Plate Ram Tape Ring Paint Socket Connectors 

Gateshead BL344 172 1145 845 26 n n n n n n 

Hackney BL348 155 1270 970 20 n n n n n n n 

Haringey BL352 167 1247 947 28 n n n n n n n 

Havant BL360 180 1520 1220 28 n n n n n n 

Hendon BL368 147 1200 900 25 n n n n n n n n 

Hexham BL372 175 1217 917 22 n n n n n n n n 

Islington BL380 170 1290 990 20 n n n n n n n n 

Kendal BL386 190 1210 910 20 n n n n n n n n 

Kier Fluted BL388 200 1250 950 41 n n n 

Langbaurgh BL396 310 1190 890 50 n n 

Leicester BL400 140 1300 1000 15 n n n n n n n n n 

Leicester Heavy BL412 156 1300 1000 24 n n n n n n n n n 

Leytonstone BL416 175 1217 917 22 n n n n n n n 

Maidenhead BL420 165 1218 918 26 n n n n n n n 

Manchester BL428 225 1300 1000 21 n n n n n n n n n 

Manchester Millennium BL424 248 1200 900 40 n n n 

Melton Mowbray BL440 186 1260 960 32 n n n n n 

Middleton BL442 180 1300 1000 19 n n n n n n n n n 

Morpeth BL452 110 1200 900 12 n n n n n n n n n 

Needle BL458 120 1300 1000 30 n n n 

Newcastle BL460 168 1300 1000 26 n n n n n n n 

Newcastle Fluted BL465 168 1300 1000 26 n n n n n n 

Norwich BL468 120 1375 1075 19 n n n n n n n n n 

Oban BL470 190 1400 1100 19 n n n n n n n n n 

Old Camden BL472 230 1500 1200 34 n n n n n n n 

Oldham BL476 225 1265 965 21 n n n n n n n n n 

Penarth BL484 168 1270 970 23 n n n n n n 

Pontefract BL496 210 1390 1090 36 n n n n n n n 

Putney BL512 170 1542 1242 40 n n n n n n n 

Radlett BL516 180 1200 900 23 n n n n n n n n n 

Redbridge BL518 197 1215 915 25 n n n n n n n 

Redroute BL520 151 1250 950 18 n n n n n n n n n 

Renfrew BL524 160 1050 750 16 n n n n n n 

Sandwell BL526 140 1222 922 14 n n n n n 

Seaham BL528 150 1150 850 19 n n n n n n n 

Slough BL536 150 1200 900 23 n n n n n n n n n 

St Annes BL540 202 1305 1005 40 n n n n n 

St Helens BL544 180 1330 1030 22 n n n n n n n n n 

Stockport BL552 190 1515 1215 35 n n n n n 

Sunderland Low BL560 136 1080 780 16 n n n n n n n n n 

Sunderland BL556 157 1196 896 20 n n n n n n n n n 

Sutton Redroute BL564 128 1200 900 20 n n n n n n n n n 

Swansea Medium BL568 157 1300 1100 23 n n n n n n n n n 

Teignmouth BL572 195 1450 1150 42 n n n n 

Victoriana BL580 120 1200 900 10 n n n n n n 

Wakefield BL584 236 1000 700 36 n n n n 

Westminster BL592 130 1375 1075 27 n n n n n n n 

Whitley BL596 185 1280 980 18 n n n n n n n n n 

William IV BL600 140 1310 1010 20 n n n n n 

Wolverhampton BL602 114 1300 1000 16 n n n n n n 

York BL604 160 1080 780 15 n n n n n 

MSF121P BL682 158 1300 1000 18 n n n n n n n n 

78

79 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Plastic Bollards 

Heritage 150 Bollard 

Regency 150 Bollard 

Sentinel 150 Bollard 

Sentinel Reflex Bollard 

BLLD16 Bollards Q50 190 



Litter Bins ........................ page 209 Traffic Management ......... page 368 

Available in both traditional and modern styles plastic bollards are suitable for both 

decorative and highway applications. 

Plastic bollards and low level signage are ideal for a range of 

applications, including: 

• Traffic management and traffic calming schemes. 

• Separation of pedestrian cycle and vehicular routes. 

• Demarcation of parking spaces and pedestrian precincts. 

• Hazard marking and anti-ram application. 

• Verge control. 

Plastic Bollards are manufactured from UV stabilised medium density moulded 

polyethylene (MDPE) which is extremely durable with outstanding impact, fracture 

and shatter resistance properties. Bollards and low level signage are virtually 

maintenance free. The solid body colour is permanently moulded in, eliminating the 

need for maintenance painting. Units are wear resistant and scratches and parking 

nudges are less evident. For a full material specification please see page 392. 

Eco option 

Made using a combination of 50% chipped bottles and 50% regular polymer Eco 

Bollards are available in the Heritage and Sentinel ranges. Eco Bollards are available 

in an attractive stone effect finish although, due the nature of the material used, an 

element of minor surface colour variation should be expected. 

Reflex option 

Bollards can incorporate a patented self-righting mechanism to withstand impact 

from any direction. Reflex bollards are designed to adapt to a wide range of 

environments and are ideal for vulnerable sites where conventional bollards require 

frequent replacement. The following bollards are available as a reflex option: 

Heritage, Sentinal, Regency, Woburn, Regency, Stirling and Edgeminder. 

Banding options 

Bollards are available with three banding options: 

Class Ref 1: Engineering grade, mostly used for signage and ‘contrast’ banding. 

Class Ref 2: High intensity primarily used for traffic safety applications. 

Decorative: Metal effect (gold/silver) banding used on most decorative bollards. 

Colour Options 

Choose from a range of Heritage and Modern colours, other colours can be made to 

order. The full range of colours can be found on page 392. 


For a choice of fixing options please see page 398. 

Eco Bollard Eco Bollard

HERITAGE 150 

171mm 

1024mm 

HERITAGE 150 VISIBOL HERITAGE DECORATIVE 

SENTINEL 150 SENTINEL 150 VISIBOL SENTINEL DECORATIVE 

REGENCY 75 REGENCY 150 REGENCY DECORATIVE 

OPTIONS 

Height Fixing Method Banding Add Ons 

Overall Single or 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard Permanent Socketed Anti-Ram Surface Class Class Metallic Reflex Double 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Mount Ref 1 Ref 2 Option Sided Sign 

Heritage 150 171 1024 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Heritage 150 Visibol 171 1024 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n 

Heritage Decorative 171 921 Any Heritage Colour n n n n AS n 

Heritage Eco 150 171 1024 Mottle Slate Grey n n n n 

Sentinel 150 166 1030 Any Modern Colour n n n n n n n 

Sentinel 150 Visibol 166 1030 Any Modern Colour n n n n n n 

Sentinel Decorative 166 926 Any Modern Colour n n n n AS n 

Regency 75 166 955 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Regency 150 166 1030 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Regency Decorative 166 910 Any Heritage Colour n n n n AS n 

AS = As Standard 

166mm 

166mm 

1030mm 

955mm 

171mm 

166mm 

166mm 

1024mm 

1030mm 

1030mm 

171mm 

166mm 

166mm 

921mm 

926mm 

910mm 

80

81 

WOBURN 75 

STERLING 

WOBURN 75 

185mm 

1009mm 

WOBURN 150 

185mm 

1084mm 

STERLING 

MONARCH 

EDGEMINDER 

OPTIONS 





Woburn 75 185 1009 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Woburn 150 185 1084 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Sterling 170 800 Any Heritage Colour n n n 

Monarch 170 800 Any Modern Colour n n n n 

Edgeminder 130 510 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n 

170mm 

800mm 

MONARCH 

170mm 

800mm 

EDGEMINDER 

130mm 

510mm


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BLLD17 Bollards Q50 190 Litter Bins ........................ page 209 Traffic Management ......... page 368 


Vergemarkers 

Reflex Vergemarker 

REFLEX VERGEMARKER 

938mm 

above 

ground 


n The Reflex Vergemarker is the ideal reflective marker for high risk location; 

it withstands vehicle drive through and impact from any direction. 

n The Reflex Vergemarker eliminates the need for costly replacements of 

conventional marker posts. 

n A patented ‘self righting’ mechanism returns the Reflex Vergemarker to its 

original position. 

n Manufactured from UV stabilised polyethylene (PE) based material. Supplied in 

black with a white band and with aluminium backed shatterproof Class Ref 2 

reflectors angled for improved reflectivity on bands. 

OPTIONS 





Reflex Vergemarker 125 1260 938 Black and White n AS AS 


125mm 

82

83 





Low Level Signage – Series 300 

Sentinel Sign 300 Visibol 



n Versatile Traffic Management products, Series 300 comprises either Heritage or 

Sentinel Bollards with a sign with a face size of 300mm. 

n Options: 

Sign Options: A full range of sign options is available, including a double 

sided face. 

Reflective Banding: Class Ref 1 or 2 reflective banding can be supplied. 

Fully Reflective: Visibol Bollard option is available. 

Fixing Options: Please see page 398. 

HERITAGE SIGN 300 HERITAGE SIGN 300 VISIBOL SENTINEL SIGN 300 SENTINEL SIGN 300 VISIBOL 

364mm 

1419mm 

364mm 

SENTINEL AND HERITAGE SIGN TOP OPTIONS SIGN SUGGESTIONS 

1419mm 

OPTIONS 





Heritage Sign 300 364 1419 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Heritage Sign 300 Visibol 364 1419 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n 

Sentinel Sign 300 364 1419 Any Modern Colour n n n n n n 

Sentinel Sign 300 Visibol 364 1419 Any Modern Colour n n n n n 

364mm 

1419mm 

364mm 

1419mm





Low Level Signage – Series 230 

Sentinel Sign 230 

339mm 

1352mm 



n A range of hard wearing and adaptable Low Level Signage Bollards, Series 230 

comprises either Heritage or Sentinel Bollards with a sign with a face size 

of 230mm. 

n Options: 

Sign Options: A full range of sign options is available, including a double 

sided face. 

Reflective Banding: Class Ref 1 or 2 reflective banding can be supplied. 

Fully Reflective: Visibol Bollard option is available. 

Fixing Options: Please see page 398. 

HERITAGE SIGN 230 HERITAGE SIGN 230 VISIBOL SENTINEL SIGN 230 SENTINEL SIGN 230 VISIBOL 

339mm 

1352mm 

SENTINEL AND HERITAGE SIGN TOP OPTIONS SIGN SUGGESTIONS 

OPTIONS 





Heritage Sign 230 339 1352 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n n 

Heritage Sign 230 Visibol 339 1352 Any Heritage Colour n n n n n n n 

Sentinel Sign 230 339 1352 Any Modern Colour n n n n n n n 

Sentinel Sign 230 Visibol 339 1352 Any Modern Colour n n n n n n 

339mm 

1352mm 

339mm 

1352mm 

84

85 



Planters ........................... page 262 

Recycled Plastic Composite Bollards 

n Recycled Plastic Composite (RPC) Bollards are produced using plastic waste and 

manufactured using extruded techniques. 

n The bollards are suited for area demarcation. For perimeter protection and higher 

risk areas, steel cores can be inserted on request. 

n RPC is maintenance free, it is non-porous and therefore not subject to rot, algae 

or fungal growth, as such it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. 

Also, as it is an extruded product, it is free from cracking and splintering. 

n Due to high strength and robust construction RPC furniture is vandal resistant to 

physical attack. It has an easy wipe clean surface and paint and marker pen can 

easily be removed with thinners without damaging the product. 

n Bollards have an extended product lifetime as RPC is less susceptible to 

degradation over time, the whole life cost can be a third of the cost of a 

traditional material. 

Options 

n Countersunk Reflective Bands: Bollards can be supplied with a range of 

reflective banding options to increase visibility. 

n Bollards are available with a choice of two or three 25mm reflective bands, or a 

larger, single 50mm or 80mm band. 

n Reflective bands are available in a choice of three colour options; red, yellow 

or white. 

n Reflectors: Square reflective discs can also be added to bollards to increase 

visibility. 

SQUARE BOLLARD 

FLAT TOP 

LISMORE BOLLARD 



CIRCULAR BOLLARD 

FLAT TOP 

Please Note: The Lismore Bollard is not manufactured using the Intruplas process 

Size Top Options Colour Reflective Bands 

(in red, yellow or white) 

Style Diameter Total Length HAG Flat Chamfered Domed Black Mid-Brown 25mm 50mm 80mm Reflectors 

(mm) (mm) (mm) 

Circular 100 1500 1000 n n n n n 

Circular 150 1500 1000 n n n n n n n 




Circular 125 1200 900 n n n n n n 




Circular 100 1200 900 n n n n n 

Square 100 x 100 1250 900 n n n n n 

Rectangular 140 x 100 1200 900 n n n n 

150Ø 

1050 

400




Timber Bollards 

Sineu Graff 

Timber Bollard with cast iron top 


Seating ........................... page 165 


n Timber Bollards are manufactured in hardwood and finished with a 

natural coloured protective treatment. 

OPTIONS 


Planters ........................... page 248 

n The treatment provides UV resistance and protection against water, fungus and 

insect ingress. 

n Cast iron caps are treated against rust and have a polyester powder coated 

paint finish. 

n Bollards are supplied with two recessed (20mm) grooves. 

n Bollards are supplied with three types of fixing: 

– Root fixing 

– Lift out and lockable (with ground socket and optional cover) 

– Ground anchor with fixing bolts. 

TIMBER BOLLARD WITH CHAMFER TOP TIMBER BOLLARD WITH CAST IRON TOP 

110 x 110 

850 

350 

110 x 110 

Product Product Diameter Height HAG Weight Standard Lift Out and Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Lockable Anchor (A) 

Square Hardwood Bollard 40.301 110 x 110 1200 1000 12 Treated Tropical Hardwood n n 

Square Hardwood Bollard with Cast Iron Cap 40.305 110 x 110 1200 1000 13 Treated Tropical Hardwood n n 

850 

350 

86


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Seating 

Concrete Seating 89 

Monoscape: Boulevard, Riva, Scala, Igneo 90 

Monoscape: Bespoke Products and Special Commissions 95 

Bellitalia: Concrete and Polished Reconstituted Marble 96 

Bellitalia: Zebra 101 

Natural Stone Seating 103 

Geoform: Simply Stone 104 

Geoform: Stonelements 105 

Cast Iron and Timber Seating 109 

Imperial: Imperial 110 

Sineu Graff: Contemporary 111 

Sineu Graff: Classic 114 

Sineu Graff: Outdoor Living Rooms 119 

Steel/Stainless Steel and Timber Seating 123 

Sineu Graff: Outdoor Living Rooms 123 

Sineu Graff: Rondo, Rondima, Beaubourg 127 

Ollerton 131 

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating 133 

Ollerton: M3 134 

Ollerton: Festival 139 

Ollerton: Delta Festival 144 

Ollerton: Buffalo and Metropolitan 145 

Ollerton: Bleasdale and Celebration 147 

Sineu Graff: Outdoor Living Rooms – Garden City 149 

Sineu Graff: Rondinox and Bercy 151 

Sineu Graff: Citadelle, Orsay, Jazz and Rendezvous City 153 

Sineu Graff: Urban 157 

Polyurethane Seating 161 

Ferrocast® Seating 162 

Timber Seating 165 

Sineu Graff: Victoria and Rustic 165 

Recycled Plastic Composite Seating 167 

Intruplas: Recycled Plastic Seating 167 

Picnic Tables 169 

Ollerton 169 


‹ Ollerton M3 Serpentine Bench in Stainless Steel, Chichester College 88

89 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Concrete Seating 

Belluno Concrete Bench 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer concrete seating that will meet the demands of any 

landscape and will suit most budgetary requirements. 

Concrete seating is extremely durable and well withstands the rigours of modern 

environments. Robust and hardwearing it is ideal for urban areas where there will 

be frequent street cleaning or the threat of deliberate damage. Concrete seating 

weathers naturally and therefore will require minimal maintenance. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer the following concrete seating: 

Monoscape: The Boulevard range is utilitarian and functional, the sturdy seat 

and bench are constructed from a concrete base with hardwood timber slats for 

comfort. Riva and Scala are two ranges of German design from Stein and Design that 

will provide a more sculptured aesthetic to an environment. Riva seating juxtaposes 

defined lines in concrete with curves and is polished to emulate the fine shotblast 

finish of granite. Scala seating expresses clear lines and combines concrete with 

steel, stainless steel and wooden seating slats. 

Bellitalia concrete seating combines style with form and function. Innovative design 

features seats and benches from cast concrete, polished marble aggregate that 

gives a beautiful marble lustre finish and concrete combined imaginatively with 

metals such as steel, stainless steel and copper. 

Marshalls Street Furniture are able to undertake bespoke commissions; we offer a full 

technical advice and design service to take creative concepts through to production. 

For colour swatches please see page 383.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SEAT01 Benches Q50 220 

Seats Q50 225 


Boulevard 

Boulevard Seat 

BOULEVARD SEAT BOULEVARD BENCH 

800 

2000 705 

400 

Supplied Fully Assembled 


Bollards ............................. page 34 



Planters ........................... page 232 

Seat Seat Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Weight Colour Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed 

Boulevard Seat FM675 2000 400 215 See Swatch Treated Hardwood n n 

Boulevard Bench FM670 1400 440 474 See Swatch Treated Hardwood n n n 

1400 

700 

440 

90

91 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Riva 

Riva: Barioni Bench and Appia Seat/Bollard 

BARIONI BENCH APPIA SEAT/BOLLARD 

1700 

2100 

350 

100 

SEAT01 Benches Q50 220 

Seats Q50 225 


Product Product Span Height Weight Colour Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed 

Barioni Bench SD9044 2100 450 392 See Swatch Fine Shotblast Ends* n n 

430 

350 

100 


Bollards ............................. page 36 Planters ........................... page 234 

Appia Bollard/Seat SD9046 500 500 240 See Swatch Fine Shotblast n n n ** 

*The Barioni bench features a ground polished top 

**The Appia has a female M16 stainless steel socket cast into the centre of the underside face. Additional anchorage can be gained by attaching a length of stainless steel studding 

and setting it into a concrete footing supplied on site by the contractor 

500 

500



Seats Q50 225 


Scala 

Scala Bench (Stainless Steel Section) 


SCALA BENCH WITH TIMBER SECTION SCALA BENCH WITH STEEL SECTION 

2000 

450 

250 

500 

450 

250 

Bollards ............................. page 36 Planters ........................... page 234 

SCALA BENCH WITH STAINLESS STEEL SECTION 


Product Product Span Height Weight End End Section Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Colour Finish Finish Standing Mount Fixed 

Scala Bench SS (Stainless Steel Section) SD9024 2000 450 200 See Swatch Polished Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n n 

Scala Bench (Timber Slats) SD9024 2000 450 200 See Swatch Polished Treated Hardwood n n n 

Scala Bench (Steel Section) SD9024 2000 450 200 See Swatch Polished PC RAL Colour n n n 

2000 

2000 

450 

250 

450 

250 

500 

500 

450 

250 

450 

250 

92

93 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Igneo 

Igneo seating is a modular system that offers contemporary styling, combined 

functionality and maximum robustness. Igneo seating can be specified to any 

length, based on the module sizes below, dependant on the location and the 

amount of seating places required. 

Igneo seating provides the durability that is achieved from cast concrete. Extremely 

hard wearing, concrete weathers naturally and requires minimal maintenance. 

Seating is also almost vandal resistant and has an anti-graffiti coating as standard. 

Arm rests can be installed between sections. Manufactured in Ferrocast 

polyurethane they too will have a long life span and require little maintenance. 

Arm rests can be ordered in any standard RAL colour. 

Seating sections are free standing and are pinned to each other to ensure that they 

remain in place and continue to provide clean, continuous lines. 


Seats Q50 225 

IGNEO LITTER BIN 

601 


Bollards ............................. page 34 


1140 

803 603 

Planters ........................... page 232 

837

MODULAR SEAT, LEFT SECTION 

MODULAR SEAT, CENTRE SECTION 

878 

474 

1037 

660 

474 

878 

168 

1115 

168 

362 

231 

1115 

MODULAR SEAT, RIGHT SECTION 

CHAIR 

Seat Seat 

Product Span Height Weight Fixing Method 

Description (mm) (mm) (kg) 

Modular Seat Left Section 1037 474 1021.53 Free Standing 

Modular Seat Right Section 1037 474 1203.02 Free Standing 

Modular Seat Centre Section 1102 474 1021.3 Free Standing 

Chair 953 434 1110.55 Free Standing 

878 

474 

561 

435 

168 

1115 

953 

94

95 



Seats Q50 225 


Bespoke Products and Special Commissions 

Bespoke Seats/Bollards, Kings Dock, Liverpool 

Special commissions may be undertaken to create truly unique furniture. From 

one off pieces to match existing installations, to whole systems that will create a 

statement scheme. 

Bespoke pieces will be created in the design, colour and finish of your choice. 

Design elements from different materials such as steel, stainless steel or Ferrocast® 

can be incorporated. Pieces can be commissioned in colours to contrast with or 

complement Marshalls paving to create a fully integrated appearance. Four standard 

finishes are available and text or detailing can be sandblasted onto the piece. 

Marshalls specialists will offer technical advice to take creative concepts to 

production. Design, manufacture, installation, scheduling and costs will be taken 

into account to ensure the process runs smoothly. 

Monoscape Cube with sandblasted logo 

Bespoke Seating, Kings Dock, Liverpool 

Coordinating items



Seats Q50 225 



Quadro Bench 

QUADRO BENCH 

550 

500 

450 


Bollards ............................. page 37 



Planters ........................... page 235 


Bellitalia Concrete Seating is stylish and functional, pieces are manufactured using 

steel-reinforced precast white or grey concrete, vibrated, sandblasted and protected 

using an acrylic resin coating. Pieces are supplied pre-assembled. The total weight of 

the benches mean that additional anchorage to the ground is not required. When 

installing, use the appropriate lifting techniques to lift and locate benches safely. 

Quadro Bench: A modular monolithic bench featuring anatomically shaped seat for 

comfort, each modular element is produced in a single concrete pouring. 

Belluno Bench: Practical and excellent value. The rectangular precast concrete seat 

rests on two concrete legs which are firmly anchored to the seat via two threaded 

bars, locked using M16 nuts located in recesses in the undersides of each leg. 

Belluno Concrete Bench with Natural Stone Inset: The rectangular precast concrete 

seat features a natural stone inset plate (a range of stone finishes are available). 

Menhir Bench: A robust bench featuring a semicircular section. The unit is 

manufactured in one single semicircular section and topped with a rectangular seat 

block with gently rounded corners. The bench rests on two small legs. 

Cosmoarredo Concrete Bench: The concrete bench is wrapped in a 1mm thick 

protective natural copper shell (produced by encasing the concrete in a natural copper 

shell and resin bonding the internal surfaces) and consists of a rectangular seat and two 

high bases which are attached using hot dip galvanised, steel threaded tie rods and nuts. 

Eraclea and Venezia are also available in standard concrete finishes. 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing 

Quadro Bench BIAV5501 500 450 243 Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

96

97 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 



Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset, Welsh Development Agency 

NUEVOCENTO BENCH 

2450 

1421 

166 


Seats Q50 225 

600 

325 

451 

BELLUNO BENCH 

1500 

880 

BELLUNO BENCH WITH NATURAL STONE INSET 

1500 

880 


Bollards ............................. page 37 



Planters ........................... page 235 


23~ 

500 

385 

500 

385 

400 

423

Menhir Bench 

Cosmoarredo Bench with Copper Top 

MENHIR BENCH 

COSMOARREDO BENCH WITH COPPER TOP 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing 

Belluno Bench BI901844 1500 400 243 Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset BI901804 1500 423 280 Granite/Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

Menhir Bench BI901801 2200 500 784 Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

Nuevocento Bench 2450 451 610 Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

Cosmoarredo Bench with Copper Top BIAP4600 1655 400 256 Copper/Clear Acrylic Resin n n 

1655 

880 

2200 

1360 

500 

520 

385 

500 

480 

400 

98

99 



Seats Q50 225 


Polished Reconstituted Marble Seating 

Eraclea Bench, Rosso 

ERACLEA BENCH VENEZIA BENCH 

2200 

Rosso Giallo 

610 

450 


Bollards ............................. page 38 


Planters ........................... page 242 


n An elegant range of seating manufactured from a fine marble aggregate, 

polished with a unique technique to leave a smooth finish which is treated with 

a protective varnish to give a polished effect. 

n Manufactured from a fine marble aggregate with a maximum particle size of 

25mm, finished smooth and treated with a protective varnish. The supporting feet 

are sandblasted and painted. Each side features a 40mm diameter brass plate. 

n The Aurelia Bench framework consists of steel stirrups anchored firmly to axle 

boxes. Threaded bars are used to secure the supporting feet. 

n All products are delivered to site pre-assembled. 

n The Eraclea and Venezia are also available in standard concrete finishes. 

Colours 



Rosso Bianco Giallo Veneziano Verde 

Nero Porfido 

1900 

450 

450

Romana Bench, Nero and Saturnia Planter, Harbour Reach, Dorset 

ROMANA BENCH ROMANA CURVED BENCH 

1910 85 

Porfido Verde 

560 

430 

AURELIA BENCH 


Product Product Span Height Width Weight Colours Standard Supplied Free 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing 

Eraclea Bench BIAP3630 2200 450 610 595 See Swatch Polished n n 

Aurelia Bench BIAP3620 1500 400 500 243 See Swatch Polished n n 

Romana Bench BIAP3610 1910 430 560 490 See Swatch Polished n n 

Romana Curved Bench BIAP3611 2109 430 560 530 See Swatch Polished n n 

Venezia Bench 1900 450 450 450 See Swatch Polished n n 

400 

Giallo 

1500 

2109 

45º 

500 

560 

100

101 



Seats Q50 225 


Zebra Seating 

Zebra Seat: Stainless Steel on concrete feet 


Bollards ............................. page 37 


ZEBRA SEAT: STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET ZEBRA FREESTANDING SEAT: STEEL 

1500 

900 

Ø440 

489 

240 

729 

264 

Also Available in 


369 

433 


Planters ........................... page 246 

n Contemporary street furniture combining the contrasting textures and colours 

of concrete and metal. 

n Hemispherical steel reinforced concrete bases are combined with steel or 

stainless steel seating. 

n Products require assembly on site. 

n Zebra Seat on concrete feet consists of separate backrest and seat sections and 

features 17 (backrest) and 21 (seat) concentric bars with a 15mm circular cross 

section. The structure is held in place by two steel brackets, fastened to two 

hemispherical, steel-reinforced, precast concrete bases with brass nuts and bolts. 

The bases are vibrated, sandblasted and protected using a clear acrylic 

resin coating. 

n Backrests and seat sections are available in zinc plated, polyester powder coated 

steel (RAL 7021), and AISI 316 stainless steel. 

729 

1500 634 

433

Zebra Convex and Concave Seat: steel on concrete feet 

ZEBRA CONVEX SEAT: STAINLESS STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET ZEBRA CONCAVE SEAT: STAINLESS STEEL ON CONCRETE FEET 

1692 

729 

Also Available in Steel Also Available in Steel 

2098 

240 

264 369 

2178 

Ø440 

Internal radius: 2235 External radius: 2869 Internal radius: 2131 External radius: 2765 

433 

729 

489 

240 193 

729 

240 

264 369 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free Surface 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing Mount 

Zebra Freestanding Seat in Steel BIAP3033 1500 433 106 PC Black Grey RAL 7021 n 

Zebra Seat: Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3030 1500 433 218 PC Black Grey RAL 7021 n 

Zebra Seat: Stainless Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3050 1500 433 218 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n 

Zebra Convex Seat in Stainless Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3052 2098 433 250 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n 

Zebra Concave Seat in Stainless Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3051 2178 433 250 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n 

Zebra Convex Seat in Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3032 2098 433 250 PC Black Grey RAL 7021 n 

Zebra Concave Seat in Steel on Concrete Feet BIAP3031 2178 433 250 PC Black Grey RAL 7021 n 

1612 

Ø440 

433 

102

103 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Natural Stone Seating 

Stonelements Seat with Tapered Legs in Polished Black on Marshalls Conservation Paving in Silver Grey 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer two ranges of natural granite furniture. 

Stonelements: A unique collection of street furniture made from a high quality, 

natural granite created by award winning designer Terence Woodgate. Created 

with smooth clean lines and rounded edges, Stonelements furniture allows you to 

introduce a purposeful, sophisticated, sculptural aesthetic for your scheme. 

Simply Stone: A range of functional and flexible pieces. The seating comprises two 

angular benches, contemporary and trestle, which create clean and simple solutions 

for any urban space. 

All Marshalls Street Furniture granite materials are sourced from the company’s 

principal Chinese supplier who complies to the ETI (Ethical Trading Initiative) Base 

Code and the Principles of Implementation. 

Geoform ranges use high quality granite in beautiful, harmonising colourways, 

available in polished or fine picked textures to provide striking contrasts and finished 

effects. Polished granite enhances the natural beauty of the stone, providing an 

elegant finish with advanced aesthetic qualities. Fine picked yields a matt, textured 

finish with superior slip resistant qualities. 

Colours 



Mid Grey 


Silver Grey 

Polished 

Light Beige 

Fine Picked 


Pink 


Black 


Dark Green 

Polished Fine Picked



Seats Q50 225 


Simply Stone 

Simple 2000 Bench, Contemporary Style, Silver Grey Fine Picked with bespoke detailing, 

Grace Darling Museum, Bamburgh 


Bollards ............................ page 40 

n The Simple 2000 Bench provides simple, practical and attractive solutions for 

seating arrangements. The edges of the bench and the bench feet have been 

chamfered and rounded off smoothly. 

SIMPLE 2000 BENCH TRESTLE STYLE SIMPLE 2000 BENCH CONTEMPORARY STYLE 

500 

2000 

Armrest Option 

500 

490 

n Grade 316L stainless steel armrests can be located at any divisional point along 

the length of the seat. 

n Available in six colours and two finishes. 

n Delivered to site pre-assembled. 

Seat Seat Seat Fixing Method 

Product Span Width Height Weight Standard Free 

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing 

Simple 2000 Trestle Bench 2000 500 500 445 Polished or Fine Picked n 

Simple 2000 Contemporary Bench 2000 500 500 445 Polished or Fine Picked n 

500 

2000 


500 

490 

104

105 



Seats Q50 225 


Stonelements 

Seat with tapered legs in polished black 

BENCH WITH TAPERED LEGS SEAT WITH TAPERED LEGS 

2000mm 600mm 

450mm 

450mm 


n Designed by award winning designer Terence Woodgate and produced by 

Marshalls Street Furniture, Stonelements is a cutting edge range of contemporary 

urban furniture made from high quality, natural granite. 

n Comprising a selection of stunning pieces, the collection was inspired by the 

welcoming guidance and smoothness of Cairn stone stacks, plus the raw, 

sustained powerful aesthetics of Stonehenge. 

n Like its inspiration, the Cairn, Stonelements celebrates the precariously exposed, 

simplistic relationship of the junction between the materials. This is then 

counteracted by the strong structural design principles supported by the mass, 

hardness and durability that natural granite commands. 

n Offering the architect a myriad of tailor-made solutions, each individual item of 

Stonelements is custom made to create innovative and original pieces of street 

furniture. The range can be commissioned in six colours from black to pink 

and further complemented by a selection of bespoke finishes including highly 

polished and fine picked. 

n Limited assembly and some installation work will be required on site. 

2000mm 600mm 

700mm 

450mm 250mm

Bench with block legs in polished black 

BENCH WITH BLOCK LEGS CURVED BENCH WITH BLOCK LEGS 

2000mm 600mm 

450mm 

450mm 

SEAT WITH BLOCK LEGS 

Seat Seat Fixing Methods 

Product Span Height Weight Standard Ground Free 

Description (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Fixed Standing 

Bench with Tapered Legs 2000 450 598 Polished or Fine Picked n n 

Seat with Tapered Legs 2000 450 814 Polished or Fine Picked n n 

Seat with Block Legs 2000 450 838 Polished or Fine Picked n n 

Bench with Block Legs 2000 450 621 Polished or Fine Picked n n 

Curved Bench with Block Legs 2242 450 642 Polished or Fine Picked n n 

600mm 

2000mm 600mm 

2242mm 

700mm 

450mm 250mm 

770mm 

106

107 

Bench with conical legs in fine picked silver grey 

BENCH WITH CONICAL LEGS SEAT WITH CONICAL LEGS 

2000mm 600mm 

450mm 

2000mm 600mm 

700mm 

450mm 250mm

STOOL OVAL BENCH WITH CONICAL LEGS 

400mm 

Stool and oval bench with conical legs in polished black 

450mm 

1500mm 400mm 


Product Span Height Weight Standard Ground 

Description (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Fixed 

Bench with Conical Legs 2000 450 538 Polished or Fine Picked n 

Seat with Conical Legs 2000 450 754 Polished or Fine Picked n 

Stool 400 450 76 Polished or Fine Picked n 

Oval Bench with Conical Legs 1500 450 279 Polished or Fine Picked n 

450 

108

109 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Cast Iron and Timber Seating 

Rendezvous Seats and Litter Bin on Buff Charnwood Paving, Royal Quays, Romford 

Kingston Seat 

Marshalls offer an extensive range of cast iron and timber seating that will enhance 

any landscape whether urban or rural. 

Our Imperial range features classic, traditional pieces. 

Sineu Graff cast iron and timber seating is presented in three main ranges: 

Contemporary, Classic and Outdoor Living Rooms. 

Ideal for the modern urban environment, Contemporary seating combines cast iron 

and timber with European style. The cast iron legs are formed to create streamlined, 

assertive lines, which are complemented by smooth shaped hardwood slats. 

Classic seating combines traditional design with simplicity to create a more timehonoured 

style. 

Outdoor Living Rooms present a new concept in street furniture. Armchairs, 

loungers, seats with two or three places, footstools and low tables allow multiple 

configurations, enabling the creation of convivial urban spaces and sustainable 

public environments. Ranges in cast iron and timber include Opera, Café and Elite. 

Seating is offered with a variety of options including; armrests, engravings, motifs, 

plaques and various fixing methods. Cast iron and timber seating is available with 

frames and legs in a range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours. 

Please contact our Sales Office for further information.



Seats Q50 225 


Imperial 

n The Imperial range of cast iron seating is styled to blend in with more 

traditional landscapes. 

n The Heritage Seat: Cast iron and timber with ductile iron ends and feet which 

are painted in RAL 9017 Traffic Black to protect against corrosion. Seating sections 

and backrests are manufactured from hardwood which is certified as being from 

renewable resources. 

n Kingston and Commemorative Seats: Cast aluminium and timber. 

n Other RAL colours are available on request. 

n Litter bins and a full range of cast iron and aluminium bollards are also available. 

KINGSTON SEAT 

1800 or 2000 632 

800 

440 

HERITAGE SEAT 

COMMEMORATIVE SEAT 


Bollards ............................. page 41 


Planters ........................... page 263 



Signage........................... page 307 


Product Description Product Ref Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground 

(mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed 

Heritage Seat MSF 502 1800 450 96 Hardwood n n n 

Kingston Seat OLCS101 1800 440 75 Hardwood n n n n 

Kingston Seat OLCS102 2000 440 80 Hardwood n n n n 

Commemorative Seat OLCS416 1900 480 106 Hardwood n n n n 

1900 

1800 

820 

875 

480 

650 

450 

Also Available in Steel 

110

111 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SEAT06 Seats Q5O 220 

Benches Q5O 225 


Contemporary 

Metropolis Seat 

METROPOLIS SEAT METROPOLIS BENCH 


2000 

740 

625 

435 


Litter Bins ........................ page 202 Planters ........................... page 249 

n With its modern design and more assertive lines, the Contemporary Range 

features seats and benches constructed from cast iron or steel with hardwood. 

n Seats and backrests are made using hardwood from sustainable sources, treated 

with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. 

n Legs are constructed from cast iron treated against rust and polyester 

powder coated. 

n The standard colour for ends and frames is Grey 900 Sable. A full range of 

standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available. 

n End and/or intermediate armrests are available for certain models. 

n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 399. 

2000 455 

STOCK 

435

Rendezvous Seat on Marshalls Greenmoor Rustic Paving, Chepstow Town Centre, Gwent 

RENDEZVOUS BENCH RENDEZVOUS CIRCULAR BENCH 

1800 440 

STOCK 

420 

RENDEZVOUS SEAT 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground Fixing Number 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed Type Required 

Metropolis Seat 10.0210E 2000 435 81 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

Metropolis Bench 10.0215E 2000 435 63 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 2 

Rendezvous Seat 10.0200E 1800 420 117 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

Rendezvous Bench 10.0205E 1800 420 65 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

Rendezvous Circular Bench 10.0205CE 1385/1022 420 65 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

790 


445 

1800 

R1493 

1385 

645 

1022 

584 

R1060 

STOCK 

STOCK 

420 

112

113 

Expression Seat 

Attitude Seat 

EXPRESSION SEAT 

ATTITUDE SEAT 




Expression Seat 10.0310E 2000 400 86 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n n T or DT 4 

Attitude Seat 10.0320E 2030 410 72 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n n T or DT 4 

400 

410 

665 

675 

2000 

2030 

840 

810



Seats Q50 225 


Classic 

Centaure Evolution Seat 

n Offering timeless designs, the Classic Range features seats and benches 

constructed from cast iron and hardwood that will provide comfort and style to 

any traditional landscape. 

n Seats and backrests are made using hardwood from sustainable sources treated 

with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. 

n All seats and benches have cast iron legs which are treated against rust and 

polyester powder coated. The standard colour is RAL 9017 Traffic Black. 

n A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours 

is available. 


CENTAURE EVOLUTION SEAT 


Bollards ............................ page 44 


Planters ........................... page 249 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground Fixing Numbers 


Centuare Evolution Seat 10.0100E 1960 430 76 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 4 

430 

615 

1960 

740 

114

115 

Royal Seat 

ROYAL SEAT ESPLANADE BENCH 

410 

680 

1960 

900 

850 

1965 

410

Relax Seat 

Entracte Seat 

RELAX SEAT 

ENTRACTE SEAT 




Royal Seat 10.0050E 1960 410 80 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 4 

Esplanade Bench 10.0045E 1965 410 80 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 4 

Relax Seat 10.0007E 1970 410 73 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 4 

Entracte Seat 10.0330 2000 400 44 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n T or DT 4 

410 

400 

680 

585 

750 

1970 

2000 

715 

116

117 

Forum Seat 

AVENUE SEAT FORUM SEAT 

845 

2000 

645 

452 




Avenue Seat 10.0040E 2000 452 66 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n n T or DT 4 

Forum Seat 10.0035E 1970 450 66 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n n T or DT 4 

810 

1970 

685 

450

CONFORT 1 SEAT 

425 

615 2000 


810 

2000 

620 

715 

420 


INTERMEDE BENCH 

2000 400 




Confort 1 Seat 10.0002E 2000 425 56 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 2 



Intermede Bench 10.0009E 2000 410 34 RAL 9017 Traffic Black n n n n T or DT 2 

425 

615 2000 

715 

410 

118

119 



Seats Q50 225 

Tables Q50 230 


Outdoor Living Rooms 

Opera Chair, two and three place seats 

Elite Seat, Nice 


Bollards ............................ page 44 Litter Bins ........................ page 195 

n Outdoor Living Rooms is a new concept in street furniture. Chairs, armchairs, 

loungers, seats with two or three places, benches, footstools, and low tables allow 

multiple configurations enabling the creation of convivial urban spaces. 

n The restrained design of the Opera Range offers simplicity and elegance. Seats 

and backrests are made from hardwood from sustainable sources, treated with 

a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective treatment. Cast iron legs are treated 

against rust and polyester powder coated as standard in Sable Textured Grey 900. 

n The Café range encourages conviviality and provides comfort with the cast iron 

legs incorporating an integral armrest. Slats are made from hardwood from 

sustainable sources treated with a solvent-free, natural-coloured protective 

treatment. The cast iron is treated against rust and polyester powder coated as 

standard in Sable Textured Brown 650. 

n The Elite range brings contemporary design with an original leg profile. 

Slats are made from hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a clear 

oak shade protective treatment. Contrasting white seating slats are also available. 

Cast iron legs are treated against rust and polyester powder coated as standard 

in Manganese Black. 

n Two further ranges, Optima and Garden City are featured in the steel and stainless 

steel seating category. 

n For further details on fixing type, please refer to page 399.



Seats Q50 225 



Outdoor Living Rooms: Opera 

OPERA 2 PLACE SEAT 

450 

OPERA CHAIR 

450 

645 

645 

1165 

560 

840 

840 

OPERA 3 PLACE SEAT 

OPERA LOW TABLE 





Opera 2Pc Seat J298.402E 1165 450 50 PC Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Opera 3Pc Seat J298.400E 1715 450 57 PC Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Opera Chair J298.405E 560 450 43 PC Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Opera Low Table 10.0640E 700 365 25 PC Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

450 

645 

700 


365 

1715 

700 

840 

120

121 



Seats Q50 225 



Outdoor Living Rooms: Café 

CAFÉ 2 PLACE SEAT 

450 

CAFÉ CHAIR 

450 

CAFÉ 3 PLACE SEAT 

CAFÉ LOW TABLE 


640 1280 

640 

1830 

640 730 

815 

815 




Café 2Pc Seat 10.0420E 1280 450 56 PC Textured Brown 650 n n n n T or DT 4 

Café 3Pc Seat 10.0430E 1830 450 63 PC Textured Brown 650 n n n n T or DT 4 

Café Chair 10.0410E 730 450 48 PC Textured Brown 650 n n n n T or DT 4 

Café Low Table 10.0440E 700 365 26 PC Textured Brown 650 n n n n T or DT 4 

450 


700 700 

365 

815



Seats Q50 225 



Outdoor Living Rooms: Elite 

ELITE 2 PLACE SEAT 

450 

ELITE CHAIR 

450 

610 

1220 

610 670 

810 

810 

ELITE 3 PLACE SEAT 

ELITE LOW TABLE 





Elite 2Pc seat 10.0620E 1220 450 55 Manganese Black n n n T or DT 2 

Elite 3Pc seat 10.0630E 1770 450 65 Manganese Black n n n T or DT 2 

Elite Chair 10.0610E 670 450 49 Manganese Black n n n T or DT 2 

Elite Low Table 10.0640E 700 365 25 Manganese Black n n n n T or DT 4 

450 

610 

700 


365 

1770 

700 

810 

122

123 



Seats Q50 225 


Steel/Stainless Steel and Timber Seating 

Outdoor Living Rooms: Optima 

Optima 3 place seat, Manchester 

OPTIMA 3 PLACE SEAT 

450 

565 

1812 

812 


n Optima uses clean and elegant lines, with only the essentials retained to create an 

outdoor suite designed to be as uncluttered as possible. Legs are made from steel 

which is zinc plated and powder coated as standard in Sable Textured Grey 900. 

Slats are made from hardwood from sustainable sources treated with a solventfree, 

mahogany-coloured protective finish. A full range of standard RAL (high 

gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available for the legs. 

n Also available: Opticar, a seat and bench which offer the same refined lines 

as Optima, but which have slimmer wooden slats fitted into end frames. 

Same dimensions apply. 

OPTICAR 3 PLACE SEAT OPTICAR BENCH 

OPTIMA 2 PLACE SEAT 

450 

565 


1212 

812

OPTIMA CHAIR 

450 

OPTIMA LOW TABLE 

565 562 

670 660 

812 

370 

OPTIMA BENCH 

565 1812 

OPTIMA HIGH TABLE 




Optima 3Pc Seat 10.3030 EM 1812 450 35 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Optima 2Pc Seat 10.3020 EM 1212 450 28 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Optima Chair 10.3010 EM 562 450 20 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Optima Bench 10.3060 EM 1812 450 20 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Optima Low Table 10.3070 EM 670 370 20 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Optima High Table 10.3080 EM 1816 700 80 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Opticar 3Pc Seat 10.3035 1812 450 35 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Opticar Bench 10.3065 1812 450 28 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

450 

700 

1816 

50 

124

125 



Seats Q50 225 


Outdoor Living Rooms: Cube 

Cube 3 Place Seat 

n Part of the Outdoor Living Room Series, Cube is a strictly contemporary design. 

Emphasis is placed on the sophisticated wooden seating section which, when 

combined with the angular armrests provides a striking aesthetic. 

n Cube features a robust wooden seating section with slats shaped to create a light 

and symmetrical pattern in the seat and backrest. A light dimension is provided 

by the use of Integral armrests in steel. 

n Slats are made from Garapa hardwood from sustainable sources. To provide a 

protective finish wood is treated with a water-based, solvent-free, emulsion stain 

applied by an electrostatic process. 

n Legs, detailing and armrests are made from steel which is cleaned, shot blasted 

and then coated with a base layer of epoxy powder and finished with a polyester 

powder paint. 

n Steel parts are supplied as standard in Sable Textured Grey 900. A full range 

of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available 

for the legs. 


CUBE LOW TABLE 



640 640 

400

CUBE 3 PLACE SEAT 

450 

CUBE CHAIR 

636 1740 

450 

636 640 

832 

832 

CUBE 2 PLACE SEAT 

CUBE BENCH 

636 1190 




Cube Low Table 10.0540 640 400 22 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Cube 3 Place Seat 10.0530 1740 450 60 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Cube 2 Place Seat 10.0520 1190 450 50 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Cube Chair 10.0510 640 450 41 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Cube Bench 10.0560 1740 450 43 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

450 

450 

426 1740 

832 

570 

126

127 



Seats Q50 225 


Rondo 

Rondo Seating with Domino Planter 

n Rondo has a light and modern aesthetic created by using slim wooden seating 

slats in a dark mahogany finish which are complemented by a streamlined steel 

frame with fully rounded armrests. 

n Rondo is comprised of ten slim wooden slats supported by a steel frame with 

integral armrests which allow the user to sit comfortably. 






powder paint. 


of standard RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available for 

the legs. 



Litter Bins ........................ page 195 Planters ........................... page 249

RONDO SEAT 3 PLACES 

450 

571 1909 

RONDO CHAIR 

450 

571 659 

812 

812 

RONDO SEAT 2 PLACES 

RONDO BENCH 

571 1309 




Rondo Seat 3 Places 10.3135 1909 450 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Rondo Seat 2 Places 10.3125 1309 450 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Rondo Chair 10.3115 659 450 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Rondo Bench 10.3165 1911 450 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

450 

450 

426 1911 

812 

585 

128

129 



Seats Q50 225 


Rondima 

Rondima detail 

RONDIMA 3 PLACE SEAT RONDIMA BENCH 

450 

571 1907 

812 



n A simple yet comfortable design, four wide wooden slats are supported by 

rounded frames with integral armrests. 

n The wooden slats are finished in contemporary mahogany finish. 


protective finish, wood is treated with a water-based, solvent-free, emulsion stain 




powder paint. 



the legs. 

450 

426 1911 




Rondima 3 Place Seat 10.3130 1907 450 58 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

Rondima Bench 10.3160 1911 450 28 PC Sable Textured Grey 900 n n n n T or DT 4 

585



Seats Q50 225 




Beaubourg 

Beaubourg Bench, Seat and Diamond Point Elliptical Litter Bin 

BEAUBOURG SEAT BEAUBOURG BENCH 

420 

615 2135 

805 

n Beaubourg seating is an old favourite, featuring warm timber slats and integral 

armrests provided by rounded end frames with detailing. 






powder paint. 



the legs. 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Free Surface Ground Fixing Number 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Fixed Type Required 

Beaubourg Seat 10.0160 2135 420 59 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

Beaubourg Bench 10.0162 2135 408 34 PC Grey 900 Sable n n n T or DT 4 

408 

545 

2135 

575 

130

131 



Seats Q50 225 

Steel/Stainless Steel and 

Timber Seating 

M3/Festival with Timber Slats 

M3 straight seat with timber slats 

450 


Bollards ............................. page 55 



Planters ........................... page 258 

576 1800 



Signage........................... page 306 


n Stylish seating combining the design and form of the supports from the M3 and 

Festival ranges with hardwood timber slats. 

n Supports: Available in either 316L grade satin polished stainless steel (M3) or in 

mild steel which is galvanised and polyester powder coated. 

n Seating Section: Provided with Iroko hardwood timber slats sourced from 

renewable sources. 

n Options: Arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, surface 

trim plates and demountable ground sockets are also available. 

n Customisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and arm 

rests. Plaques may also be provided. 

M3/FESTIVAL STRAIGHT SEAT WITH TIMBER SLATS M3/FESTIVAL STRAIGHT BENCH WITH TIMBER SLATS 

480 

590 1800 

780 

OptiOns 

Length Fixing Method Add Ons 

Seat Seat Standard Sub- Demountable Surface Leg 

Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Ground Trim Diameter Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted Socket Plates (mm) Rests 

M3 Straight Seat with Hardwood Slats OLSS106 1800 480 n/a 45 Iroko Hardwood 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

M3 Straight Bench with Hardwood Slats OLSB506 1800 450 n/a 22 Iroko Hardwood 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Straight Seat with Hardwood Slats OLFS106 1800 480 n/a 41 Iroko Hardwood 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n



Seats Q50 225 

Steel/Stainless Steel and 


Delta Festival with Timber Slats 

Delta Festival Straight Bench, Birmingham 

480 


Bollards ............................. page 55 



Planters ........................... page 258 

DELTA FESTIVAL STRAIGHT SEAT WITH TIMBER SLATS DELTA FESTIVAL STRAIGHT BENCH WITH TIMBER SLATS 

480 

565 1800 

820 

565 1800 



Signage........................... page 306 


n Functional and versatile seating using the cast aluminium ends of the Delta 

Festival range combined with hardwood timber slats. 

n Supports: Supports are cast aluminium, hot dip galvanised and polyester 


n Seating Section: Provided with Iroko hardwood timber slats sourced from 


n Options: Further arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, 

surface trim plates and demountable ground sockets are also available. 

n Customisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and arm 

rests. Plaques may also be provided. 

Seat Seat Standard Optional Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Length Surface Sub-Surface Ground Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish (mm) Mount Mount Fixed Rests 

Delta Festival Straight Seat with Timber Slats OLDS102 1800 480 n/a 49 Iroko Hardwood 1500 n n n n 

Delta Festival Straight Bench with Timber Slats OLDB502 1800 480 n/a 47 Iroko Hardwood 1500 n n n n 

132

133 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel and Stainless Steel Seating 

M3 Straight Seats and Festival Flared Top Litter Bin, Albert Dock, Liverpool 

Ollerton and Sineu Graff offer a variety of seating styles and options providing 

solutions for almost any individual requirement. 

Ollerton is renowned for style, quality and value and offers six different ranges of 

steel and stainless steel seating. M3 Stainless Steel and Festival Steel Seating systems 

are possibly the most versatile and flexible available. The modularity of the systems 

enables seats and benches to be specified in a number of ways. 

Included in the Festival range is the Delta Festival, this is a contemporary range of 

seating which is mounted onto end castings with integral armrests. 

Buffalo Seating is constructed from mild steel which is galvanised and then powder 

coated to protect against corrosion. Seating can also be supplied in any RAL colour, 

seat slats and end sections can be in different colours if required. 

Sineu Graff ‘s prestigious collection of European Street Furniture showcases steel 

and stainless steel seating, which facilitates the integration of designs into the most 

varied of settings. Steel products can be supplied in a range of RAL (high gloss) or 

Sable (matt textured) colours. 

The Sineu Graff steel and stainless steel ranges comprise City, Urban and Outdoor 

Living Rooms. 

The City Range features contemporary designs with modern, clean lines in steel and 

stainless steel. City Seats and Benches offer function and durability with maximum 

style. Constructed from steel which is zinc-plated and polyester powder coated, they 

achieve a high quality, smooth and durable surface finish. Cast Iron legs are treated 

against rust and polyester powder coated, steel legs are zinc plated and polyester 


The Urban Range has been designed as a full system for the enhancement of highly 

urbanised spaces, it is composed exclusively of individual seats that can be easily 

mixed and matched. Steel furniture is zinc-plated and powder coated to a high 

quality finish and is available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. 

Stainless steel furniture is made from high quality 316L grade stainless steel and is 

shot peened to give a smooth matt finish. Arm rests are available on certain models. 

Outdoor Living Rooms range features Garden City and Optima. Garden City 

provides maximum solidity and comfort, together with a light transparent aesthetic. 

Seating is constructed from steel which is zinc plated and polyester powder coated 

as standard in Patagonia Green. Armrests are made from tropical hardwood 

tinted mahogany.



Seats Q50 225 


M3 

M3 Straight Seats with arm rests and Litter Bin 

M3 STRAIGHT SEAT M3 STRAIGHT BENCH 

1800 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 

820 

Also Available with 

Wooden Slats 

533 

480 


Bollards ............................. page 55 



Planters ........................... page 258 



Signage........................... page 306 


n M3 Stainless Steel Seating is a stylish and versatile seating system. Straight and 

curved seats and benches can be designed to any length, any internal radii above 

600mm and in any combination. M3 has been specified in circles, squares and 

sweeping serpentine curves to provide functional points to many 

designers’ schemes. 

n Seats are produced in numerous standard designs, including straight and 

back to back seats, plus inward and outward facing curved seat segments and 

circular seats. 

n Almost endless permutations are possible that can retain the strength, safety and 

vandal resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. 

n Material: Manufactured from 316L grade satin polished stainless steel the system is 

durable and low maintenance. 

n Seating Sections: Seating is also available with Iroko hardwood slats from 


n Options: Arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, surface trim 

plates, and demountable ground socket are also available. A preventative bar is 

available which stops people sitting on the back of the seat backrest. 

n Customisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and armrests. 

Plaques may also be specified. 

STOCK STOCK 

OptiOns 





M3 Straight Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS105 1800 480 n/a 70 Stainless Steel 2000, 2400 or 3000 n n n n n n n 70 n 

M3 Straight Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSB505 1800 450 n/a 52 Stainless Steel 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n n 70 n 

1800 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 

450 

525 

520 

134

135 

M3 Exeter Seat with arm rests 

M3 Back to Back Seat with arm rests, Blackwood, South Wales 

M3 EXETER SEAT 

2400 

Shown with arm rest option 

M3 BACK TO BACK SEAT 

450 

820 820 

OptiOns 





M3 Exeter Seat OLSS249 2400 450 n/a 110 Stainless Steel n n n n n n 

M3 Back to Back Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS145 1800 x 2 480 n/a 140 Stainless Steel 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

M3 Back to Back Seat with Hardwood Slats OLSS146 1800 x 2 480 n/a 90 Treated Hardwood 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

1800 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 


533 

1070 

860 

480 480

M3 Pedestal Seat with arm rests 

M3 Tree Seat and Curved Bench 

M3 PEDESTAL SEAT 

M3 TREE SEAT 

OptiOns 





M3 Pedestal Seat with Steel Slats OLSS441 1600 480 6500* 80 Stainless Steel 1800 n n n n 

M3 Tree Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS421 2250 480 600* 212/280 Stainless Steel 2850 (span) n n n n n n 70 n 

*External radius **Internal diameter 1200/1800 

1600 


480mm 

480 

820mm 

820 

136

137 

M3 Curved Seat, Serpentine Bench, litter bins, tree grille and frame, bollards with white reflective tape, Chichester College 

M3 CURVED SEAT 

820 

535 

480 

OptiOns 


Seat Seat Standard Sub- Demountable Surface Legs 

Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Spigot Wall Ground Trim Diameter Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Mount Mounted Socket Plates (mm) Rests 

M3 Curved Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS401 1885 † /2970 †† 480 900 70/93 Stainless Steel Any Length n n n n n n n 70 or 140 n 

M3 Hockey Stick Seat with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS411 3214 † /4028 †† 480 900 140 Stainless Steel Any Length n n n n n n 70 n 

† Inward †† Outward 

2228 

1414 

2228 

1414 

900R 

900R 

900R 

2228 

1800

M3 Serpentine Bench with armrests 

M3 CURVED BENCH 

525 

450 

2228 

OptiOns 


Seat Seat Standard Sub- Demountable Surface Legs 



M3 Curved Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSB601 2238 450 900 52/69 Stainless Steel Any Length n n n n n n n 70 n 

M3 Serpentine Bench with Stainless Steel Slats OLSS611 3626 450 900 140/186 Stainless Steel Any length n n n n n n 70 n 

M3 Tree Bench OLSB621 2250 450 2836 158/207 Stainless Steel 2850 (span) n n 

1414 

n n n n 70 n 

2228 

1414 

900R 

900R 

138

139 



Seats Q50 225 


Festival 

Festival Straight Seats 

FESTIVAL SEAT 

1800 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 

820 

533 

STOCK 

Also Available with 

Timber Slats 

480 




Planters ........................... page 259 


Signage........................... page 306 


n Festival Steel Seating system is a versatile modular system that meets the 

demands of modern environments and enhances public spaces. Straight and 

curved seats and benches can be designed to any length, any internal radii above 

600mm and in any combination. Festival Seating is popular in educational and 

healthcare establishments, and civic spaces. 

n Seats are produced in numerous standard designs, including straight and 

back to back seats, plus inward and outward facing curved seat segments and 

circular seats. 

n Almost endless permutations are possible that can retain the strength, safety and 

vandal resistant features of the individual straight seats and benches. 

n Material: Mild steel, galvanised and polyester powder coated. 

n Colours: A full standard range of RAL colours is available. 

n Seating Sections: Seating is also available with Iroko hardwood slats from 


n Options: Arm rests can be provided at any position. Freestanding legs, surface 

trim plates, and demountable ground sockets are also available. 

n Customisation: Engraved motifs can be commissioned for endcaps and arm rests. 

Plaques may also be required.

Festival Exeter Seat 

Festival Back to Back Seat 

FESTIVAL EXETER SEAT 

FESTIVAL BACK TO BACK SEAT 

OptiOns 





Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats OLFS101 1800 480 n/a 67 PC In Any RAL Colour 1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000 n n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Exeter Seat OLFS249 2400 450 n/a 210 PC In Any RAL Colour n n n n 

Festival Back to Back Seat with Steel Slats OLFS145 1800 x 2 480 n/a 156 PC In Any RAL Colour 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Back to Back Seat with Hardwood Slats OLFS146 1800 x 2 480 n/a 82 PC In Any RAL Colour 2000 or 2400 n n n n n n 70 n 

1800 

Surface Mount 

2400 

Ground Fix 

450 

820 820 

533 

1070 

860 

480 480 

140

141 

Festival Curved Seat, Cambridge 

FESTIVAL CURVED SEAT 

820 

535 

900 R 

480 

2970 

120º 

1885 

900R 

OptiOns 





Festival Curved Seat with Steel Slats OLFS401 1885 † /2970 †† 480 900 78/103 PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length n n n n n n n 70 or 140 n 

Festival Hockey Stick Seat with Steel Slats OLFS411 3214 † /4028 †† 480 900 156 PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Pedestal Seat with Steel Slats OLFS441 1600 480 6500 78 PC In Any RAL Colour n n n n 


2228 

1414 

2228 

1414 

900R 

900R 

2228 

1800

Festival Curved Bench, Queen Elizabeth School 

FESTIVAL CURVED BENCH 

OptiOns 





Festival Curved Bench with Steel Slats OLFB601 2238 † /1414 †† 450 900 61/84 PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length n n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Serpentine Bench with Steel Slats OLFB611 3626 450 900 122/168 PC In Any RAL Colour Any Length n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Tree Bench OLFB621 2250 450 2850 188/252 PC In Any RAL Colour 2850 (span) n n n n n n 70 n 


525 

450 

900 R 

2985 

120º 

1885 

2238 

90º 

1414 

900 R 

142

143 

Festival Straight Bench and Flared Top Litter Bin 

Festival Tree Seat and Curved Seat 

FESTIVAL STRAIGHT BENCH 

1800 

Surface Mount 

FESTIVAL TREE SEAT 

Ground Fix 

OptiOns 


Seat Seat Standard Sub- Demountable Surface Leg Arm 

Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Optional Free Surface Surface Ground Wall Ground Trim Diameter Rests 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Mount Fixed Mounted Socket Plates (mm) 

Festival Straight Bench with Steel Slats OLFB501 1500 450 n/a 52 PC In Any RAL Colour 1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000 n n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Straight Bench with Hardwood Slats OLFB502 1500 450 n/a 36 Iroko Hardwood 1800, 2000, 2400 or 3000 n n n n n n n 70 n 

Festival Tree Seat with Steel Slats OLFS421 2250 480 2850 253/310 PC In Any RAL Colour 2850 (span) n n n n n n 70 n 

2850 

or 2250 

1200 

or 1800 

450 

525 

520 

STOCK 

450



Seats Q50 225 


Delta Festival 

Delta Festival Seat 

DELTA FESTIVAL SEAT DELTA FESTIVAL BENCH 

1960 

1800 

520 

480 

820 

Bollards ............................. page 50 



Planters ........................... page 259 

Seat Seat Standard Optional Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Radius Weight Standard Length Surface Sub-Surface Ground Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish (mm) Mount Mount Fixed Rests 

Delta Festival Straight Seat with Steel Slats OLDS101 1800 480 n/a 78 PC In Any RAL Colour 1500 n n n n 

Delta Festival Straight Bench with Steel Slats OLDB501 1800 480 n/a 63 PC In Any RAL Colour 1500 n n n n 

1960 

1800 



Signage........................... page 306 


n Delta Festival uses the contemporary design of the Festival Range, but mounted 

on aluminium end castings with integral armrests. 

n Standard seating and bench sizes are 1660mm and 1960mm. 

n Seats and benches are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then 

powder coated in a colour of your choice. 

n Seating sections are available in hot dip galvanised polyester powder coated steel 

or Iroko hardwood which is from renewable sources. 

n The Delta Festival Seat and Bench are also available with timber slats. 

525 

450 

620 

144

145 



Seats Q50 225 


Buffalo 

Buffalo Seat, Durham 

n Strong yet comfortable, Buffalo Seating is manufactured in mild steel, hot dip 

galvanised and coated in up to two colours of your choice. Slats are steel or Iroko 

hardwood, the latter from renewable resources. 

n Coordinating litter bins are available. 

BUFFALO SEAT 

1960 

1047 

476 

475 




BUFFALO BENCH WITH N SHAPE ENDS 

BUFFALO BENCH WITH U SHAPE ENDS 


Signage........................... page 306 

OptiOns 

Seat Seat Finish Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Hardwood Surface Sub-Surface Ground Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Slats Mount Mount Fixed Rests 

Buffalo Seat with Steel Slats OLBS105 1800 475 90 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n n 

Buffalo ‘U’ Bench with Steel Slats OLBS405 1800 475 65 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n 

Buffalo ‘N’ Bench with Steel Slats OLBS415 1800 475 65 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n 

1960 

1800 

1960 

475 

476 

476 

668 

475



Seats Q50 225 


Metropolitan 

Metropolitan Seat with steel section 

METROPOLITAN SEAT WITH WOODEN SLATS 


METROPOLITAN SEAT WITH STEEL SECTION 

Also available in stainless steel 


Product Span Height Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground 

Description (mm) (mm) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed 

Metropolitan Seat with Wooden Slats 1800 440 PC Steel/Hardwood n n n 

Metropolitan Seat with Steel Section 1800 440 PC Steel n n n 

146

147 



Seats Q50 225 


Bleasdale 

BLEASDALE SEAT 

440 

2974mm length shown 

EDINBURGH SEAT 

670 

440 

1850 

1755 

670 

470 

470 

950 

950 

BLEASDALE FACETED BENCH 

FERGHANA SEAT 



Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Optional Surface Sub- 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Mount Surface 

Bleasdale Seat OLES103 1850 440 60 PC Any RAL Colour 2270 or 2948 n n 

Bleasdale Faceted Bench OLEB431 Any 435 n/a PC Any RAL Colour n/a n n 

Edinburgh Seat OLES313 1755 440 75 PC Any RAL Colour 2130 n n 

Ferghana Seat OLES503 1850 440 70 PC Any RAL Colour 2270 n n 

670 

440 

1850 

470 

920 

435



Seats Q50 225 


Celebration 

CELEBRATION BENCH 

CELEBRATION CHAISE LONGUE 

950 

2140 or 1650 

1200 

or 750 

2080 

500 

440 

440 

CELEBRATION SEAT 

CELEBRATION LOVE SEAT 



Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Optional Surface Sub- 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Mount Surface 

Celebration Bench OLEB121 1650 (ext dia.) 440 35 PC Any RAL Colour 2140 (ext dia.) n n 

Celebration Seat OLWS303/OLES303 1715 485/440 75 PC White/PC Any RAL Colour 2130 n n 

Celebration Chaise Longue Seat OLES737 2080 440 60 PC White/PC Any RAL Colour n/a n n 

Celebration Love Seat OLES701 1380 440 50 PC White/PC Any RAL Colour n/a n n 

670 

776 

594 

440 

1715 

40 

Typ 

Frame 

1380 1060 

470 

950 

440 

148

149 



Seats Q50 225 


Outdoor Living Rooms: Garden City 

Garden City, Cheshire 

GARDEN CITY 3 PLACE SEAT 

1770 670 

420 

900 



GARDEN CITY 2 PLACE SEAT 

1220 670 

420 

900

GARDEN CITY CHAIR 

GARDEN CITY LOW TABLE 

660 

670 670 

420 

660 

900 

370 

GARDEN CITY LOUNGER 

GARDEN CITY FOOT STOOL 

435 500 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Free Surface Ground Fixing Numbers 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Fixed Type Required 

Garden City 3Pc Seat 12.0230 1770 420 69 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 4 

Garden City 2Pc Seat 12.0220 1220 420 54 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 4 

Garden City Chair 12.0210 670 420 39 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 4 

Garden City Lounger 12.0260 670 300 56 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 5 

Garden City Low Table 12.0240 660 370 22 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 4 

Garden City Foot Stool 12.0250 500 345 14 PC Patagonia Green n n n T or DT 4 

300 

1450 

670 

345 

850 

150

151 



Seats Q50 225 


Rondinox and Bercy 

Rondinox Seat 

850 

RONDINOX SEAT 

440 

1800 

1800 


Bollards ........................ page 52/57 



n Rondinox: The simple design and clean lines of the Rondinox seating provide a 

light and contemporary aesthetic. 

n Constructed from Grade 304 polished stainless steel. 

n The bend of the seating legs forms an integral armrest, guaranteeing maximum 

solidity and excellent comfort. 

n The seat and bench are constructed using a combination of flat and round 

elements (45mm diameter tube and 8mm diameter welded rods for the legs). 

RONDINOX BENCH 


Product Product Span Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground Fixing Number 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Section Ends/Frames Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed Type Required 

Rondinox Seat 130165 1800 440 80 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel n n T or DT 4 

Rondinox Bench 130165B 1800 440 50 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel n n T or DT 4 

590 

440 

1800

Bercy Seat, Bercy Bench and City Litter Bin 

BERCY SEAT 

2135 

820 

635 

415 

BERCY SEAT COMPOSITE 

BERCY BENCH 

2135 545 


Product Product Span Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Free Surface Ground Fixing Number 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Section Ends/Frames Finish Standing Mount Fixed Type Required 

Bercy Seat Composite 13.0162CO 2135 415 83 Treated Hardwood Steel PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

Bercy Seat 13.0162 2135 415 51 Steel Steel PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

Bercy Bench 13.0162B 2135 415 83 Steel Steel PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

2135 

820 

575 

635 

415 

415 

152

153 



Seats Q50 225 


Citadelle and Orsay 

Citadelle Bench 

CITADELLE SEAT 

2000 600 

740 

430 

CITADELLE BENCH 


Bollards ............................. page 52 






n Seats and backrests are constructed from 8mm diameter rods, welded to flat 

intermediate supports, fitted within semi-oval side sections and lateral laser cut 

end sections. This assembly method gives the furniture maximum solidity. 

n Seats, backrests and legs are cleaned, shot blasted and then coated with a base 

layer of epoxy powder and finished with a polyester powder paint. 

n Colours: A full range of standard RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) 

colours are available. 

n Fixing: For fixing details please refer to page 399. 

2000 455 


Product Product Span Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Free Surface Ground Fixing Numbers 


Citadelle Seat 13.0005 2000 430 70 Steel Cast Iron PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 2 

Citadelle Bench 13.0005B 2000 430 40 Steel Cast Iron PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 2 

430

Orsay Seat 

ORSAY SEAT 

2000 

790 

655 

430 

CITY BENCH WALL TOP FIXING 

ORSAY BENCH 

2000 415 

2000 455 




Orsay Seat 13.0172 2000 430 76 Steel Steel PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

Orsay Bench 13.0172B 2000 430 60 Steel Steel PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

City Bench Wall Top Fixing 13.0162BM 2000 n/a 32.5 Steel n/a PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n T or DT 4 

430 

102 

154

155 



Seats Q50 225 


Jazz and Rendezvous City 

Jazz Seat 

JAZZ 3 PLACE SEAT 

454 

573 

1810 


Product Product Span Height Weight Seating Seating Standard Free Surface Ground Fixing Numbers 


Jazz 3 Place Seat 10.3030 1810 454 74 Steel Steel 

Jazz Bench 10.3060 1810 454 74 Steel Steel 

813 

JAZZ BENCH 

330 


Bollards ............................. page 52 



1813 




Jazz 

n A seat and bench with a light and vibrant, modern aesthetic. 

n Seats, backrests and legs are constructed steel sections which are cleaned, shot 

blasted and then coated with a base layer of epoxy powder and finished with a 

polyester powder paint. 




Rendezvous City: 

n Features contemporary designs with modern clean lines in steel. City seats and 

benches offer functionality, solidity and durability with maximum style. 

n Seats and backrests are constructed from steel sections which are cleaned, shot 

blasted and then coated with a base layer of epoxy powder and finished with a 

polyester powder paint. 

n Legs are manufactured from either steel which is treated as above or from cast 

iron which is treated against rust and polyester powder coated. 




454

Rendezvous City Seat and Bench 

RENDEZVOUS CITY SEAT 

420 

645 

1800 

790 

RENDEZVOUS CITY CURVED BENCH 

RENDEZVOUS CITY BENCH 




Rendezvous City Seat 13.0200 1800 420 100 Steel Cast Iron PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

Rendezvous City Bench 13.0205 1800 420 51 Steel Cast Iron PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

Rendezvous City Curved Bench 13.0205C 1484 420 51 Steel Cast Iron PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n n T or DT 4 

R1535 

440 

R1100 

1484 

1120 

1800 

438 

420 

156

157 



Seats Q50 225 


Urban 

Trio Seat, Stainless Steel, Sunderland 

Trio Seat, Steel Green, Sunderland 


Bollards ........................ page 52/57 

Litter Bins ......................... page195 


n The Urban range has been designed as a full system for the enhancement of 

highly urbanised spaces and transport systems. It is composed exclusively of 

individual seats that can be used independently or as a system. 

n Seating is available in either steel or stainless steel. Steel furniture is zinc-plated 

and powder coated to a high quality finish and is available in a range of RAL (high 

gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours. Stainless steel furniture is made from high 

quality 316L grade stainless steel and is shot peened to give a smooth matt finish. 

n Seats can include end and/or intermediate armrests. 

n A four or five seat configuration is also available. 

n Solo seating can be supplied with either a wall or wall top fixing. 

n Supplied with base plate or ground fixing with a standard root depth of 390mm. 

n Armrests can be supplied on request.

Solo Seat, Steel Green, Sunderland 

DUO SEAT 

TRIO SEAT 

Also Available in Steel 

SOLO SEAT 

Also Available in Steel Also Available in Steel 

1100 570 

768 

472 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall Arm 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Mount Fixed Mounted Rests 

Trio Seat 12.0183 1700 472 46 PC Steel/Stainless Steel n n n 

Duo Seat 12.0187 1100 472 55 PC Steel/Stainless Steel n n n 

Solo Seat 12.0180 500 472 19 PC Steel/Stainless Steel n n n n 

500 

1700 570 

768 

570 

768 

472 

472 

158

159 

n Sineu Graff Mini and Urban ranges are ideal for seating solutions within transport 

systems such as bus or train stations and can be used in a number of different 

configurations. 

n The Sineu Graff Mini range comprises Mini Solo, Mini Duo and Mini High seats. 

Each seat features a unique curved seating section which provides maximum 

comfort to users. 

n Urban features Solo and Trio seats which can be used to create effective seating 

arrangements within your landscape. Urban also features a single and double 

stand up seat with optional backrests. 

n Both Mini and Urban pieces are manufactured from zinc plated and polyester 

powder coated steel and are available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt 

textured) colours. 

MINI SOLO SEAT 

421 

475 

420 

545 

MINI HIGH SEAT 

MINI DUO SEAT 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Supplied Surface Ground Wall 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Assembled Mount Fixed Mounted 

High Mini Seat 12.0111 420 750 23 PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour 

Mini Solo Seat 12.0101 420 421 15 PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour n n 

Mini Duo Seat 12.0102 1020 421 42 PC RAL Any Standard or Sable Colour n n 

421 

435 

750 

475 420 

1100 

870 

465

URBAN SOLO SEAT 

STAND UP SEAT (SINGLE) WITH BACKREST 

1000 

500 

421 

435 

740 

290 

357 

357 

500 

965 

URBAN TRIO SEAT 

STAND UP SEAT (DOUBLE) WITH BACKREST 


Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Mount Fixed Mounted 

500 

Urban Solo Seat 12.0121 500 421 15 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n 

Urban Trio Seat 12.0123 1700 421 57 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n 

Stand Up Seat (Single) 12.3101 500 740 15 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n 

Stand Up Seat Back Rest (Single) 12.3001 500 n/a 10 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n 

Stand Up Seat (Double) 12.3102 1000 740 28 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n n 

Stand Up Seat Back Rest (Double) 12.3002 1000 n/a 19 PC Any Standard RAL or Sable Colour n 

421 

435 

740 

1000 

290 

1700 

1000 

357 

357 

465 

905 

160

161 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SEAT18 Seats Q50 225 

Benches Q50 220 

Polyurethane Seating 

Bespoke seating, Post and Tension wire system and WaterSide Bin, Torbay 

Ferrocast polyurethane is the ideal material for use in seating, both for end frames 

which can be combined with other materials and for whole seating sections. 

Extremely durable Ferrocast is resistant to saline and uric acid and will not rust or 

corrode. The polyurethane is coloured with a pigment that matches the final paint 

colour and therefore any chips or abrasions will not be apparent. 

Ferrocast has proven to be an extremely versatile material and this is making it 

popular for designers and architects wishing to commission bespoke pieces of 

street furniture. It is possible to commission seating with the minimum of capital 

investment due to Marshalls low cost tooling system. Seats and co-ordinating items 

can be made to your design and specifications or produced to your brief by our 

in-house designers. Marshalls offer a full technical advice and design service to take 

creative concepts through to execution. 


Bespoke seating commissioned by Burnes and Nice, for Gallowtree Gate, Leicester





WaterSide 

WaterSide Bench 

WATERSIDE SEAT 

540 

396 

1800 

875 


Bollards ............................. page 68 



Signage & Lamp Columns.. page 310 



n The WaterSide range is based around a unique elliptical form to complement 

the Llanelli post and rail system. This results in a highly contemporary and 

functional design. The standard range is silver but is available in other colours. 

The slats are available in silver or black, other colours or timber are available as 

a special request. 

n Frames are cast from Ferrocast® polyurethane which is corrosion and abrasion 

resistant. This makes Ferrocast seating particularly suited to coastal and 

riverside areas. 

n Seat and bench slats are made from Wood Fibre Composite (WPC) comprising 

50% sawdust from waste wood and 50% recycled polymer. WPC is longer lasting 

than wood as it resists moisture and chemicals, does not absorb bacteria or 

fungi and is impervious to pests. WPC is coloured throughout, it does not need 

paint, sealants or preservatives and its protective finish is resistant to most paints 

and inks. 

WATERSIDE BENCH 

540 

500 1900 

396 1800 

OptiOns 

Seat Seat Optional Slats Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Seat Span Timber Composite Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Fixed 

WaterSide Seat SE3500 2000 540 40 Black 9017 3000, 4000, 5000 or 6000 n n n 

WaterSide Bench BE4000 2000 540 50 Black 9017 3000, 4000, 5000 or 6000 n n n 

162

163 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Leicester Seating 

LEICESTER SEAT LEICESTER BENCH 

460 

2000 


Seats Q50 225 

897 


Bollards ............................. page 68 








n The Leicester Seat and Bench were specially designed for a project between 

Marshalls Street Furniture and Leicester City Council in 2001. Our design 

team worked closely with Leicester City Council to create seating that could 

be specified in different configurations. The results were a seat and bench 

manufactured entirely from Ferrocast which had a robust design to cope with 

the demands of busy city centre life. 

n Seating is manufactured by casting Ferrocast, an engineering grade 

polyurethane, around a steel core giving it excellent rigidity and strength. 

n Components are then painted with a high gloss paint which chemically 

bonds itself to the Ferrocast creating a quality finish. In the event of damage 

to the paint, Ferrocast is pigmented in a matching colour to ensure the overall 

aesthetic is not dramatically affected. 

n Fixing: Ground fixing comes as standard. 

n Colours: A full range of RAL colours is available. 


Product Product Span Height Standard Supplied Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixed 

Leicester Seat 2000 460 Black 9017 n n 

Leicester Bench 2000 460 Black 9017 n n 

460 

300 

800 

2000

Parkway Seat 

PARKWAY SEAT 

2000 635 

1931 

450 

974 

URBAN BENCH 

440 

1800 450 

OptiOns 

Seat Seat Optional Slats Fixing Method 

Product Product Span Height Weight Standard Seat Span Timber Composite Free Surface Ground 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Length (mm) Standing Mount Fixed 

Parkway Seat 2000 450 Black 9017/Hardwood Slats n/a n n 

Urban Bench 1800 440 Black 9017 n n 

164

165 





Victoria 

Victoria Seat 

VICTORIA SEAT 

50 

1805 675 

960 

440 

VICTORIA CHAIR 


Bollards ............................. page 86 


615 675 

Planters ........................... page 248 

n Victoria Seating features a classically styled seat and chair that are constructed 

from sustainably sourced tropical hardwood which is treated with a solvent-free, 

natural coloured protective treatment. 

n The seating sections comprise hardwood slats secured onto seat ends featuring a 

strengthening crossbar. 

n Assembly of the ends and backs utilises bonded mortise and tenon joints with 

concealed star-shaped rivets. 

n Supplied fully assembled. 



Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kgs) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixing Type Required 

Victoria Seat 10.0802 1805 440 40 Treated Hardwood n n n n P or DE 4 

Victoria Chair 10.0804 615 440 20 Treated Hardwood n n n n P or DE 4 

960 

440





Rustic 

Romarin Bench, Harbour Reach, Poole 

LAVANDE BENCH ROMARIN BENCH 

2000 

400 

410 


Bollards ............................. page 86 


Planters ........................... page 248 

n The Rustic range is constructed from solid pressure-sealed, sustainably-sourced 

softwood, Class 3 (CTB+). 

n The wood is treated for protection against the ingress of water, insect and fungus, 

and has a slight green tinge. 

n The Lavande features full length through-bolts with bolt heads concealed by 

spot facing. 

n The Romarin features brace mounting over stacked and bonded wood sections. 

n Solidity of construction is a feature of both products. 

n Supplied fully assembled. 



Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kgs) Finish Assembled Standing Mount Fixing Type Required 

Lavande Bench 11.0401 2000 410 38 Treated Softwood n n n n P or DE 2 

Romarin Bench 11.0400 2000 415 80 Treated Softwood n n n n P or DE 2 

2000 

400 

415 

166

167 



Seats Q50 225 


Recycled Plastic Composite Seating 

Intruplas 

The ideal product from which to manufacture street furniture, created from 

waste plastic material, recycled plastic composite (RPC) is an excellent alternative to 

wood, metal and concrete. It can be tailored to suit the application and location of 

the finished product, contrasting with or blending into the environment as required. 

RPC is maintenance free, it is non-porous and therefore not subject to rot, algae or 

fungal growth, as such it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. Also as it 

is manufactured using an extrusion process, it is free from cracking and splintering, 

improving safety in public areas. 

Due to high strength and robust construction, RPC furniture is vandal resistant to 

physical attack. It has an easy wipe clean surface and paint and marker pen can 

easily be removed with thinners without damaging the product. 

RPC furniture has an extended product lifetime. As plastic is less susceptible to 

degradation over time, the whole life cost of the furniture can be a third of the cost 

of a traditional solution. 

All products are supplied fully assembled and ready to use. 

Recycled plastic composite: 

n Reduces the need for landfill waste or potential pollution from incineration. 

n Reduces CO2 output – recycled plastic creates less carbon dioxide in 

manufacture than virgin plastic. Replacing timber also means fewer trees need 

to be felled and transported. 

n Can be recycled again at the end of its useful life. 

INTRUPLAS SEAT INTRUPLAS BENCH 


Bollards ............................. page 85 

Planters ........................... page 262 


n Creates zero waste from the manufacturing process as all off-cuts can 

be recycled. 

n Does not require the use of surface treatments such as paint, preservation 

products or cleaning materials. 

n Is made from material from which the official figures state that for every ton 

of recycled plastic used 1.66 tons of CO output is saved. 

2 

Fixing Method 

Product Length Width Overall Height Overall Width Seat Height Weight Free Ground 

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Standing Fixing 

1.8m Length Deluxe Seat with Backrest 1800 360 900 600 510 105 n n 

1.5m Length Standard Seat with Backrest 1500 360 900 600 510 93 n n 

1.8m Length Deluxe Bench 1800 350 480 350 480 60.5 n n 

1.5m Length Standard Bench 1500 350 480 350 480 54 n n



Seats Q50 225 



Bollards ............................. page 85 

Planters ........................... page 262 

Recycled Plastic Composite Picnic Table 

Intruplas 

Recycled Plastic Picnic Tables 

n Recycled plastic composite (RPC) is an ideal material for the manufacture of 

picnic tables. Totally weather resistant they will not rot or splinter. They do not 

absorb moisture and can be easily wiped clean, making them ideal for use 

outdoors all year round. 

n The Intruplas RPC Picnic Table is available in 3 lengths: 1m, 1.5m and 1.8m. 

n Picnic tables with extended tops are also available to enable wheelchair access, 

or alternatively a seating section can be removed. 

INTRUPLAS PICNIC TABLE 


Table Top Fixing Method 

Product Length Width Overall Height Overall Width Seat Height Weight 

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Free Standing 

1.8m Length Deluxe Picnic Table 1800 650 760 1370 450 133 n 

1.5m Length Standard Picnic Table 1500 520 700 1000 400 130 n 

1.0m Length Junior Picnic Table 1000 520 700 1000 400 77 n 

168

169 



Seats Q50 225 


Picnic Tables 

Ollerton 

FESTIVAL TABLE 

GULLIVER TABLE 

1800 

750 

700 

M3 TABLE 

Shown with Festival Straight Bench Shown with M3 Straight Bench 

1500 

1800 

plan view 

450 

LILLIPUT TABLE 


Bollards ............................. page 50 



Planters ........................... page 259 


Signage........................... page 306 


OptiOns 

Fixing Method 

Product Product Length Width Height Weight Standard Free Surface Sub-Surface Ground Hardwood Solid Wheel Chair 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Mount Fix Slats Top Access 

M3 Table OLSB711 1800 700 750 80 Stainless Steel n n n n n n n 

Festival Table OLFB711 1800 700 750 69 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n 

Lilliput Picnic Set OLFB701 1260 720 600 55 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n n 

Gulliver Picnic Set OLFB702 1800 700 750 170 PC in Any RAL Colour n n n n n n 

*NB Tables can be extended to allow for wheelchair access 

700 

750 

1260 

plan view 

1800 

720 

350 

750 

700 

700 

600



Seats Q50 225 


Picnic Tables 

Sineu Graff 

n Picnic tables are ideal for providing eating areas for almost any public space 

including parks and schools. Sineu Graff offer both steel and timber solutions in 

the form of Rendezvous City, Aubade and Champetre. 

n Rendezvous City Table can be combined with the Rendezvous City bench to 

create a stylish picnic table. It is manufactured from zinc plated and polyester 

powder coated steel and is available in any RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt 

textured) colour. 

n Aubade and Champetre Picnic Tables offer a softer, more natural aesthetic 

making them highly suited from green areas such as parks. Both are 

manufactured from pressure treated softwood from sustainable sources. 

AUBADE PICNIC TABLE 

850 

1900 

410 

RENDEZVOUS CITY TABLE 

CHAMPETRE PICNIC TABLE 


Bollards ............................. page 86 


850 

1700 

Planters ........................... page 248 

OptiOns 

Seat Span/ Fixing Method 

Product Product Table Length Seat Height Weight Standard Free Surface Sub-Surface Fixing Number 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Mount Type Required 

Rendezvous City Table 13.0425 1775 718 62 PC and RAL or Sable Colour T 8 

Aubade Picnic Bench 11.0420 2000 410 270 Treated Softwood n n n P or DE 4 

Champetre Picnic Bench 11.0421 2000 410 165 Treated Softwood n n n P or DE 4 

Champetre Extended Picnic Bench 11.0421H 2670 410 190 Treated Softwood n n n P or DE 4 

718 

928 1775 

450 

725 

170

171


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Litter Bins 

Concrete Litter Bins 173 

Monoscape: Boulevard and Strada 174 

Bellitalia: Concrete, Polished Reconstituted Marble and Concrete with Metals 175 

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins 179 



Ollerton: Albion 183 

Ollerton: Buffalo 191 

Ollerton: Specials 192 

Ollerton: Cigarette Bins 193 

Sineu Graff: Diamond Point 195 

Sineu Graff: Contemporary 197 

Sineu Graff: City 199 

Sineu Graff: Others 200 

Timber Litter Bins 201 

Sineu Graff: Timber 202 

Sineu Graff: Classic 203 

Polyurethane Litter Bins 205 

Ferrocast®: Heritage and Leicester 205 

Ferrocast®: WaterSide 206 

Cast Iron Litter bins 207 

Imperial: Heritage 207 

Plastic Litter bins 208 

Heritage 209 

Metro 210 

Pioneer, Monarch and Consort 211 

Twin Bin 212 

Octaplus 213 

Regent 214 

Novelty 215 

Envirobank 216 

‹ Sineu Graff, Contemporary Litter Bin, Round 

172

173 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Concrete Litter Bins 

Bellitalia Citta Square Concrete Litter Bin, Welsh Development Agency 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer concrete litter bins that will meet the demands of any 

project and budget. Monoscape contains simple, functional pieces whilst Bellitalia 

features design led litter bins that use concrete which is enhanced by metals or a 

lustrous polished finish. 

Monoscape Litter Bins comprise Boulevard and Strada. Both are utilitarian in design, 

making them functional and durable. Each litter bin is manufactured from high 

quality concrete and is available in exposed and etched finishes. Monoscape Litter 

Bins can be supplied with polyethylene rain shields and a choice of internal liners. 

Bellitalia offer a unique range of concrete litter bins. The range comprises concrete 

litter bins embellished with copper, concrete combined with steel or stainless steel 

and polished reconstituted marble. Each design is unique and offers architects and 

specifiers a fantastic choice of styles to suit any landscape. 

Concrete litter bins are manufactured from high quality pozzolanic cement 

which is vibrated and sandblasted before being coated with a clear acrylic resin. 

Copper bands are added to increase aesthetic appeal. Some models incorporate 

a self levelling system which allows them to be placed on various gradients. 

Polished reconstituted marble litter bins are manufactured using a marble aggregate 

mixed with Portland cement. The product is then mechanically polished before 

being coated with a protective varnish. This gives the product a smooth, elegant 

polished finish. Polished reconstituted marble litter bins are available in seven 

fantastic colours. Due to natural marble aggregates being used the litter bins will not 

fade and will retain their colour. Each litter bin is equipped with a bin liner holder 

which is incorporated into the rim. 

Concrete mounted designs with steel and stainless steel consist of a concrete base 

made from high quality pozzolanic cement and a litter bin which is manufactured 

from either polyester powder coated steel or AISI 316 grade stainless steel. Post 

mounted designs consist of a litter bin manufactured from polyester powder coated 

steel or AISI 316 stainless steel which is mounted to either a nodular cast iron or 

stainless steel post. 

Bellitalia Litter Bins come with a range of options including hoods and ashtrays, 

for full details please refer to individual product pages.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN01 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ............................. page 34 

Seating ............................ page 90 


Boulevard and Strada 

Boulevard Litter Bin 

BOULEVARD LITTER BIN STRADA LITTER BIN 

1000 

500 



Planters ........................... page 232 

n Boulevard: A simple and durable litter bin which can meet the demands of 

today’s urban environments. It is available as an open top bin, as shown on the 

left, or with a rain shield, as shown bottom left. 

n Strada: A stylish range of concrete street furniture featuring clean lines and 

simple geometric shapes. 

n Finish: Available as standard in an exposed silver grey concrete finish but can 

be supplied in alternative colours and finishes as special order items. For more 

details on colours please consult the colour swatches for concrete on page 383. 

Available in brushed and etched standard finishes. 

n Options: Litter bins come with a range of options, please refer to the table below 

for details. 

n Polyethylene components for litter bins are available ex stock in yellow and 

brown with other BS colours to order. 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions Fixing Method 

Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Surface Open Rain Galvanised Wire Metal Polyethylene 

Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Mount Top Shield Steel Liner Basket Liner 

Boulevard 700 Circular FP280 43 1000 x 500Ø 1000 182 Exposed Silver Grey Concrete n n n n n n 

Strada F395 65 750 x 500Ø 750 165 Exposed Siver Grey Concrete n n n n n 

750 

500Ø 

174

175 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Concrete, Polished Reconstituted Marble and Concrete with Metals 

Sorrento Litter Bin, Poole Harbour, Dorset 

SORRENTO LITTER BIN 

COPPER TOP LITTER BIN 

625Ø 

625Ø 


LTBN02 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ............................. page 37 

Seating ............................. page 96 


805 

1162 

Dimensions 

Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard 

Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish 

Planters ........................... page 235 


n Copper Top and Sorrento Litter Bins feature a self levelling system that allows 

them to be installed on gradients of up to 5% from horizontal. They are 

embellished with a copper band. 

n Bins are manufactured from a precast steel reinforced concrete which is vibrated 

and sandblasted to give a smooth finish, before finally being coated with a 

protective clear acrylic resin. 

n Sorrento: Consists of two sections which are clamped together. It also comes 

with the option of a polyester powder coated hood. In addition the hooded 

model can also include a 175mm copper ashtray. 

n Copper Top: Consists of two parts, a cap shaped base and a lower body section. 

The galvanised steel liner comes with a handle for easy removal. It is finished off 

with a stylish copper top which is reinforced with 5mm steel sheets complete 

with locking system. 

n Citta Square: Incorporates a main body section which is designed to hold a steel 

liner. It consists of a support base, two half moon shaped columns and a dome 

lid which is anchored to the assembly using steel brackets and bolts. The base 

of the lid is surrounded by an attractive copper band. 

SORRENTO LITTER BIN WITH HOOD 

CITTA SQUARE LITTER BIN 

Sorrento BIAR45332 70 805 x 625Ø 717 210 Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band 

Sorrento with Hood BIAR45343 70 1115 x 625Ø 1115 281 Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band 

Copper Top BIAR45301 36 1162 x 625Ø 1162 281 Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band 

Citta Square BIAR44003 105 1080 x 630 x 580 1080 335 Clear Acrylic Resin/Copper Band 

1080 

1115 

580 

625Ø 

630 560

Pegaso Litterbin in Rosso, Cheshire 

ORIONE TOP LITTER BIN 

PEGASO LITTER BIN 

520Ø 

640Ø 

815 

900 

n Orione and Pegaso are two exquisitely styled reconstituted marble litter bins. 

Made from high quality cement with marble aggregate, they are polished to a 

smooth finish and coated with a two-component epoxy resin to give a beautiful 

polished aesthetic. 

n Both bins come equipped with a bin liner holder and the rim features a 40mm 

brass plate. 

n The litter bins are also available with stainless steel covers which tilt to open for 

easy access. The lid is manufactured from AISI 316 grade stainless steel. 

n Orione and Pegaso are available in seven different colours. 

Polished Concrete Colours 




Nero Porfido 

ORIONE LITTER BIN WITH COVER 

PEGASO LITTER BIN WITH COVER 

Dimensions 



520Ø 520Ø 

Orione BIAL3610 60 815 x 520Ø 815 242 Polished Concrete 

Orione with Cover BIAL3611 60 1051 x 520Ø 1051 248 Polished Concrete 

Pegaso BIAL3612 104 900 x 640Ø 900 374 Polished Concrete 

Pegaso with Cover BIAL3613 104 1200 x 640Ø 1200 383 Polished Concrete 

1051 

1200 

640Ø 640Ø 

176

177 

Artu Steel/Concrete Litter Bin 

ARTU STEEL/CONCRETE LITTER BIN 

550Ø 

1115 

n Artu is a tasteful cylindrical litter bin which combines concrete with steel or 

stainless steel. 

n The base of Artu is manufactured from steel reinforced precast concrete which is 

vibrated and sandblasted to give a smooth finish. This is then given a protective 

clear acrylic resin coating. Artu has a hot dip galvanised liner which is accessed by 

rotating the hood. 

n The hood also features a 175mm copper ashtray which is linked to the main 

assembly with a chain. 

n Artu Stainless Steel has a body, hood, liner and ashtray manufactured from high 

quality AISI 316 grade stainless steel. 

n The steel offering is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is 

coloured to RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. 

n Artu features a patented self levelling system which allows the litter bin to be 

positioned on slopes of up to 6.5% from horizontal. 

ARTU STAINLESS STEEL/CONCRETE LITTER BIN 

Dimensions 



Artu Steel/Concrete BIAR38648 66 1115 x 550Ø 1115 112 Clear Acrylic Resin/Powder Coated Steel 

Artu Stainless Steel/Concrete BIAR38645 66 1115 x 550Ø 1115 112 Clear Acrylic Resin/Stainless Steel 

550Ø 

1115

Merlino Post Mounted Stainless Steel Litter Bin 

n Merlino is a basket shaped litter bin which is mounted to a nodular cast iron post. 

n Merlino is simple in design and ideal for providing litter solutions to parks and 

grassy areas. 

n The main body of the steel litter bin is manufactured from hot dip galvanised 

steel which is then powder coated in RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. 

n The steel liner is made from 1mm thick, hot dip galvanised steel which is given a 

copper coloured polyurethane glaze. 

n The cast iron mounting post for the steel liner bin is coated with a polyurethane 

glaze in RAL 7021 Basalt Grey. 

n The post features a rounded tang at the base which has two grooves for fixing 

directly into the ground. 

n The stainless steel Merlino Litter Bin consists of a AISI 316 grade basket, the base 

of which is formed by a 5mm thick hot dip galvanised steel disc. The basket is 

equipped with two fastening points to facilitate anchoring to the upright. 

n The liner is made from 1mm thick stainless steel in AISI 316 grade. 

n The stainless steel supporting post is also AISI 316 grade. 

MERLINO POST MOUNTED STEEL LITTER BIN MERLINO POST MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL LITTER BIN 

915 

385Ø 

Dimensions 



Merlino Post Mounted Steel BIAR38641 32 1165 x 385Ø 915 15.3 Powder Coated Steel 

Merlino Post Mounted Stainless Steel BIAR38646 32 1165 x 385Ø 915 15.3 316 Grade Stainless Steel 

915 

385Ø 

178

179 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel and Stainless Steel Litter Bins 

M3 Flared Top Litter Bin with hinged side aperture lid, Durham 

Litter bins are an essential piece of street furniture in almost all of today’s 

landscapes; Marshalls Street Furniture offer a number of designs manufactured from 

steel and stainless steel. We offer a wide selection of litter bins from both Ollerton 

and Sineu Graff. 

Within Ollerton there are four offerings, M3, Festival, Buffalo and Special Litter Bins. 

M3 is a range of 316L stainless steel litter bins which range in size from 40-110 litres 

and is available with a number of options. All litter bins are supplied with a stainless 

steel liner as standard and feature a beautiful brushed satin finish. 

Festival and Buffalo are ranges of polyester powder coated steel litter bins which are 

available in a number of styles and sizes. Litter bins can be coated in a colour of your 

choice and come with a galvanised steel liner as standard. Festival liners may also be 


We also offer a range of special litter bins including a dog litter bin and cigarette end 

collector bollard. Each of these has been designed to provide a solution for specialist 

waste collection. 

Sineu Graff Litter Bins comprise Diamond Point, Contemporary, City, Tulip and 

Conical. Diamond Point features a range of steel and stainless steel litter bins with a 

unique detailing. The range comes in four basic shapes: Elliptical, Oval, Round and 

Square. A number of options are available which allows you to create the ideal litter 

bin for your landscape. 

Contemporary is a range of unique steel and stainless steel litter bins. Two shapes 

are available, semi circular and circular, and a number of differently placed apertures 

and emptying methods can be specified. 

City, Tulip and Conical are polyester powder coated steel litter bins each with their 

own individual style. All are available with a range of options and can be specified 

across a whole host of different landscapes. 

Sineu Graff Litter Bins come with a range of options some of which include antiterrorist 

options, rain shields and ashtrays. 

Ollerton and Sineu Graff Litter Bins can be coordinated with other pieces of street 

furniture from their extensive ranges, giving the architect or specifier a huge amount 

of choice and allowing them to create inspirational schemes within landscapes.



Seating ........................... page 134 


Planters ........................... page 258 


M3 

M3 Flared Top 40 Litre Litter Bin with Serpentine Bench, Chichester 

M3 FLAT TOP 40 LITRE 

345Ø 

620 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method Cigarette 

Demountable Hinged Side Side Loading Lid End and Can 

Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Ground Wall Ground Loading with Stubber Plate Liner Collector Ashtray Litter Plaques 

Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Socket Lid and Ashtray Lock with Lid Adaption Sign 

M3 Flat Top 40 Litre OLSL501 40 620 x 345Ø 18 Satin Polished n n n n n n n n 

M3 Flared Top 40 Litre OLSL101 40 650 x 435Ø 20 Satin Polished n n n n n n n 

M3 Flared Top 85 Litre OLSL104 85 785 x 558Ø 31 Satin Polished n n n n n n n n n n 

M3 Flared 110 Litre OLSL109 110 850 x 610Ø 40 Satin Polished n n n n n n n n n n 

Replacement Liner OLSL591 Any 

M3 FLARED TOP 

40 LITRE 

435Ø 

STOCK 

650 






n Ollerton M3 Litter Bins have a simple shape and style combined with the 

attractive aesthetic qualities of stainless steel. 

n Manufactured from 316L grade stainless steel, M3 Litter Bins require low 

maintenance and perfectly complement any of the other products within the 

Ollerton M3 range. 

n Litter bins are available with a whole host of available options such as a liner lock, 

a powder coated aluminium lid and also personalisation options such as plaques 

or signs. 

n M3 Litter Bins come with a range of fixing options, please refer to the table for 

full details. 

n Marshalls Street Furniture offer replacement liners for this range of litter bins as a 

separate item. 

M3 FLARED TOP 

85 LITRE 

558Ø 

STOCK 

785 

M3 FLARED TOP 110 LITRE 

610Ø 

850 

180

181 



Seating ........................... page 139 


Planters ........................... page 259 


Festival 

Ollerton Festival Flared Top Litter Bin without Lid 

FESTIVAL FLAT TOP 

40 LITRE 

345Ø 

620 


90 LITRE 

495Ø 

650 





n Festival Litter Bins are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is 

polyester powder coated in a colour of your choice. 

n There are a number of designs available which include flared, rolled or flat top 

litter bins. 

n Litter bins come with a galvanised steel liner and can be supplied with or without 

a liner lock. Galvanised liners can also be polyester powder coated in a colour of 

your choice. 

n Replacement liners are also available. 

n We also offer 90 and 40 litre bins with hardwood timber slats. 

n Festival Litter Bins come with an array of options, please refer to the tables for 

full details. 

FESTIVAL FLARED 

TOP 40 LITRE 


TOP 90 LITRE 

OPTIONS 


Dimensions Demountable Hinged Side Side Loading Lid End and Can 



Festival Flat Top 40 Litre OLFL501 40 620 x 345Ø 18 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n 

Festival Flat Top 90 Litre OLFL506 90 650 x 495Ø 23 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n 

Festival Flared Top 40 Litre OLFL101 40 650 x 435Ø 20 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n n 

Festival Flared Top 90 Litre OLFL106 90 650 x 580Ø 25 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n n n 

Replacement Liner OLFL951 Any 

435Ø 

650 

STOCK STOCK 

580Ø 

650

Festival Flared Top Litter Bin with Side Loading Lockable Lid and Festival Curved Seat 


TOP 110 LITRE 

610Ø 

850 

OPTIONS 


Dimensions Demountable Hinged Side Side Loading Lid End and Can 



Festival Flared Top 110 Litre OLFL109 110 850 x 610Ø 40 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n n n 

Festival Rolled Top 40 Litre OLFL301 40 620 x 505Ø 22 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n n 

Festival Rolled Top 90 Litre OLFL306 90 620 x 650Ø 27 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n n n 

Festival Timber Slatted 40 Litre OLFL502 40 573 x 392Ø 16 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n n 

Festival Timber Slatted 90 Litre OLFL507 90 573 x 542Ø 21 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n 

Replacement Liner OLFL951 Any 

FESTIVAL ROLLED 

TOP 40 LITRE 

505Ø 

620 

FESTIVAL ROLLED 

TOP 90 LITRE 

650Ø 

620 

FESTIVAL TIMBER 

SLATTED 40 LITRE 

392Ø 

573 

FESTIVAL TIMBER 

SLATTED 90 LITRE 

542Ø 

573 

182

183 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN05 Litter Bins Q50 240 


Albion Bins 

Albion 120L Standard Bin, with bait option, cigarette ashtray and laser cut text, Halifax. 

The Albion litter bin is a functional and versatile bin that can be specified in different 

sizes and capacities, customised with optional extras such as ashtrays and bait 

options and finally finished in a livery of your choosing. The Albion litter bin is ideal 

for most locations including urban, civic and country. 

For areas where smaller capacities are required the Albion is offered in 40 and 60 litre 

models which can also be post or wall mounted. For areas that are popular with dog 

walkers a coordinating dog litter bin is also available. 

The Albion has been designed in consultation with those that specify and use litter 

bins, and specific features have been incorporated into the bin at their request. 

These include angled apertures to ensure that all litter drops directly into the liner, 

and the ashtray that can simply be emptied directly into the liner from the exterior 

of the bin. To ensure long-term aesthetic appearance and functionality most 

components of the litter bin can be removed and very easily replaced if damaged, 

component parts are available through our Sales Order Office. 

Standard Specification for Models with 90L to 160L Capacities. 

n Outer: The body is made from a robust 2mm Zintec steel with a 5mm galvanised 

base. In addition, to offer further protection the outer is also zinc-rich primed to 

Akzo Nobel, Interpon PZ 770 standard giving excellent protection against rusting. 

n Lid: The lid is removable, enabling ashtrays to be retrofitted or the lid replaced 

if damaged. For the 120L, 90L and 160L specifications the lid is apexed to enable 

rain run off. 

n Apertures: Apertures are deep and feature a 45° angle, to ensure litter and 

cigarette stubs fall straight into the liner. 

n Hinge: The bin features a demountable, rust-free hinge pin, consisting of a 

stainless steel rod with nylon bushes that eliminates rusting. The threading rod 

may be removed and replaced where necessary, this also enables the door to be 

removed and replaced. 

n Lock and Key: Stainless steel lock with slam lock mechanism supplied with a 

hexagonal key as standard. The lock is recessed into body of the bin to prevent 

damage and it can be replaced if necessary. 

n Drainage Points: Four drainage holes are drilled into the bottom of the bin. 

n Fixing Options: The bin is ground-fixed using anchor screws. Four holes are 

drilled in the bottom of the bin. 

n Liner (Standard): Liner is 0.9mm galvanised steel with a rolled top edge. It 

features two handles to front face for ease of removal and four base holes for 

drainage. 

n Liner Weight: Approx 9.5kg. 


n Finish (Standard): Polyester powder coated in black as standard. 

n Detailing (Standard): Gold Litterman Transfers on two opposite sides and two 

gold bands supplied as standard.

ALBION 120L STANDARD BIN 

555 

325 

535 

n Capacity: 120 Litres. 

n Dimensions: 1090mm x 555mm x 555mm (H x W x D). 

n Apertures: Four, 45° angled apertures, sized 135mm x 325mm (H x W). 

n Outer Weight: 54.4kg. 


n Liner Options: Bin liner holder; a sturdy frame which will support a standard 

size sack. 

n Smoking Options: Cigarette Ashtray (supplied fitted into a flat lid). 

555 

Cigarette Stubber Plate. 325 

n Key: Other shapes available on request. 

n Finish: Other standard RAL colours available on request. 

555 

Anti Graffiti Paint. 

325 

60L DOG WASTE 

n Branding Options: Laser Cut: ‘Litter’ cut into body of bin with gold backing plate. 

Laser Cut: Bespoke text or logo with coloured backing plate. 

Transfers: Bespoke text or logo. 

Plaques: Bespoke text or logo. 

Vinyl Sticker: Bespoke text or logo. 

Ferrocast Plaque: ‘Litter’ or bespoke text or logo. 

For standard features and optional extras please see page 187. 

120L STANDARD / ECONOMY 120L STANDARD / ECONOMY (RODENT) 


ALBION 120L STANDARD BIN WITH BAIT OPTION 

535 

535 

535 535 


Shown with ashtray option. 

440 780 

550 

420 

420 

555 

325 


680 

555 

440 780 

550 

555 

325 

555 

325 

680 

680 

160L DOUBLE SLIMLINE 


680 

555 

555 

325 

555 

325 

535 

555 

555 

135 

135 

858 

858 

1090 

1090 

858 858 135 

135 

1090 

760 310 

310 

n Apertures: Four, 45° angled apertures, sized 135mm x 325mm (H x W). 


n Outer Weight: 54.4kg. 

680 

555 

555 

555 

325 

555 

325 

535 535 

555 

135 

858 

1090 

1090 

n Bait Option: The bin features two 57mm holes cut into two sides of the outer. In 

the bottom there is self-contained compartment to contain a bait box and which 

prevents rodents from accessing the interior of the litter bin. 


Please see 120L Standard Bin options above. 

60L DOG WASTE 

760 310 

310 

135 

858 

1090 

Hole in side of bin. 

Self-contained compartment. 

120L STANDARD / ECONOMY (RODENT) 60L STANDARD / ECONOMY 

316 

316 

220 

515 

680 

680 

316 

555 

555 

555 

325 

555 

325 

535 535 

515 

316 

220 

310 310 

DIMENSIONS FIXING OPTIONS FINISH BRANDING 

535 535 

310 310 

120L STANDARD / ECONOMY (RODENT) 60L STANDARD / ECONOMY 

Capacity (L) 

680 

H x W x L (mm) 

HAG (mm) 

Weight (kg) 

Standard Finish 

555 

Free Standing 

Wall Mount 

Post Mount 

Albion Standard Bin 120 1090 x 555 x 555 1090 54.4 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n AS n n n n n AS AS n n n n n 

Albion Standard Bin with Bait Option 

AS = As standard 

120 1090 x 555 x 555 1090 59 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n AS n n n n n n AS AS n n n n n 

Replacement Components Hinge Door Lock Key Lid 

Albion Standard Bin n n n n n 

Albion Standard Bin with Bait Option n n n n n 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 

Galvanised Liner 

Bin Liner Holder 

Cigarette Ashtray 

(in flat lid) 

Cigarette Stubber 

Plate 

Bait Box 

Any Standard 

RAL Colour 

316 

316 

220 

Anti Graffiti Paint 

515 

515 

Transfers: 

Gold Litterman 

Gold Banding 

Laser Cut 'Litter' with 

gold backing plate 

Laser Cut Text with 

coloured backing plate 

316 

316 

220 

Transfers – 

Bespoke text or logo 

Plaque – 


745 74590 90 

Sticker – 


880 

880 

880 

880 

184 

555 

555

185 

ALBION 90L SLIMLINE BIN 

440 

440 


90L SLIMLINE 

ALBION 160L DOUBLE SLIMLINE BIN 

680 

555 

555 

325 

410 

858 858 135 

135 



n Apertures: Two, 45° angled apertures, sized 135mm x 325mm (H x W). 

n Outer Weight: 53kg. 

n Liner Weight: Approx 9.25kg. 


n Liner Options: Bin liner holder; a sturdy frame which will support a standard size 

sack. 


Cigarette Stubber Plate. 










420 535 

420 

555 

325 

535 

680 

90L SLIMLINE 

680 

555 

325 

555 

555 

325 

535 

555 

135 

858 

1090 

1090 

Wall Mount 

For standard features and optional extras please see page 187. 


n Capacity: 160 Litres. Bin contains two 80 litre liners. 

780 

420 535 

420 

420 


440 780 

550 

420 

555 

325 

680 

680 



Capacity (L) 


680 

555 

555 

555 

325 

410 

555 

135 

Free Standing 

858 

1090 

1090 


n Apertures: Two, 45° angled apertures, sized 135mm 160L x 550mm DOUBLE (H x SLIMLINE W). 

n Outer Weight: 67kg. 

n Liner Weight: Approx 9kg each liner. 


n Liner Options: Bin liner holder; a sturdy frame which will support a standard size 

sack. 


316 

316 

Cigarette Stubber Plate. 




316 

316 






310 


For standard features and optional extras please 555see 

page 187. 

60L DOG WASTE 

440 780 

550 

325 

680 

680 

680 

555 

555 

325 

535 535 

780 

440 780 

550 

760 310 

310 


HAG (mm) 

Weight (kg) 


Post Mount 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 




(in flat lid) 


Plate 

Bait Box 

555 

325 

60L DOG WASTE 

Albion Slimline Bin 90 1090 x 555 x 410 1090 53kg Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n AS n n n n n AS AS n n n n n 

Albion Double Slimline Bin 


160 1090 x 780 x 440 1090 67kg Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n AS n n n n n AS AS n n n n n 

Replacement Components Hinge Door Lock Key Lid 

Albion Slimline Bin n n n n n 

Albion Double Slimline Bin n n n n n555 

780 

440 780 

550 

858 858 135 

135 

1090 

760 310 

555 

440 

440 

1090 

515 

515 

Any Standard 

RAL Colour 


Transfers: 


Gold Banding 



680 



880 

880 

Transfers – 


Plaque – 


555 

Sticker – 


555 

325 

780 

760 

760 

555 

555

Albion Bin 130L Circular, bespoke Liverpool specification 

ALBION 130L CIRCULAR BIN 

Shown in grey with mitre top option 

Capacity (L) 



HAG (mm) 

Weight (kg) 


Free Standing 

Wall Mount 

Post Mount 

n Capacity: 130L. 

n Dimensions: 1228mm x 570mm (H x diameter). 

n Lid: The bin is supplied with a flat lid as standard. 

n Apertures: Two, 45° angled apertures, sized 135mm x 433mm (H x W). 

Optional extras 

n Liner Options: Bin liner holder, a sturdy frame which will support a standard 

size sack. 

n Lid: A mitred lid is available on request. 

n Smoking Options: Cigarette Ashtray (supplied fixed into lid). 

Cigarette stubber plate. 


n Finish: Other standard RAL colours on request. 






Ferrocast plaque: ‘Litter’ or bespoke text or logo. 

Albion 130L Circular Bin 


130 1228 x 570 dia 1228 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n AS n n n n n AS AS n n n n n 

Surface Mount 

Ground Fix 




(in flat lid) 


Plate 

Bait Box 

Any Standard 

RAL Colour 


Transfers: 


Gold Banding 





Transfers – 


Plaque – 


Sticker – 


186

187 

STANDARD FEATURES 

Apexed, removable lid. 

Slam lock mechanism, replaceable. 

STAINLESS STEEL SPECIFICATION 

n Outer: Available as standard in Grade 316 stainless steel, also available in 

Grade 304 stainless steel on request. 

n Capacities: 120L Standard 

90L Slimline 

130L Round 

60L and 40L Post Mounted 

n Dimensions: As per equivalent model in steel. 

n Lid: The lid is apexed to allow rain run off. The lid is also removable, enabling 

ashtrays to be retrofitted or the lid replaced if damaged. (Lids for the 60L and 

40L specifications are flat.) 

n Apertures: Apertures are deep and feature a 45° angle, to ensure litter and 

cigarette stubs fall straight into the liner. 

n Lock and Key: Stainless steel lock with slam lock mechanism supplied with 

a hexagonal key as standard. The lock is recessed into the body of the bin to 

prevent damage and can be replaced if necessary. 

n Drainage Points: Four drainage points are drilled into the bottom of the bin. 

n Fixing Options: The bin is ground fixed using anchor screws. (40L and 60L 

specifications have the same fixing options as equivalent models in steel.) 

n Liner (Standard): Liner is 0.9mm galvanised with a rolled top edge. It features 

two handles to front face for ease of removal and four base holes for drainage. 

n Liner weight: Approx 9.5kg. 

Demountable hinge system in stainless steel 

with plastic bushes. 

Recessed lock and hexagonal key. 

Deep aperture opening overhanging liner. 

Galvanised liner with two lifting handles. 

Optional Extras: 

n Liner Options: Bin liner holder, a 

sturdy frame which will support a 

standard size sack. 

n Smoking Options: 

Cigarette Ashtray (supplied fitted 

into a flat lid) Cigarette Stubber Plate. 

n Key: Other shapes available on 

request. 

n Finish: Smooth finish supplied 

as standard, a perforated finish is 

available on request. 

n Branding Options: Please see 

branding options on next page. 

Removable and replaceable lid, hinge and door. 

Guiding slider unit in base. 

ALBION 90L SLIMLINE 

STAINLESS STEEL BIN

OPTIONAL EXTRAS 

Cigarette ashtray. 

BRANDING OPTIONS 

Laser Cut: Text and coloured backing plate. 

RECYCLING APERTURES 

n Recycling aperture infills enable recycling to be introduced to an area, using 

bins that coordinate with those used nearby. 

Ashtray empties from the top with flat lid. 

Plastic Plaque: With bespoke detail. 

n Recycling aperture infills can be fitted to 120L and 90L Slimline litter bins. 

n Recycling infills can be specified with new litter bins or retrofitted, they are 

removable and/or replaceable if required. 

n Manufactured in Ferrocast, an engineering grade polyurethane, the recycling 

infills are durable and will not rust or corrode. 

n Recycling infills feature a specifically shaped aperture for waste collection and an 

area with printed text. They are available in standard RAL colours. 

n Recycling infills can be custom made to a bespoke specification, please contact 

our sales order office to discuss: 

– shape 

– colour 

– text 

– graphics. 

Cigarette stubber plate. 

Vinyl sticker: With bespoke detail. 

Newspapers & Magazines 

Plastic Only 

Bin liner holder. 

Ferrocast plaque: ‘Litter’ and/or bespoke detail. 

Glass Only 

General Waste 

188

440 

858 135 

1090 

189 

Albion Dog Waste Bin, 60L, Post Mounted, Newcastle 

ALBION 40L & 60L DOG WASTE BIN 

STANDARD FEATURES 

316 316 

310 

316 

310 

310 

215 

40L DOG WASTE 

515 

60L DOG WASTE 

310 

316 

310 

880 

Standard Specification for Models with 40L and 60L Capacities 

n Outer Material: The body is made from 1.5 mm Zintec Steel. 

n Hinge: The bin features a demountable, rust-free hinge mechanism, consisting 

of a stainless steel threading rod with nylon bushes to eliminate rusting. The 

threading rod may be removed and replaced where necessary, this also enables 

the door to be removed and replaced. 

n Lock and key: Stainless steel anti tamper lock with slam lock mechanism 

supplied with a hexagonal key as standard. The lock is recessed into body of bin 

to prevent damage and replaced if necessary. 


n Liner: 0.9mm galvanised steel liner with rolled top edge with two handles to 

front face and 4 base drain holes. 

n Capacity: 40L Post / Wall Mounted. 

60L Post / Wall Mounted / Ground Standing. 

n Dimensions: 40L = 580mm x 316mm x 316mm (H x W x D). 

60L = 880mm x 316mm x 316mm (H x W x D). 

n Outer Weight: 40L = 13.9kg. 

60L = 19kg. 

n Apertures: One. 

n Lid: The bin has a hinged, flat steel lid with integral chute attached to a base 

which is apexed to ensure waste falls into unit. 

n Finish: Polyester powder coated. Body in Red RAL 3000 with a black lid in RAL 

9005 as standard. 

n Detailing: Adhesive vinyl sticker with dog motif offered as standard. 

316 


n Fixing Options: Wall Mounting: ‘W’ shaped mounting bracket. 

Post Mounting: ‘W’ shaped mounting bracket (for use with 

stainless steel banding – not supplied). 

Steel Post (1500mm) for ground fixing. 

Surface Mount: plinth 20mm high. Providing dimensions of 

900mm x 310mm x 310mm (H x W x D). 

n Lid Options: Hinged lid without chute. 

n Key: Other shapes available on request. 316 316 


Anti graffiti paint. 

n Detailing: Adhesive Vinyl Logo: Bespoke. 


Gold Banding. 

Transfers: Bespoke Text or Logo. 

Plaque: Bespoke Text or Logo. 

310 

310 

Sticker: Bespoke Text or Logo. 

40L DOG WASTE 

Recessed chute. Chute drops waste directly into liner. Removable and replaceable door and hinge. Wall mounting bracket. 

316 

220 

215 

40L DOG WASTE 

316 

316 

316 316 

310 

316 

220 

316 

316 

580 

580 

215 

316 

580

1090 

440 

ALBION 40L & 60L LITTER BIN 

440 

ALBION 120L ECONOMY BIN 

Capacity (L) 

316 

220 

Replacement Components Hinge Door Lock Key Lid Lid with Chute 

Albion 60L Dog Litter Bin n n n n n 

Albion 40L Dog Litter Bin n n n n n 

60L Litter Bin n n n n n 

40L Litter Bin n n n n n 

n Capacity: 40L Post / Wall Mounted. 

60L Post / Wall Mounted / Ground Standing. 

n Dimensions: 40L = 580mm x 316mm x 310mm (H x W x D). 

60L = 880mm x 316mm x 310mm (H x W x D). 

n Outer Weight: 40L – 12.85kg. 

60L – 17.8kg. 

n Apertures: One. 

n Lid: Removable flat top lid. 

n Finish: Polyester Powder coated in black as standard. 

n Branding: Gold Litterman logo as standard. 


760 

n Fixing Options: Wall Mounting: ‘W’ shaped mounting bracket. 

Post Mounting: ‘W’ shaped mounting bracket (for use with 

stainless steel banding – not supplied). 


Steel Post (1500mm) for ground fixing. 

Surface Mount: plinth 20mm high. Providing dimensions 760 of 

900mm x 310mm x 310mm (H x W x D). 



n Finish: Other standard RAL 316 colours available on 316 request. 

220 

220 

Anti graffiti paint. 

n Detailing: Adhesive vinyl logo – other. 

Gold banding. 

Laser Cut: Text or logo with coloured backing plate. 


Plaque: Bespoke text or logo. 

Sticker: Bespoke text or logo. 

n Capacity: 120L. 


n Outer Material: The body is made from 1.5mm Zintec Steel. 

555 

n Apertures: Four deep apertures sized 135mm x 325mm. 

n Lid: The bin features a fully welded, flat lid. 

n Hinge: A fully welded, stainless steel hinge runs the full height of the bin. 

n Lock: Stainless steel anti tamper lock with slam lock mechanism supplied with a 

hexagonal key as standard. Lock is recessed into body of bin to prevent damage. 


n Fixing Options: Free standing or ground fixed – four holes are drilled in the 

555 

555 

bottom of the bin for fixing. 325 

325 

n Finish (Standard): Polyester powder coated in black as standard. 

n Detailing (Standard): One gold Litterman transfer offered as standard. 

n Liner (Standard): 0.9mm galvanised 555 steel liner with rolled top edge with 555 two 

325 

325 

handles to front face and 4 base drain holes. Size 400mm x 400mm x 740mm 

high. Approx 6kg weight. 


n Liner: Bin liner holder; a sturdy frame which will support a standard size sack. 

n Smoking Options: Cigarette Stubber Plate. 

n Finish: Other RAL colours available on request. 

n Detailing: Gold Litterman Transfer. 

Gold Tape Banding. 

120L 40L STANDARD / ECONOMY 120L STANDARD / ECONOMY (RODENT) 

DIMENSIONS 

535 

FIXING OPTIONS FINISH 

535 

BRANDING 

535 


215 

215 

40L DOG WASTE 

HAG (mm) 

Weight (kg) 

316 

220 


90 

316 316 

420 535 

420 

316 

220 

310 

90L SLIMLINE 

515 

215 

316 

310 310 

316 

220 

310 

316 

445 

745 90 

90 

445 

580 

310 

310 

420 535 

420 

316 

316 

220 

220 

40L STANDARD / ECONOMY 

90L SLIMLINE 

310 

310 

555 

325 

555 

325 

535 

535 

680 

680 

555 

325 

580 

880 

555 

60L STANDARD / ECONOMY 40L STANDARD / ECONOMY 

680 

680 

555 

325 

555 

555 

325 

555 

325 

535 

580 

858 858 135 

135 

555 

555 

135 

135 

858 

858 

1090 

1090 

1090 

1090 

Free Standing 

Post / Wall Mount 

(Mounting Bracket) 

Post Mount (Ground 

Fix Steel Post) 

Surface Mount (Plinth 

Required) 


Ashtray 

Lid Without Chute 

Any Standard RAL 

Colour 

Anti Graffiti Finish 

Gold Transfer 

Litterman Logo 

Vinyl Sticker – 

Dog Waste 

Laser Cut 'Litter' & 


Albion 60L Dog Litter Bin 60 880 x 310 x 310 880 19 Powder Coated Body Red RAL 3000, Lid Black RAL 9005 1 n n n n n n AS n n n n n n 

Albion 40L Dog Litter Bin 40 580 x 310 x 310 580 13.9 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 1 n n n n n AS n n n n n n 

Albion 60L Litter Bin 60 880 x 310 x 310 880 17.8 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n n n n n n AS n n n n n n 

Albion 40L Litter Bin 40 580 x 310 x 310 580 12.85 Powder Coated Black RAL 9005 n n n n n n AS n n n n n n 


310 

440 780 

550 

440 780 

550 

215 

680 

310 

680 

90 

445 

Laser Cut Text/logo & 


580 

Gold Banding 

Transfers – 


555 

535 535 


680 

680 

Plaque – 


Sticker – 


555 

555 

135 

135 

858 

858 

190 

1090 

1090 

858 858 135 

135

191 



Bins Q50 242 


Buffalo 

Buffalo 40 Litre Bin with Hemispherical Base 

BUFFALO 40 LITRE 

1100 

400Ø 

BUFFALO 40 LITRE FLAT BASE 

1020 


Seating ........................... page 145 




n Ollerton Buffalo is a post mounted cast aluminium litter bin. Bins can be coated 

in up to two colours of your choice. This makes them ideal for children’s play 

areas and parks. 

n Buffalo comes in two basic shapes, flat or hemispherical base with side loading 

lockable door for easy access. 

n In addition the litter bins come with a range of options including replacement 

galvanised steel liners. For a full range of options please refer to the table below. 

n Buffalo Litter Bins are available with surface, sub surface, ground and wall fixing. 

BUFFALO 120 LITRE TRIPLE BIN FOR WASTE SEGREGATION 

BUFFALO 80 LITRE DOUBLE FLAT BASE 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Demountable 

Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Surface Sub- Ground Wall Ground Cone Stubber 

Description (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Surface Socket Lid Plate 

Buffalo 40 Litre Hemispherical Base 40 1100 x 400Ø 40 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n 

Buffalo 40 Litre Flat Base 40 1020 x 380Ø 35 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n n n 

Buffalo 80 Litre Double Flat Base 80 1020 x 380Ø (2 in Total) 55 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n 

Buffalo 120 Litre Triple Bin For Waste Segregation 120 1020 x 380Ø (3 in Total) 75 PC Any RAL Colour n n n n n 

Replacement Liner Any 

380Ø 

76Ø 

1020 

380Ø 

1020 

76Ø 

380Ø 

76Ø



Bins Q50 242 


Specials 

Dog Waste Bin, Top Loading 

CENTRAL PATTERN: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL 

400 

830 

170 

DOG WASTE BIN, TOP LOADING 


CENTRAL STRIPE: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL 

OPTIONS 

Litter Bin Fixing Method 

Dimensions Stainless Twin Triple 

Product Capacity (H x W x L) Weight Standard Surface Sub Ground Wall Root Steel Side Side 

Description (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Surface Lid Filling Filling 

Dog Waste Litter Bin 35 1020x380Ø Any RAL Colour n n n n n 

Central Pattern Steel 50 830x400Ø 20 Any RAL Colour n 

Central Pattern Stainless Steel 50 830x400Ø 20 Stainless Steel n 

Central Stripe Steel 50 830x400Ø 20 Any RAL Colour n 

Central Stripe Stainless Steel 50 830x400Ø 20 Stainless Steel n 

1020 

400 

380Ø 

830 

170 

192

193 



Bins Q50 242 


Cigarette Bins 

STAND MOUNT CIGARETTE BIN 

245mm 

1400mm 


n Wall Mount Cigarette Bin: Ideal for doorways outside shops, restaurants and 

bars. A unique design incorporating a stubber plate, a double box which reduces 

internal oxygen levels to ensure cigarettes are fully extinguished and an easy to 

empty slide out collection unit. It is available in two sizes, original and mini. The unit 

is mounted to the wall using back mounting plates. The collection box is secured 

using a key operated security slam lock. 

n Wall Mount Mini Cigarette Bin: Smaller than the standard Wall Mounted Cigarette 

Bin the Mini Bin is the ideal specification for areas where space is at a premium. 

n Stand Mount Cigarette Bin: Designed for glass fronted buildings where wall 

mounting in not possible. It can be positioned in the optimum location and 

consists of a wall mounted litter bin, base and stand. 

n Lantern Bin: Similar to the wall mounted litter bin in functionality, but features a 

triangular shaped lid which adds a unique aesthetic and ensures that litter can not be 

placed on top of it. Lantern Bin also features the unique double box which ensures 

that cigarettes are extinguished. Both wall and pole fixing methods are available. 

n Tower Bin: A stylish and functional freestanding cigarette litter bin. It features 

a uniquely profiled pyramid top and lockable double box which ensures that 

cigarettes are fully extinguished. It also comes with the option of alternate top, 

hooded and flat top designs are available. The bin can be left freestanding or be 

bolted into the ground. 

n Cigarette and Litter Bin: Highly functional allowing for effective disposal of both 

general litter and cigarettes. It consists of a general litter bin, pyramid top with 

stubber plate, a cigarette butt collection box which ensures that cigarettes are 

extinguished and a galvanised steel liner. The litter bin is also lockable and can be 

bolted to the ground for added security. 

n Each of the litter bins are available in either 304 grade steel or zinc plated and 

epoxy/polyester powder coated steel in a black textured colour. 

WALL MOUNT CIGARETTE BIN WALL MOUNT MINI CIGARETTE BIN 

245mm 

70mm 

445mm 

200mm 

370mm 

70mm

Cigarette and Litter Bin 

LANTERN BIN 

TOWER BIN CIGARETTE AND LITTER BIN 

Pyramid Top shown 

200mm 

800mm 

Flat Top 

Hooded Top 

Fixing Method 


Dimensions 

(H x W x L) Standard Wall Post 

Description (mm) Finish Mounted Mounted 

Wall Mount Cigarette Bin 445 x 245 x 70 Stainless Steel or Black Textured AS 

Wall Mount Mini Cigarette Bin 370 x 200 x 70 Stainless Steel or Black Textured AS 

Stand Mount Cigarette Bin 1400 x 245 x 70 Stainless Steel or Black Textured 

Lantern Cigarette Bin (small) 300 x 145 x 70 Stainless Steel or Black Textured n n 

Lantern Cigarette Bin (medium) 400 x 145 x 70 Stainless Steel or Black Textured n n 

Lantern Cigarette Bin (large) 400 x 190 x 95 Stainless Steel or Black Textured n n 

Tower Cigarette Bin with Pyramid Top 800 x 200 x 200 Stainless Steel or Black Textured 

Tower Cigarette Bin with Hooded Top 850 x 200 x 200 Stainless Steel or Black Textured 

Tower Cigarette Bin with Flat Top 690 x 200 x 200 Stainless Steel or Black Textured 

Cigarette & Litter Bin 1130 x 385 x 385 Stainless Steel or Black Textured 

385mm 

145mm 

1130mm 

300mm 

194

195 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN08 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ........................ page 52/57 

Seating ........................... page 149 



Diamond Point 

Diamond Point Round and Expression Seat 





n The Diamond Point range incorporates a uniquely profiled body with frame 

and is available in grade 316L marine grade stainless steel or in zinc plated and 

polyester powder coated steel. The raised pattern not only provides a unique 

aesthetic but also prevents flyposting. 

n Where the bin is stainless steel the main body is electropolished whilst the frame 

is shot peened; for the steel litter bin the frame and body can be supplied in two 

different colours. 

n Steel litter bins have galvanised steel liners whilst stainless steel litter bins are 

supplied with stainless steel liners. Some Diamond Point steel models have the 

option of a stainless steel liner. Please refer to the table for full details. 

n The Diamond Point round litter bins are supplied with a concrete mounting block 

when specified with surface or ground fixing. 

n All options for the litter bins are shown below, simply pick the litter bin you 

require and then select any of the available options. Litter bins can be specified 

without rain shields. 

n Where two capacities are shown in the table for the same model, the larger 

number indicates capacity if chosen with a plastic bin liner holder. 

n NB. Dimensions and weights shown are for base models only. Products with 

options added to them will differ in size, weight and capacity. Please contact our 

Sales Office if you require more detailed information. 

DIAMOND POINT ROUND: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL DIAMOND POINT RECTANGULAR: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL 

350 

258 

660 

Plastic Bin Liner Holder 

600 

320 

340 

420 

920 

Plastic Bin Liner Holder

Diamond Point Elliptical with Rainshield in Stainless Steel, Sunderland 

DIAMOND POINT SQUARE 

DIAMOND POINT ELLIPTICAL: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL DIAMOND POINT OVAL: STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL 

Shown with rainshield option 

1155 

520 

268 450 

Plastic Bin Liner Holder Ashtray Option 

Plastic Bin Liner Holder Ashtray Option 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Bin Stainless 

Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Steel 

Description (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Liner 

Diamond Point Round Small 40/46 740 x 350Ø 740 35 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n 

Diamond Point Round Medium 55/60 820 x 350Ø 820 41 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n 

Diamond Point Round Large 75/80 770 x 420Ø 770 55 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n 

Diamond Point Rectangular Small with Support Post 35/42 600 x 210 x 420 920 13 Steel or S/Steel*** n* n AS n 

Diamond Point Rectangular Medium with Support Post 40/50 700 x 210 x 420 920 26 PC Steel n n AS n 

Diamond Point Square with Covered Aperture 100 490 x 490 x 1000 1067 60 PC Steel n n AS 

Diamond Point Elliptical Small 38/42 480 x 270 x 520 730 24 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n n AS n n 

Diamond Point Elliptical Medium 46/50 580 x 270 x 520 830 30 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n n AS n n 

Diamond Point Elliptical Large 65 830 x 270 x 520 1080 42 PC Steel n n n AS n 

Diamond Point Oval 100/120 900 x 410 x 500 900 60 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n** n AS 

AS = As Standard * Wall mounting only available for steel model **Ashtray only available for ss model with ss liner ***S/steel only available for model with support post # For stainless steel model please add suffix INX. 

102 

480 

361 

207 

500 

490Ø 

1067 

Plastic Bin Liner Holder 

900 

196

197 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN09 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ........................ page 52/57 

Seating ........................... page 149 



Contemporary 

Contemporary Round Litter Bin with Expression Seat 





n The Contemporary range incorporates a smooth steel body with laser cut stripes 

which is zinc plated and polyester powder coated. 

n Selected bins are also available in grade 316L stainless steel, in a matt shot 

peened finish. 


require and then select any of the available options. 


number indicates capacity if chosen with a standard stainless steel liner. 

The smaller number indicates the capacity using plastic bin liners (anti-terrorist 

option only). 




CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN TOP/EMPTY VIA TOP CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN TOP/EMPTY VIA FRONT 

STOCK 

Ex stock in 


500Ø 

Ashtray Option 

780 

420Ø 

880

Contemporary Litter Bin Semi Circular 

Anti-Terrorist Option 

n The Contemporary Litter Bin can also be supplied without the galvanised liner, 

featuring instead an integrated holder for transparent bin liners, and an internal 

platform to support the bottom of the bags and to keep their contents visible. 

n The body of the litter bin is manufactured from 3mm steel with a lid in 

5mm steel. 

n Capacities available are 40 litre and 60 litre in round shaped and 45 litre in 

semi-circular. 

CONTEMPORARY SEMI CIRCULAR CONTEMPORARY ROUND APERTURE IN FRONT/EMPTY VIA TOP 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method Additional Items 

Dimensions Bin Stainless 

Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Steel Anti 

Description (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Liner Terrorist 

Contemporary Round Small, 

Aperture in Top (Empty Via Top) 

45/40 730 x 430Ø 730 30 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n n AS n 

Contemporary Round Large, 


70/60 780 x 500Ø 780 33 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n n AS n 

Contemporary Round, 

Aperture in Top (Empty From Front) 

70 880 x 420Ø 880 35 PC Steel n n AS 

Contemporary Semi Circular, 


50/45 778 x 360 x 500 780 31 Steel or Stainless Steel n n n AS n 

Contemporary Round, 

Aperture in Front (Empty Via Top) 

40 730 x 500Ø 730 30 PC Steel n n AS AS 


360 

500 

778 

380Ø 

732 

Ashtray as Standard 

198

199 



Seating ........................... page 149 



City 

City Confort Round Litter Bin 

CITY CONFORT SQUARE 





n The City Range comprises circular and square litter bins. The main body of 

the litter bins is constructed from steel rods welded to flat steel bars and a cover 

and base. 

n These are zinc plated and polyester powder coated. The cover and base can be 

supplied in a different colour to the body. A full range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable 

(matt textured) colours is available. 

n The galvanised steel liner is accessed through an 8mm triangular key operated 

lock system, either from the top or front depending on the model. 

n Where City Confort Round and Square models are specified with surface or 

ground fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard. 


require and then select any of the available options. 



n Dimensions shown in the tables are for base models only. For more information 

on selecting a litter bin to meet your needs please contact our Sales Office. 

OPTIONS 



Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Steel 

Description (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Liner 

City Confort Square Small 42 364 x 364 x 600 630 45 PC Steel n n AS 

City Confort Square Large 60 394 x 394 x 680 710 50 PC Steel n n AS 

City Confort Round 60 760 x 420Ø 760 50 PC Steel n n AS 

Garden City 50/60 830 x 510Ø 830 50 PC Steel n n n AS 


394 

710 

CITY CONFORT ROUND 

420Ø 

760 

GARDEN CITY 

510Ø 

830



Seating ........................... page 149 



Others 

Tulip Litter Bin 





n The Tulip Litter Bin is made from 12 flat steel slats welded onto a top ring. 

The litter bin is zinc plated and polyester powder coated after manufacture. 

n Where Tulip is specified with surface or ground fixing, it is supplied with a 

concrete mounting block. 

n Tulip is supplied as standard with a zinc plated, polyester powder coated 

steel liner. 

n Both body and liner of Tulip can be supplied in a range of RAL (high gloss) or 

Sable (matt textured) colours. 

n The Campus 4 Litter Bin is made from a steel structure and vertical aluminium 

profiles for the body. All parts are polyester powder coated. 

TULIP CAMPUS 4 CONICAL 

578Ø 

850 

OPTIONS 



Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Steel Anti 

Description (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Liner Terrorist 

Tulip 50/55 850 x 580Ø 850 30 PC Steel n n n n 

Campus 4 60 830 x 490Ø 830 40 PC Steel/Aluminium n n 

Conical 42 820 x 490Ø 820 PC Steel n AS 

490 

830 

490Ø 

820 

200

201 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Timber Litter Bins 

Classic Elliptical Litter Bin with Rainshield 

Timber Litter Bins offer the designer an alternative, more natural look for their 

landscape. Our range of Sineu Graff Timber Litter Bins are unique in design and 

coordinate with seating allowing architects and specifiers to create truly inspirational 

schemes within today’s urban landscapes. A range of shapes, styles 

and sizes are available along with a whole host of options which allow you to select 

a litter bin which will suit the needs of your project. 

n Rendezvous: A uniquely styled litter bin which can be combined with 

coordinating Rendezvous Seating to create a contemporary aesthetic within your 

landscape. It is manufactured from treated hardwood which is set around a steel 

frame. The hardwood is covered with a natural shade varnish which is applied 

using an electrostatic process. Where Rendezvous is specified with surface 

mounting or ground fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard. 

n Metropolis: Litter bin can also be combined with coordinating Metropolis 

seating to create a complete scheme within landscapes. Metropolis is 

manufactured from treated hardwood slats which are set around a zinc plated, 

polyester powder coated steel frame. Hardwood elements are treated in the 

same way as those used for Rendezvous. 

n Conical: A slim line litter bin with a small footprint. Straight wooden slats 

combined with a curved top make this a striking addition to any landscape. 

It comprises treated hardwood and zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel. 

n Rendezvous, Metropolis and Conical are all supplied with a stainless steel liner 

as standard, which is secured using an automatic locking system. This can be 

operated by using an 8mm triangular key. 

n Rustic: A robust litter bin which has been designed to complement green 

surroundings. It forms part of Sineu Graff’s rustic range and fully coordinates with 

the Romarin bench. Rustic is manufactured from 40mm thick treated softwood 

which has a slight green tint. The softwood is set around a galvanised steel frame. 

The lid is manufactured from zinc plated and polyester powder coated 3mm 

thick sheet steel cover and is supplied in RAL traffic black 9017 with a red handle. 

It is equipped with a plastic bin liner holder as standard. 

n A full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours is available 

across the range of litter bins. Please contact our Sales Office for more details.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN12 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ............................. page 52 Seating ........................... page 111 


Timber 

RENDEZVOUS 

CONICAL 


490Ø 

490Ø 

820 

820 

METROPOLIS 

RUSTIC 


OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Bin Galvanised Stainless 

Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Wall Surface Ground Open Rain Ashtray Liner Steel Steel 

Description (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Shield Holder Liner Liner 

Rendezvous 55 490Ø x 820 820 30 Hardwood/PC Steel n n AS 

Metropolis Small 45 450Ø x 780 780 26 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n 

Metropolis Medium 60 520Ø x 830 830 30 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n 

Conical 42 490Ø x 820 820 24 Hardwood/PC Steel n n AS 

Rustic 120 1000 x 450 x 450 1000 48 Softwood/PC Steel n n n AS 

450Ø 

450 

780 

1000 

202

203 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 LTBN13 Litter Bins Q50 240 Bollards ............................. page 52 Seating ........................... page 111 


Classic 

Classic Elliptical with Rainshield and Rendezvous Seat 

CLASSIC ELLIPTICAL WITH RAINSHIELD 

Shown with rainshield option 

560 

300 563 

Ashtray Option 

930 


n Classic Litter Bins offer a more natural aesthetic for your landscape. They are 

manufactured from treated hardwood which is set around a steel frame. 

n The steel is zinc plated before being finished with polyester powder coating 

and the hardwood section is treated with a natural shade varnish which is 

applied using an electrostatic process. 

n Supplied with a galvanised steel liner as standard which is secured by an 

automatic locking system. This can be operated using an 8mm triangular key. 

n Litter bins come with a range of options, which are detailed in the table below. 

Litter bins can be specified without rainshields. 

n Where round and square litter bins are specified with surface mount or ground 

fixing, a concrete mounting block is supplied as standard. 



n A full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available. 




OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Bin Galvanised Stainless 



Classic Elliptical Small 39/44 560 x 300 x 563 930 26 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n AS n n n 

Classic Elliptical Medium 


44/50 660 x 300 x 563 1010 32 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n AS n n n

Round Timber Litter Bin 

Square Litter Bin with Roseraie Square Planter 

CLASSIC ROUND 

CLASSIC SQUARE 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method 

Dimensions Bin Galvanised Stainless 



Classic Round Small 48/53 810 x 420Ø 810 39 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n n 

Classic Round Medium 58/64 810 x 420Ø 912 42 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n n 

Classic Square Small 42/46 630 x 360 x 360 630 40 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n n 

Classic Square Medium 59/65 710 x 392 x 392 710 43 Hardwood/PC Steel n n n n n 

420Ø 

258 

392 

912 

710 

204

205 



Seating ........................... page 163 



Polyurethane Litter Bins 

Heritage and Leicester 

Heritage Litter Bin with lid 






n The Heritage Litter Bin offers a traditional aesthetic to fit in with Victorian 

style landscapes. 

n Manufactured from Ferrocast®, Heritage Litter Bins will not rust or corrode and are 

resistant to saline and uric acid. 

HERITAGE LITTER BIN LEICESTER LITTER BIN 

443Ø 

800 

Available with or 

without swivel top lid 

n Heritage can be specified with or without a lid; lidded bins have a unique swivel 

top opening mechanism. Litter bins within the Heritage range are supplied with 

galvanised steel liner, liner lock and contrasting colour lettering as standard. 

n Coats of arms, city crests and company logos can easily be incorporated 

on request. 

n We also offer an ashtray option for the Heritage Litter Bin on request. 

n The Leicester Bin has been designed to have the apperance of a slatted litter bin 

and to coordinate with Ferrocast Leicester Seating. 

Dimensions 

Product Capacity H x W x L Standard 

Description (L) (mm) Finish 

Heritage 65 800 x 443Ø PC Black with Gold Lettering 

Heritage with Lid 65 1010 x 443Ø PC Black with Gold Lettering 

Leicester 40 670 x 429Ø PC Black 

670 

429Ø



Seating ........................... page 163 

Polyurethane Litter Bins 

WaterSide 

WaterSide Large Litter Bin with Double Aperture 

WATERSIDE STANDARD WATERSIDE LARGE 

850 

1000 

Also Available as 

Dog Litter Bin 



n Contemporary and elegant, the WaterSide Litter Bin is both stylish and functional. 

Its clean, simple lines complement any landscape, whether traditional or modern. 

Designed around a unique elliptical form, the oval shape provides a smaller 

footprint helping to maximise pedestrianised areas. 

n Designed to hold large capacities the bins also feature large apertures to 

accommodate bulky waste items easily. 

n The standard bin has a 120 litre capacity and the choice of single or double 

aperture is also available. The large bin has a capacity of 400 litre and comes with 

double aperture as standard. 

n The WaterSide Bin features either single or twin lockable, front opening, hinged 

doors for litter removal. 

n The standard colour is silver, other colours are available on request. 

n The litter bin is free standing with above ground fixing. 

CAPACITY (L) OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Product 120 400 H x W x L Weight Standard Single Double 

Description (mm) (kg) Finish Aperture Aperture 

WaterSide Standard n 1000 x 850 x 400 165 Silver n n 

WaterSide Dog Litter Bin n 1000 x 850 x 400 165 Silver n n 

WaterSide Large n 1357 x 1350 x 550 395 Silver n 

1350 

1357 

206

207 



Seating ........................... page 110 

Planters ........................... page 263 

Cast Iron Litter Bins 

Heritage 

Heritage Litter Bin and MSF502 Heritage Seat 

HERITAGE LITTER BIN 

415Ø 

950 





n Heritage is a tough and sturdy offering. Similar to the Ferrocast® Heritage Litter 

Bin, our ductile cast iron version has a traditional Victorian aesthetic. 

n Heritage is available with an 85 litre capacity making it a practical solution for 

waste collection. 

n Heritage is primed with a 100% phosphate primer before being finished in black 

gloss paint. The lettering is then highlighted with gold paint. Other RAL colours 

are available on request. 

n The litter bin comes with a range of options; these include open top and 

galvanised metal bin liner. 

n The Heritage Litter Bin is front opening, and each bin is supplied with a square key 

as standard. 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Galvanised 

Product Product Capacity H x W x L HAG Weight Standard Free Surface Ground Open Lidded Steel 

Description Reference (L) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Top Top Liner 

Heritage Litter Bin MSF5501 85 950 x 415Ø 950 99 Painted Black Gloss 9017 with Gold Highlights n n n


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Plastic Litter Bins 

Envirobank Recycling Litter Bin 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of plastic litter bins which come in a 

variety of designs to suit almost any landscape. Styles range from traditional to 

contemporary and give the designer a multitude of options for litter solutions. Each 

litter bin is manufactured to the highest standard from medium density moulded 

polyethylene (MDPE). MDPE will not rust or corrode and can be cleaned easily, 

this makes it ideal for use as a litter bin material. Furthermore plastic requires no 

maintenance, adding to your cost savings over the lifetime of the product. MDPE is 

also environmentally friendly and is 100% recyclable. 

Plastic Litter Bins are economically priced and highly functional. Boasting large 

capacities and coming with a range of useful options, our plastic litter bins should 

always be considered for a spectrum of projects. 

Litter Bins can be customised with personalised labels which include logos, 

emblems or crests. 

Recycling has become common place in many parts of the UK with more areas 

taking part in regular recycling schemes. Marshalls offer a range of recycling 

litter bins which make recycling quick and simple. Envirobank Litter Bins not only 

promote recycling but also help keep areas clean and tidy. 

Litter bins can be made from recyled material on request. 

Litter bins can be used alongside our plastic range of bollards to help create a fully 

coordinating scheme within any landscape. 

A full range of colours are available dependent on model. For colour swatches 

please refer to page 392. 

208

209 




Heritage 

Heritage Square Hooded Litter Bin 


n Heritage Litter Bins have a classic style which is combined with 

excellent functionality. 

n Manufactured from MDPE and equipped with a 100 litre galvanised liner. We also 

offer an optional plastic moulded liner if required. 

n Supplied in black and enhanced with gold banding, they can be combined with 

our range of coordinating plastic Heritage Bollards. 

n A ground fixing kit is available on all the versions which will eliminate any 

aggravation associated with extra parts during installation. 

n Round and open top versions have an integral ballast cartridge. The square model 

has a unique double skin construction which gives it greater strength ensuring 

a long life. The hinged door splits diagonally across the bin for easy access to the 

liner, with no heavy lifting. 

n The litter aperture is moulded through and has an integral chute which ensures 

no waste is trapped between the liner and the inside of the bin body. 

n Litter bins are supplied with vandal resistant locks to ensure the security of 

the liner. Stubber plates may also be specified on round hooded and square 

hooded models. 

n Heritage Litter Bins are available in a range of Heritage colours. Please refer to 

page 392 for full colour swatches. 

HERITAGE ROUND HOODED HERITAGE ROUND OPEN TOP HERITAGE SQUARE HOODED 

570Ømm 

1071mm 

642Ømm 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 

Product Product Capacity H x W x L Weight Standard Free Wall Anchor Ground Ballast Stubber Ashtray Plastic Sack Gold 

Description Reference (L) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing Plate Cartridge Plate Liner Holder Bands 

Heritage Round Hooded with Galvanised Liner LPHBRH100 100 1071 x 570Ø 16 Any Heritage Colour n AS n n AS 

Heritage Round Open Top with Galvanised Liner LPHBOT100 100 840 x 642Ø 15 Any Heritage Colour n AS n AS 

Heritage Square Hooded with Galvanised Liner 


110 1220 x 615 x 615 29 Any Heritage Colour n AS n n AS 

840mm 

615mm 

1220mm




Metro 

Metro Hooded Litter Bin 


n The Metro range offers contemporary styling, increased strength through double 

skin features and excellent functionality. The sleek design boasts a compact 

470mm footprint that will fit into most restricted space locations. 

n The litter bin has a moulded through litter aperture which ensures waste does not 

get trapped between the liner and litter bin wall. 

n The range has a capacity of 85 to 120 litres depending on which type of liner is 

used. Two galvanised steel liners are available; 85 and 100 litres. To achieve the 

maximum capacity a plastic refuse sack can be used. 

n Metro Litter Bins also include an integral 18” plastic refuse sack retaining rim and 

ballast cartridge. 

n Litter bins come with a polished finish to accept personalisation graphics. 

n Some options include an innovative easy empty ashtray and stubber plate. For a 

full range of available options please refer to the table at the bottom of the page. 

n Metro Litter Bins are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 392 for 

full colour swatches. 

n All litter bins are manufactured from MDPE. 

METRO ROUND HOODED METRO OPEN TOP METRO FLIP TOP 

547Ø 

1082mm 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 



Metro Round Hooded with Galvanised Liner LPMBRH085 85 to 125 1082 x 547Ø 17 Any Standard Colour n AS n n n AS 

Metro Open Top with Galvanised Liner LPMBOT085 85 to 125 832 x 522Ø 12 Any Standard Colour n AS n AS 

Metro Flip Top with Galvanised Liner 


LPMBFT085 85 to 125 859 x 522Ø 13 Any Standard Colour n AS n AS 

522Ø 

832mm 

522Ømm 

859mm 

210

211 




Pioneer, Monarch and Consort 

Consort Litter Bin 


n Pioneer: A modern styled litter bin with a generous capacity, it has a double skin 

for extra strength and also opens from the front for added functionality. 

n Pioneer has a hidden slam locking system for added security and ease of 

emptying. In addition, the litter bin has a four point locking system. The exterior 

has a dimpled finish to increase resistance to fly posting. Pioneer also comes with 

a stubber plate as standard and is available in any Modern colour. Please refer to 


n Consort: A stylish hooded litter bin which comes in a range of vibrant colours. 

It has a generous 100 litre capacity making it ideal for community or commercial 

applications. The body unlocks at the base for emptying and comes with integral 

base plate. A stubber plate can be added as an optional item. Consort is available 

in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 392 for full colour swatches. 

n Monarch: A simple but highly functional litter bin. It comes with a drop in liner 

which means there is no need to disassemble the bin to remove the waste. It is 

available as a free standing bin or as the Super Monarch with the addition of a 

ribbed ballast retaining plinth. Various options are available, please refer to the 

table for full details. Monarch is available in any Standard colour. Please refer to 


n All three litter bins are made from MDPE. 

PIONEER CONSORT 

MONARCH 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 



Pioneer with Galvanised Liner LPPBOO150 130 1170 x 680Ø 27 Any Modern Colour n AS AS n n 

Consort with Galvanised Liner LPCBHO100 100 810 x 500Ø 18 Any Standard Colour AS n n 

Monarch Bin with Galvanised Liner LPMBBP085 85 1075 x 560Ø 20 Any Standard Colour n n n n 


680Ømm 

1170mm 

500Ømm 

810mm 

560Ømm 

1075mm



Bins Q50 242 


Twin Bin 

Twin Bin 

TWIN BIN 

515mm 

1161mm 

1052mm 


Bollards ............................. page 79 

n The Twin Bin offers a generous 170 litre capacity and contains two 85 litre 

steel liners. 

n The space saving design is ideal for heavily pedestrianised areas. 

n Versatile, the Twin Bin features two apertures which can be used for litter 

collection or adapted with colour coded aperture options and WRAP compliant 

graphics for recycling. 

n An easy to operate front opening design means that the liner can be removed 

without lifting it out of the bin. 

n Dimpled exterior increases the resistance to flyposting. 

n A hidden and innovative slam locking system provides added security. 

n Optional rat bait box facility. 

n Available in a full range of colours from the Modern colour range. 

Slot insert: newspapers & magazines 

No insert: general litter 

Hole insert: plastic bottles & aluminium cans 

OPTIONS 

Fixing Method 

Product Capacity 

Dimensions 

H x W x L Weight Anchor Ground Stubber Ashtray Steel Gold 

Description (L) (mm) (kg) Plate Plate Liner Bands 

Twin Bin Litter Bin 2 x 85 1161 x 1052 x 515 42 n n AS n n n 

Twin Bin Litter/Recycling Bin 2 x 85 1161 x 1052 x 515 42 n n AS n n n 

Twin Bin Recycling Bin 


2 x 85 1161 x 1052 x 515 42 n n AS n n n 

212

213 




Octaplus 

Octaplus Midi, Maxi and Jumbo Litter Bins 

OCTAPLUS 

130L and 150L sizes 

are detailed in table below 

445Ømm 

950mm 


n Octaplus is a hard wearing litter bin with excellent functionality. 

n Available in three sizes, the Octaplus has the advantage of multiple waste apertures. 

n A galvanised steel liner is supplied as standard. Additional options include an 

anchor plate and a ballast cartridge. 

n Supplied with an anti-vandal lock. 

n Litter bins are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to page 392 for full 

colour swatches. 

n Manufactured from MDPE. 

OPTIONS 


Dimensions Refuse 



Octaplus Midi with Galvanised Liner LPOBMI070 70 950 x 445Ø 12 Any Standard Colour n n 

Octaplus Maxi with Galvanised Liner LPOBMA130 130 1025 x 575Ø 14 Any Standard Colour n n 

Octaplus Jumbo with Galvanised Liner 


LPOBJM150 150 1025 x 570Ø 16 Any Standard Colour n




Regent 

Regent 50 Litre Hooded Litter Bin 



n The Regent range of litter bins features open and hooded top models which can 

be wall or post mounted. Available in a range of sizes they are ideal for waste 

collection in public areas. 

n Within the range is a 30 litre dog litter bin which can be used in areas where dog 

fouling can be prevalent. The dog litter bin is available in red only and comes with 

a hinged lid. 

n The 50 litre hooded version comes in black with a tidyman logo in gold as 

standard. The hood has an integral stubber plate and incorporates a slam locking 

system as standard to enable ease of emptying. 

n 30 litre and 50 litre models are available in any Standard colour. Please refer to 


n All Regent models are manufactured from MDPE. 

REGENT 30 & 50 LITRE REGENT 30 LITRE DOG BIN REGENT 50 LITRE HOODED 

50L size detailed 

in table below 

390mm 

525mm 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 



Regent 30L Post Mounted LPRBPM030 30 525 x 390 6 Any Standard Colour n 

Regent 30L Dog Bin with Hinged Lid LPRBDB030 30 525 x 390 7 Red n 

Regent 50L Post Mounted LPRBOPM50 50 645 x 425 7 Any Standard Colour n 

Regent 50L Hooded Post Mounted LPRBHPM50 50 795 x 440 17 Black n AS 

390mm 

525mm 

440mm 

795mm 

214

215 




Novelty 

Henrietta Hippo Litter Bin 


n Henri and Henrietta Hippo Novelty Litter Bins are an excellent way to encourage 

early litter awareness amongst children. Available in blue or pink the litter bins are 

ideal for schools, swimming pools, tourist and picnic areas and leisure complexes. 

n Litter bins come with a galvanised steel liner as standard and can accommodate 

65 litres of waste. The head twists off for ease of access to the liner. Tamper proof 

locks are also supplied as standard. 

n Anchor plate fixing is available as an additional option. 

n Other colours are available on request. 

HENRI LITTER BIN HENRIETTA LITTER BIN 

700Ømm 

n Henri and Henrietta Hippo Litter Bins are manufactured from MDPE. 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 



Henri with Galvanised Liner LPHENR165 65 1100 x 700Ø 23 Blue n 

Henrietta with Galvanised Liner 


LPHETTA65 65 1100 x 700Ø 23 Pink n 

1100mm 

Bollards ............................. page 79 

700Ømm 

1100mm



Bins Q50 242 


Envirobank 

Envirobank with paper aperture, Westminster 


Bollards ............................. page 79 

n Envirobank is designed to collect a multitude of waste materials for recycling. 

Supplied with a 140 litre or two 90 litre wheelie bins and a lightweight ‘lift to 

open’ front door, Envirobank makes recycling as easy as possible and ensures that 

it forms part of existing waste collection programmes. 

n The innovative honeycomb structure gives the litter bins extra strength. 

Furthermore, the exterior is dimpled to resist fly posting. 

n Optional sack retention can be supplied for lightweight waste collection. 

This increases the bin’s capacity to 225 litres. 

n Envirobank Split allows waste to be separated into two 90 litre wheelie bins to 

make recycling even simpler. 

n Both models have an integral ballast cartridge and are supplied with a four point 

locking system. 

n A range of WRAP compliant recycling graphics are available as standard. 

Some examples can be found below. 

n All models are manufactured from MDPE. 

ENVIROBANK ENVIROBANK SPLIT ENVIROBANK LABEL OPTIONS 

OPTIONS 

Dimensions 

Fixing Method 

Refuse 



Envirobank Standard LPEBST140 140 1395 x 658Ø 45 Any Standard Colour AS n 

Envirobank Split LPEBST180 180 (2 x 90) 1395 x 658Ø 45 Any Standard Colour AS 

Envirobank Super-Sized LPEBSS240 240 1491 x 741 x 871 55 Any Standard Colour AS 


658Ø 

1395mm 

Shown with bottle/can aperture Shown with bottle/can aperture 

658Ø 

1395mm 

216

217


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Cycle Parking 

Concrete Cycle Parking 219 

Monoscape 219 

Bellitalia 220 

Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking 221 

Ollerton 222 


Polyurethane Cycle and Motorcycle Parking 227 

Ferrocast® 228 

‹ Sineu Graff, City Cycle Stands, on Perfecta Paving, Galleons Reach, Beckton 

urban structures 

For cycle shelters please contact our 

specialist business Marshalls Urban Structures 

www.marshalls.co.uk/urbanstructures 

218

219 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Concrete Cycle Parking 

Monoscape 

Multiline Parking Rack 

MONOSCAPE CYCLE BLOCK 

Shown in 

River Gravel finish 

590 

400 


CYPA01 Cycle Stands Q50 210 Bollards ............................. page 34 

Seating ............................ page 90 


Planters ........................... page 232 

n Monoscape concrete cycle parking is manufactured from high quality 

aggregates. Cycle blocks are available in a wide variety of colours, including 

mixes manufactured to coordinate with Marshalls concrete paving. 

n The Bellitalia Multiline dual sided, concrete and steel cycle parking rack is 

available in five, seven, and nine space configurations and is manufactured using 

hot dip galvanised, polyester powder coated steel (RAL 7021), with side supports 

made from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, sandblasted and 

protected using acrylic resins. Assembly on site is required. 

n The Bellitalia Furbo double sided, modular, concrete and steel cycle parking 

rack is available in five, seven and nine space configurations. It is made of two 

circular hot dip galvanised, polyester powder coated steel tubes (RAL 7021) with 

wheel holding elements fixed to them by hollow sleeves that allow them to be 

fixed in the required position. The sliding mechanism permits the installation of 

a varying number of wheel-securing elements according to requirements (each 

cycle should be allotted a maximum space of 700mm width). Tubes are fixed 

to side supports made from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, 

sandblasted and protected using acrylic resins. Assembly on site is required.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 CYPA02 Cycle Stands Q50 210 Bollards ............................. page 37 

Seating ............................. page 96 


Concrete Cycle Parking 

Multiline and Furbo 

Multiline Parking Rack 

Furbo Parking Rack 

MULTILINE PARKING RACK 

FURBO PARKING RACK 

1995/2695/3395 


Planters ........................... page 235 


430 

2055/2755/3455 420 

Product Product Diameter Width HAG Weight Standard Free 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing 

Monoscape Cycle Block FM715 590 (Length) 305 front/190 back 400 65 Smooth Grey n 

Multiline Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (5 Space) BIAB39050 45 1955 430 134 Clear Acrylic Resin n 



Furbo Concrete and Steel Cycle Parking Rack (5 Space) BIAB38205 27 2055 820 166 Clear Acrylic Resin n 



820 

500 

220

221 



Seating ........................... page 134 


Planters ........................... page 258 

Steel and Stainless Steel 

Cycle Parking 

Pennant Stainless Steel Cycle Stands, Crown Point, Denton 

Over the past ten years there has been a significant trend towards providing a more 

sustainable transport infrastructure. This has been driven by work being carried out 

by charity organisations such as Sustrans and independent bodies such as Cycling 

England. Both are committed to promoting sustainable travel, in particular cycling, 

to our places of work and schools. 

One initiative promoting cycling across the UK is the National Cycle Network which 

operates over 230 million journeys each year, taking people to work and kids to 

school. In addition to this there are other schemes such as ‘Bike It’ and ‘Safe Routes 

to School’. More details on either of these can be found at www.sustrans.org.uk and 

www.saferoutestoschools.org.uk 

Sustrans is one of the UK’s leading sustainable transport charities, with the aim of 

reducing the environmental impact of transport and enabling people to choose 

active travel to benefit their health. 

A key element in encouraging more people to adopt sustainable travel 

methods, such as cycling, is the provision of adequate facilities within our public 

spaces and schools. This incorporates ongoing development of a high quality 

cycling infrastructure, prioritising route design and selection, signage and cycle 

parking facilities. 




Signage........................... page 306 


The range of Ollerton cycle stands provides cyclists with an ideal solution to safely 

secure and store bicycles whilst not in use. A wide variety of stands is available 

in steel and stainless steel, with a selection of styles offered to complement any 

landscape. 

Ollerton steel cycle stands are hot dip galvanised, giving excellent weathering 

qualities, and can be powder coated in a full range of standard RAL colours. 

Stainless steel cycle stands are manufactured from grade 316L stainless steel, 

meaning that they offer excellent corrosion resistance and require very little 

maintenance to retain their original contemporary appearance. 

For cycle shelters and secure storage, please ask to see our Marshalls Urban 

Structures brochure.



Cycle Parking 

Sheffield 

Stainless Steel Sheffield Cycle Stands 

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND 

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND WITH SIGN STRIP 

750 

750 

750 

250 

750 

250 

n Sheffield Cycle Stands are available galvanised, galvanised and powder coated 

and in grade 316L stainless steel. 



Seating ........................... page 134 


Planters ........................... page 258 

n Colour Options: A full standard range of RAL colours is available, please see 

page 394. 

n Fixing Options: Sheffield Cycle Stands can be supplied with either ground 

(root) fixing or base plate fixing. 

n Bespoke Options: Sheffield Cycle Stands can be adapted to client requirements. 

SHEFFIELD CYCLE STAND WITH TAPPING BAR 

SHEFFIELD DOUBLE CYCLE STAND 

950 



Signage........................... page 306 


STOCK STOCK 

750 

750 

750 

250 

750 

222

223 



Cycle Parking 

PENNANT CYCLE STAND 

740 

FIN CYCLE STAND LOOP CYCLE STAND 

1020 

DOME CYCLE STAND CURVE CYCLE STAND 

760 

800 

300 

800 

300 

800 

300 



Seating ........................... page 134 


Planters ........................... page 258 

n Stainless steel cycle stands are available in a variety of different styles to meet 

both the functional requirements and aesthetics of any scheme. 

n Finish: Manufactured from grade 316L stainless steel in a brushed satin finish. 

n Fixing Options: Available with either a ground (root) fixing or base plate. 

n RCS5 is available as galvanised steel only. 

n Hoop Cycle Stands are available galvanised, galvanised and powder coated and 

in grade 316L stainless steel. 

n Reliant and Festival Cycle Stands are supplied in galvanised and galvanised and 

powder coated steel. 

n A standard range of RAL colours is available. Please see page 394 for more details. 

600 



Signage........................... page 306 


730 

1500 

900 

300 

980 

300

HOOP CYCLE STAND 

RELIANT CYCLE STAND 

168Ø 

1200 

800 

350 

FESTIVAL CYCLE STAND 

OptiOns 

Material Finish Fixing Method Add Ons 

Demountable Cycle 

Product Product Diameter Span HAG Weight Standard Stainless Stainless Galvanised Ground Base Ground Parking Tapping 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Steel Steel Only Fix Plate Socket Sign Bar 

Sheffield Cycle Stand RCS1 48 750 750 11 PC Black 9005 n Brushed Satin n 

Sheffield Cycle Stand with Tapping Bar RCS2 48 750 750 13 PC Black 9005 n Brushed Satin n 

Sheffield Cycle Stand with Sign Strip RCS3 48 750 750 13 PC Black 9005 n Brushed Satin n 

Sheffield Double Cycle Stand RCS7 48 750 750 37 PC Black 9005 n Brushed Satin 

800 

Multiple Cycle Stand Floor Fixing RCS8 48 750 750 N/A PC Black 9005 n Brushed Satin n 

Pennant Cycle Stand 48 740 800 9 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n 

Fin Cycle Stand 48 1020 800 7 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n 

Loop Cycle Stand 48 730 900 7 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n 

Dome Cycle Stand 48 760 800 7 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n 

Curve Cycle Stand 48 1500 980 9 Grade 316 Stainless Steel n n 

RCS5 Cycle Stand RCS5 48 N/A 484 5 Galvanised n 

Hoop Cycle Stand Hoop 48 800 900 10 PC Black 9005 n n 

900 

300 

RCS5 CYCLE STAND 

Festival Safety Cycle Stand OLFC101 60 680 700 25 PC RAL Any Colour n n n n n 

Reliant Safety Cycle Stand OLFC103 168 1200 800 50 PC RAL Any Colour n n 

680 

700 

350 

51 

343 

224

225 




Seating ........................... page 121 


Steel and Stainless Steel Cycle Parking 

Arc Cycle Stands with cut out insert 

DOUBLE LOOP CYCLE STAND 

CITY CYCLE STAND 

390 

625 

550 

300 

900 

900 

300 

n All Sineu Graff cycle stands are available in either: 

– Zinc plated steel with a powder coated finish 

– Grade 316L stainless steel with a shotpeened finish. 

BOW CYCLE STAND 

WISHBONE CYCLE STAND 




n For powder coated finishes a full range of RAL (high gloss) and Sable (matt 

textured) colours is available. 

n Fixing Options: Either base plate or ground (root) fixing. 

n The Multipa System allows the layout of cycle parking to be adapted for each site. 

Using a single individual rack, a linear triple rack and a curved triple rack, different 

configurations can be created. Base plate fixing only. 

n The Cycle Tree is a combination of two elements of three clips in a semi circle 

with an information mast, an effective method of marking an area reserved for 

cycles so that it may be seen from a distance. 

540 

600 

650 

300 

900 

900 

300

ARC CYCLE STAND 

MULTIPA – SINGLE CLIP 

MULTIPA – 3 CLIP SEMI CIRCLE 

850 

276 

765 

400 

276 

900 

300 

400 

ARC CYCLE STAND WITH CUT OUT INSERT 

MULTIPA – 3 CLIP 

MULTIPA CYCLE TREE INFORMATION POST 

1470 

OptiOns 

Material Finish Fixing Method 

Product Product Span HAG Weight Standard Stainless Stainless Galvanised Ground Base 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Steel Steel Only Fix Plate 

Double Loop Cycle Stand 43.010 625 900 8 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n n 

Bow Cycle Stand 43.012 600 900 8 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n n 

City Cycle Stand 43.013 550 900 8 PC Green 6026 n n 

Wishbone Cycle Stand 43.014 650 900 8 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n n 

Arc Cycle Stand 43.0151 850 900 8 PC Ruby Red 303 n n 

Arc with Cut Out Insert 43.0155 850 900 9 PC Ruby Red 303 n n 

Multipa Single Clip 43.1101 276 400 8 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n 

Multipa 3 Clip 43.1501 1470 400 6 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n 

Multipa 3 Clip Semi Circle 43.1511 765 400 6 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n 

Multipa Cycle Tree Information Post 43.1521 N/A 2400 20 PC Green 6026 n Shot Peened n 

900 

850 

276 

300 

2400 

400 

226

227 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Polyurethane Cycle and 

Motorcycle Parking 

Islington Motorcycle Stand, Westminster 

n Ferrocast Cycle and Motorcycle Stands are both secure and attractive. Stands are 

cast around a strong inner steel core, and the durable polyurethane finish will not 

be damaged by cycle chains. 

n Cycle stands can be coordinated with existing street furniture. The Cardiff and 

Manchester Bollards have been adapted to create matching cycle stands. 

n The Red Route Cycle Stand and the Red Route and Islington Motorcycle Stands 

are supplied complete with reflective tape and signs. 

n Cycle and Motorcycle Stands are available root fixed with a 300mm root. 

CYPA05 Cycle Stands Q50 210 

Motorcycle Stands Q50 214 


Bollards ............................. page 68 

Seating ........................... page 163 




ISLINGTON MOTORCYCLE STAND RED ROUTE MOTORCYCLE STAND 

1000mm 

1050mm 

750mm 





850mm

Red Route Cycle Stands 

CARDIFF 

SHEFFIELD 

ROMFORD 

1085mm 

950mm 

950mm 

1000mm 

770mm 

STOCK 

660mm 

RED ROUTE 

MANCHESTER 

SHEFFIELD REDUCED 

SUFFOLK 

750mm 

1825mm 

750mm 

960mm 

800mm 

1050mm 

893mm 

STOCK 

965mm 

STOCK 

228

229


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Planters 

Concrete Planters 231 

Monoscape: Boulevard 232 

Monoscape: Strada 233 

Monoscape: Ovito, Scala, Sero 234 

Bellitalia: Concrete 235 

Bellitalia: Polished Reconstituted Marble 241 

Bellitalia: Concrete with Metals 246 

Sineu Graff Ecoflor Water Management System 247 

Timber Planters 248 

Sineu Graff: Rendezvous 249 

Sineu Graff: Optima 250 

Sineu Graff: Roseraie 251 

Sineu Graff: Marquise 252 

Steel Planters 253 

Sineu Graff: Roots 254 

Sineu Graff: Domino 255 

Sineu Graff: Urban Daisy Vase 256 

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters 257 



Recycled Plastic Composite Planters 261 

Intruplas 262 

Cast Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets 263 

Imperial 263 

Steel and Stainless Steel Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets 264 

Ollerton 264 

‹ Ovito Planter 

230

231 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Concrete Planters 

Classica 1620 Planter in white with Belluno Bench with Natural Stone Inset, Welsh Development Agency 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a wide range of practical and attractive concrete 

planters. Designs range from the totally utilitarian to those with a more sculptured 

aesthetic and all are functional. Use concrete planters to enhance urban 

environments with greenery or colourful floral arrangements. Also, strategically 

placed, heavy duty planters can be effectively used to guide the flow of pedestrians, 

limit vehicular access or act as ram-raid deterrents. 

Monoscape planters feature the Boulevard and Strada ranges plus, from our German 

partners Stein and Design, Ovito, Scala and Sero. 

Boulevard is available in a wide range of shapes and sizes allowing an appropriate 

plant container to accommodate every type of display, from flowers to large shrubs 

and small mature trees. Each plant container consists of a base unit (with recesses to 

assist handling) onto which are placed one, two or three rings to achieve the desired 

height. Plant container rings can be used without the base unit if direct ground 

cultivation is preferred. 

Strada comprises planters featuring clean lines and simple geometric shapes. 

Boulevard and Strada planters are available in the colours and finishes shown 

on page 383. 

Bellitalia planters are stylish and functional. Individual cast concrete planters are 

available with special features such as self-levelling systems or decorative copper 

banding. Bellitalia also offer polished reconstituted marble planters with a lustrous, 

smooth finish and are available in seven colours. Uniquely Bellitalia also supply 

concrete planters with a wrapped copper shell.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT01 Planters Q31 292 Bollards ............................. page 33 

Seating ............................ page 90 


Boulevard 

BOULEVARD CIRCULAR 

BOULEVARD SEMI CIRCULAR BOULEVARD RECTANGULAR 

2000 

730 

1200 

Plan view 

(not to scale) 

730 

Plan view 


BOULEVARD SQUARE 


Dimensions 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Weight 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish 



Boulevard Circular 700 FP310040 Circular 700Ø Variable* 337** See Monoscape Swatch 

Boulevard Circular 1200 FP350030 Semi Circular 1200Ø Variable* 644** See Monoscape Swatch 

Boulevard Square FP300004 Square 700 x 700 Variable* 330** See Monoscape Swatch 

Boulevard Rectangular 1400 FP330040 Rectangular 1400 x 700 Variable* 728** See Monoscape Swatch 

Boulevard Semi-Circular 2000 FP360040 Semi Circular 2000Ø Variable* 968** See Monoscape Swatch 

*Additional rings may be added to the standard planter to allow varying heights. 

**Boulevard Planters’ weights based on 3 extension rings, others may be created. 

1400 

730 

495 

700 

Plan view 


232

233 



Litter Bins ......................... page 90 


Strada 

Strada Planters 

STRADA CIRCULAR STRADA SQUARE 

500 

710Ø 


Dimensions 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Weight Finish 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) 



Strada Circular FP3950200 Circular 710Ø 500 184 See Monoscape Swatch 

Strada Square FP3900400 Square 500 x 500 500 109 See Monoscape Swatch 

500 

500


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT01 Planters Q31 292 Bollards ............................. page 36 Seating ............................. page 91 


Ovito, Scala, Sero 

OVITO 

480 

SCALA SERO 

1040 

1040 

Grey granite colour shown 

1200 

600 

600 


n Ovito is a modern styled elliptical concrete planter which is ordered with a 

separate concrete base to compensate for uneven ground. Available in two 

colours grey granite or anthracite basalt (black) and enhanced with a fine shot 

blast finish. 

n Scala is a classically shaped planter in mid grey with a high quality ground finish. 

n Sero planters are available in circular, square and rectangular shapes and 

also in a variety of sizes, they can be specified to create truly unique planting 

environments. All Sero planters are grey with a smooth finish to further enhance 

aesthetic appeal. 

600-1200 

See dimensions below 

Dimensions 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Weight Colour Finish 


Ovito Planter SD900005 Oval 1040 x 480 600 270 Grey Granite, Anthracite Basalt Fine Shot Blast 

Scala Planter SD902001 Square 1200 x 1200 600 900 Mid Grey Fine Ground 

Sero Planter 600 x 400 SD906051 Rectangular 600 x 400 400 143 Grey Smooth 

Sero Planter 800 SD906080 Circular 800Ø 400 226 Grey Smooth 


Sero Planter 800 x 800 SD906059 Square 800 x 800 600 393 Grey Smooth 

Sero Planter 1200 SD906081 Circular 1200Ø 600 544 Grey Smooth 



400-600 

234

235 



Seating ............................. page 96 



Concrete 

ACQUARIO PLANTER 

600 

APRILIA PLANTER 

1500 

1950 670 

650 

600 

1980 700 

800 

SAPPADA PLANTER 




n The Acquario rectangular planter features gently rounded corners. 

The walls of the planter are at least 70mm thick (maximum thickness 95mm) 

with a base of 50mm. The base of the planter features a drainage hole. 

n Acquario is steel-reinforced; the inner side walls have four galvanised steel axle 

boxes set into the concrete and connected to the steel reinforcement system. 

M16 eyebolts may be fixed to these to make it easier to install and move the 

filled planter. 

n The Acquario Planter is available with a self levelling system and adjustable feet. 

n The Aprilia Planter is rectangular and is supplied as standard with an overflow 

system, water reservoir and adjustable feet. 

n The Sappada Planter is rectangular and is available in white or grey concrete. 

It is supplied complete with a self levelling system. 

Dimensions 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Capacity Weight Finish 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (Lt) (kg) 

Acquario Planter BIAF4035 Rectangular 1950 x 670 600 700 Clear Acrylic Resin 

Aprilia Planter Rectangular 1500 x 800 650 433 850 Clear Acrylic Resin 

Sappada Planter Rectangular 3000 x 1000 446 500 1570 Clear Acrylic Resin 

3000 

446 

1000 

Pmax=~2% Pmax=~7%

Menhir Planter 

n The Menhir Planter is a trough style planter with semicircular section and 

support feet, complete with water reservoir and drainage holes. 

n Planters are manufactured using precast white or grey concrete, vibrated, 

sandblasted and protected using an acrylic resin coating. 

n To install simply place in the required position. 

MENHIR PLANTER 

2200 500 

500 

Ciotala Padova Planter 

n The Ciotala Padova is a self levelling circular planter with attractive ‘stepped’ 

lower body section and drainage hole. 

n Manufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted 

and protected using an acrylic resin coating. 

n The planter consists of a base and two upper elements divided by a copper band 

measuring 35mm high and 0.8mm thick. Both base and upper sections are steel 

reinforced, and the unit features lifting hooks to facilitate movement and installation. 

n To install, place the planter in the required position. The upper section may then 

be placed on top and will automatically be level. 

CIOTALA PADOVA 

Dimensions Seat 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Height Weight Finish 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) 

Ciotala Padova Self Levelling Planter BIAF4120 Circular 1200Ø 467 n/a 500 Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band 

Menhir Planter BIAF4037 Rectangular 2200 x 500 500 380 Clear Acrylic Resin 

467 

1200 

236

237 

CLASSICA 1220 CIRCULAR 

650 

n Classica planters consist of a circular concrete body enhanced by a copper 

band* running in the central groove around their full circumference. 

n The planter is equipped with a permanent water reservoir, rooting ventilation 

system and overflow drain. 

n Manufactured from steel-reinforced precast concrete which is vibrated, 

sandblasted and treated using a clear acrylic resin for protection. 

n The body is attached to a separate concrete base by three steel bolts in steel axle 

boxes, set into the concrete of the base. These steel bolts can be adjusted to level 

the planter to compensate for a slope of up to 6% from the original. 

n Saturnia is a circular bench mounted around a Classica 1220 planter. The bench 

consists of 12 concentric bars which rest on eight uprights fastened in a radial 

arrangement around the exterior of the planter. The bench and uprights are 

manufactured from either zinc plated, polyester powder coated steel 

(RAL 7021), or 316L grade stainless steel. 

n Classica and Saturnia are supplied pre-assembled. To install, place base 

elements and adjust level. ‘Lock’ adjustment bolts in the level position and 

manoeuvre top elements into position. The completed planter is now ready for 

positioning. The planter is equipped with hot dip galvanised steel eyes to make 

it easier to lift and move – even when fully planted. 

*Please note banding is also available in stainless steel. 

CLASSICA 1620 CIRCULAR CLASSICA 2020 CIRCULAR 

650 

1220 

1620 




Classica 1220 Circular BIAF4432 Circular 1220Ø 650 n/a 910 Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band 



650 

2020

Saturnia Planter, Steel and Romana Benches, Nero, Harbour Reach, Dorset 

SATURNIA STAINLESS STEEL SATURNIA STEEL 

435 

1770Ø 

1220Ø 

650 




Saturnia Stainless Steel BIAF3012 Circular 1770Ø 650 435 1014 Clear Acrylic Resin 

Saturnia Steel BIAF30126 Circular 1770Ø 650 435 1014 Clear Acrylic Resin 

435 

1770Ø 

1220Ø 

650 

238

239 

Cristina A Self Levelling Planter 

n Cristina Planters are self levelling, oval shaped planters complete with water 

reservoir, consisting of a base and two upper elements divided by a polished 

copper band* measuring 52mm high and 0.8mm thick. 

n Manufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, vibrated, sandblasted 

and protected using an acrylic resin coating. Both base and upper sections are 

steel reinforced. 

n Units feature steel stirrups and lifting hooks to facilitate movement 

and installation. 

n To install, place the base of the planter in the required position. The upper section 

may then be placed on top and will automatically be level. 

*Please note banding is also available in stainless steel. 

CRISTINA A SELF LEVELLING PLANTER CRISTINA B SELF LEVELLING PLANTER 

565 

1500 

478 

478 




Cristina A Self Levelling Planter BIAF4430 Oval 1500 x 565 478 n/a 350 Clear Acrylic Resin with Copper Band 

Cristina B Self Levelling Planter BIAF4437 Oval 2000 x 820 600 n/a 880 Clear Acylic Resin with Copper Band 

820 

2000 

600 

600

Ischia Triple 

ISCHIA TWIN ISCHIA TRIPLE 

727 

1300 

n Ischia Planters are modular planters available in twin and triple configurations. 

n Planters are hemispherical in shape and are set on trapezoidal self levelling bases. 

n Manufactured using precast white or grey granite concrete, planters are vibrated, 

sandblasted and finally finished with a clear acrylic resin coating. 

n Planter sections are reinforced with steel and concrete bases feature two external 

flat plates. These are linked together using steel M14 threaded bars and blind 

brass bolts. 

n To install the planters simply loosen the blind bolts on the bases. Then level the 

planter and re-tighten the blind bolts. 




Ischia Twin B90 BIAV3830 Quarter Circle 1300 x 727 613 n/a 364 Clear Acylic Resin 

Ischia Triple B90 BIAV38303 Quarter Circle 1300 x 1300 613 n/a 519 Clear Acrylic Resin 

1300 

1300 

240

241 



Seating ............................. page 99 


Polished Reconstituted Marble 

Primavera Planter in Porfido colourway 

n A unique range of planters which combine function and form with a unique 

polished finish; planters are available in a full range of colours. 

n Planters are manufactured from a fine marble aggregate with a maximum 

particle size of 25mm. Marble aggregates are sourced from specific regions in 

Italy. The use of natural marble aggregates ensures long-term colour consistency 

and the colours of the planters will not fade. 

n Each planter is polished to leave a smooth finish which is finally treated with a 

protective varnish to give a polished effect. 

n The upper rim of each planter features a 40mm diameter brass plate. 




Polished Reconstituted Marble Colours 




Nero Porfido

Giove Large Planter, in Nero, St David’s, Cardiff 

GIOVE PLANTER 

735~ 

Ø1500 

Ø1002 

n Giove planters provide a contemporary and elegant way to introduce planting 

into an environment. 

n Available in two sizes the Giove planter has a capacity of 501 litres. The Giove 

large planter was specifically designed to accommodate the roots of a tree and 

has a large capacity of 1224 litres. 

n Planters are manufactured from a fine marble aggregate with a maximum 

particle size of 25mm. Marble aggregates are sourced from specific regions in 

Italy. The use of natural marble aggregates ensures long-term colour consistency 

and the colours of the planters will not fade. 

n Each planter is polished to leave a smooth finish which is finally treated with a 

protective varnish to give a polished effect. 

n The upper rim of each planter features a 40mm diameter brass plate. 

n To install the planters simply place in the desired position on the ground and 

level the units using the eyebolts provided. 

GIOVE LARGE PLANTER 

Dimensions 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Capacity Weight Finish 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (L) (kg) 

Giove Planter Circular 1500Ø 735 501 Polished 

Giove Large Planter Circular 1900Ø 1100 1224 Polished 

1100 

1900 

930.5 

242

243 

PRIMAVERA 

Rosso shown 

ESTATE 

Nero shown 

520 

1150 

760 

830 

380 

540 

Primavera Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff 

Estate Planter in Porfido, Penarth Marina, Cardiff 




Primavera with Self Levelling System BIAR3610 Circular 830Ø 520 n/a 360 Polished 

Estate with Self Levelling System BIAF3601 Circular 1150Ø 540 n/a 594 Polished

n Primavera and Estate planters are equipped with a self levelling system 

capable of compensating for inclines of up to 10%. They also feature a water 

reservoir and overflow drain. 

n When installing the planter simply place in the desired position on the ground 

and level the unit using the eyebolt provided. 

n The Orione planter features an internal stainless steel container to house soil 

and plants. 

n For installation a framework comprising steel stirrups anchored to axel boxes and 

eyebolts make the planter easier to move. When installing the planter simply 

place in the desired position on the ground and remove the eyebolts used for 

lifting. 

n The Luna and Venere planters are equipped with a water reservoir and 

overflow drain. 

n A framework comprising ring, axle boxes and eyebolts make the planter easy to 

lift and move. When installing the planter, simply place in the desired position on 

the ground and remove the eyebolts used for lifting. 

LUNA 

860 

450 

ORIONE 

Verde shown 

VENERE 

Nero shown Nero shown 




Orione BIAR3610 Circular 520Ø 815 n/a 242 Polished 

Luna BIAF3610 Circular 860Ø 450 n/a 135 Polished 

Venere BIAF3609 Circular 1153Ø 590 n/a 800 Polished 

590 

520Ø 

815 

1153 

716 

520Ø 

244

245 

Luna Planter with circular bench, Giallo 

VENERE WITH CIRCULAR BENCH 

435 

1770Ø 

Porfido shown Giallo shown 

590 

LUNA WITH CIRCULAR BENCH 




Venere with Circular Bench BIBF36106 Circular 1770Ø 590 435 890 Polished 

Luna with Circular Bench BIBF36092 Circular 1370Ø 520 435 430 Polished 

435 

1370Ø 

520



Seating ........................... page 101 


Concrete with Metals 

Ginevra Circular Steel/Concrete Planter 

n Ginevra is an elegantly styled planter combining concrete with powder 

coated steel. The planter consists of three components. The first is a round base 

manufactured from precast concrete which is coated with a clear acrylic resin. 

The second is the supporting structure which is made from hot dip galvanised 

steel which is finished with a polyester powder coating. The final part is an 

extractable planter liner which is manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel 

and powder coated in a copper coloured polyurethane glaze. 

n Cosmoarredo is a classically styled concrete planter which is embellished with 

copper to give a fantastic aesthetic. The planter is made from precast concrete 

which is then wrapped in 1mm thick copper and finished with a decorative rim 

of your choice. Choices of rim are natural stone, iroko or pine wood and grey/ 

white concrete. The internal diameter of the rim is 660mm. 

n Both planters feature the Bellitalia patented self levelling system. The Ginevra can 

compensate for slopes of up to 5% from horizontal. The Cosmoarredo up to 10%. 

GINEVRA CIRCULAR STEEL/CONCRETE PLANTER COSMOARREDO 860 COPPER SELF LEVELLING PLANTER 

820Ø 

565Ø 

716 

800 

820Ø 

565Ø 

n Planters are equipped with lifting eyes to make them easier to move. 




716 

800 

Ginevra Circular Steel/Concrete Planter BIAF3710 Circular 820Ø 800 n/a 118 Clear Acrylic Resin/Polyurethane Glaze 

Cosmoarredo Self Levelling Planter BIAF5004 Circular 860Ø 444 n/a 140 Copper Coated Concrete/Decorative Rim 

444 


860Ø 



246

247 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT08 Planters Q31 292 

Ecoflor 

Sustainable Planting Water Management System 

Ecoflor is an integrated planting and sustainable water management system, 

developed by Sineu Graff in partnership with Olivier Brière; an ITIAPE qualified 

Landscape Engineer and the Chief Landscape Engineer responsible for the 

landscaping of French cities such as Orléan and Aix les Bains. 

Sineu Graff work with many municipalities in France who wish to re-introduce 

greenery into urban areas, but find it difficult due to hot climate conditions and 

the necessity to conserve water. The development of the Ecoflor System helps 

municipalities to achieve their sustainable town plans. 

The Ecoflor system uses the concept of passive subirrigation. The Ecoflor planter 

liner is filled with Ecoflor clay balls; these porous balls not only absorb and retain 

water, but also the space between them allows water to drain freely and air to 

circulate, increasing the amount of oxygen that reaches roots. The Ecoflor clay balls 

sit on top of a micro-perforated plate that covers a water reservoir in the bottom 

of the liner. This provides a constant supply of water and nutrients which are 

transported by the clay balls through capillary action. 

The Ecoflor system has three main components: 

n Ecoflor planter liner: a liner that has been designed to allow both air and water 

to circulate; it consists of a micro-perforated plate, a water reservoir beneath it 

and an aeration system. 

n Ecoflor clay balls: these small clay balls both absorb and retain water; they also 

allow the circulation of water and air throughout the planter by capillary action. 

n Ecoflor Substrate mix: A planting substrate with the correct mix of organic 

fertiliser. 

Benefits of the Ecoflor System: 

Reduced watering: 

n by optimising plants’ use of the humidity in the ambient air and rain water. 

n by water storage that releases water gradually through capillary action. 

Improvement of the quality of water retained in the tub 

n the micro-perforated plate serves to oxygenate the water. 

n the overflow system removes excess water eliminating the risk of stagnation. 

Strengthening of the plant and improvement of the planting quality: 

n by strengthening the plant’s root system through growth support and an 

enriched substrate. 

n continuous provision of and release of nutritious elements. 

Reduced maintenance 

n due to the longevity of the substrate. 

n through reduced weeding. 

The Ecoflor Planting System 


1. Fill base with clay balls 2. Stand plant directly on top 

3. Fill 2/3 around plant with clay balls 4. Fill remainder with substrate mix 

5. Plant smaller plants 6. Water thoroughly


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Timber Planters 

Bespoke commission: Planting Benches, Arles Dufor Square, Oullins, France 

Sineu Graff Planters provide elegant planting solutions for urban landscapes. 

Styles range from the traditional to the contemporary and include designs such 

as the Rendezvous and Optima which complement seating ranges. Sineu Graff 

source timber from sustainably managed forests and hold PEFC certification for 

wood of European origin and FSC certification for exotic woods. 

The timber used in manufacture is protected using a water-based, solvent-free 

treatment. This is electrostatically-applied by a robotic pistol to an overall thickness 

of 135 microns when dry, giving the timber a smooth and natural finish whilst 

protecting it against water, insect and fungal ingress. 

There are several shapes and sizes available in each style of planter. Should you wish to 

plant trees we also offer a larger planter which is supplied with a galvanised steel liner, 

a water reservoir and fixed lifting points. 

The large square planter is specially designed to accommodate large root bases and 

requirements for maximum available root space, it is supplied with height adjustable 

feet as standard. 

A range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt textured) colours are available for each 

model, please refer to individual product pages for more details. 

Planters feature height adjustable stainless steel feet so that they can be levelled 

easily on gradients of up to 10% from horizontal. 

Planters are supplied as standard with a galvanised steel liner with fixed lifting points 

or with the option of retractable steel lifting points (dependent on model). Standard 

galvanised liners also have a built in water reservoir to keep flower beds moist. In 

addition to the galvanised steel liner we can also supply a high-density moulded 

polyethylene liner which also has an in built water reservoir and fixed lifting points only. 

Bespoke commissions for planting solutions can be undertaken. The planting benches 

shown above were designed to meet the planning scope of the Arles Dufor Square. 

The landscape architect needed to provide a large relaxational area and enhance the 

built environment with planting. The solution, the planting benches, are particularly 

suited to urban areas where direct planting into the ground is not possible and provide 

a high quality, light and streamlined aesthetic. 

248

249 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT04 Planters Q31 292 Seating ........................... page 112 


Rendezvous 

Rendezvous Planters 

n Designed to coordinate with the Rendezvous seat and litter bin, the Rendezvous 

planter draws its originality from a geometric shape and wooden, vertical slatted 

panels. 

n The panels comprise overlapping wooden slats, held together with supports on 

the inside of the panels to produce a perfect aesthetic. The rim and the upright 

supports are made of laser cut, bent sheet steel. Each support pole has an 

adjustable stainless steel foot. 

n The wood is coated with water based solvent free stain emulsion in our 

automated process. Steel parts are treated with the Powder Blast system, after 

cleaning and blasting they are coated with a base layer of epoxy powder and an 

outer coating polyester powder. 

n The support poles and rim are available in standard RAL colours. 

n A galvanised steel liner with fixed handles and water reservoir is supplied as 

standard. Retractable steel handles are also available (dependent on model). 

Additionally a high-density moulded polyethylene liner with fixed lifting points 

and water reservoir is also available. 

RENDEZVOUS PLANTERS 


Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 

Steel Liner Polyethylene Liner 

Dimensions Retractable Height 

Product Product Shape L x W Height Weight Finish Capacity Water Capacity Water Liner Lifting Adjustable 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) (L) Tank (L) (L) Tank (L) Points 

(steel liner only) 

Feet 

Rendezvous Planter 350L 299.678P Square 785 x 785 930 140 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 350 80 270 50 n n 

Rendezvous Planter 490L 299.679P Square 974 x 974 1094 235 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 490 110 n/a n/a n n 

1094 

930 

974 

4 

785 

118 

87.35 º


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT04 Planters Q31 292 Seating ........................... page 123 


Optima 

Optima Planters 

n Designed to coordinate with the Optima Outdoor Living Rooms range, the 

Optima planter offers an elegant, contemporary planting solution with horizontal 

wooden slats and streamlined steel uprights. 

n The panels comprise solid wooden slats, fixed with stainless steel fastenings to 

steel poles inside the container to provide an immaculate finish. The upright 

supports are made of laser cut, bent sheet steel. Each support pole has an 

adjustable stainless steel foot. 





n The support poles and rim are available in standard RAL colours. 





OPTIMA PLANTERS 

620 

H 


Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 






Feet 

Optima Planter 80L 299.530P Square 640 x 640 620 30 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 80 20 60 20 n n 

Optima Planter 200L 299.531P Rectangular 640 x 1280 620 59 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 200 50 n/a n/a n n 

Optima Planter 350L 299.532P Square 920 x 920 960 175 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 350 80 270 50 

Optima Planter 490L 299.533P Square 1100 x 1100 960 230 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 490 110 n/a n/a 

Optima Planter 1080L 299.534P Square 1400 x 1400 1300 390 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 1080 210 n/a n/a 

L 

1040 

250

251 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Roseraie 

Roseraie Planters 

n Roseraie Planters combine polyester powder coated steel with hardwood timber 

to create a fusion of natural and contemporary aesthetics. Posts are painted 

as standard in anthracite grey RAL 7016, other RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt 

textured) colours are available on request. 

n The Large Square model has 100 x 100 mm section corner posts and the Square 

and Rectangular models have 80 x 80 mm section corner posts. 

n The side panels are constructed from 105mm wide and 20mm thick, narrow 

hardwood sections. 

n Height adjustable stainless steel feet are supplied as standard. 


standard. Retractable steel handles or a high-density moulded polyethylene liner 

with fixed lifting points and water reservoir is available (dependent on model). 

PLNT04 Planters Q31 292 

n A larger version of the Square Planter is also available should you wish to use your 

planter to grow trees. Details can be found in the table below. 

n The frame and posts are available in other RAL (high gloss) colours on request. 

Panel sections are a natural shade as standard and are also available in two other 

colours, moss green RAL 6005 and pure white RAL 9010. 

ROSERAIE PLANTERS 

The following poles are available 


Diamond Point Ball Flat 

Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 


Dimensions Height 




Feet 

Roseraie Planter 80L 299.650P Square 640 x 640 640 75 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 80 20 60 20 n n 

Roseraie Planter 200L 299.655P Rectangular 640 x 1280 640 110 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 200 50 n/a n/a n n 

Roseraie Planter 350L 299.651P Square 920 x 920 1000 150 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 350 80 270 50 

Roseraie Planter 490L 299.654P Square 1100 x 1100 1090 160 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 490 110 n/a n/a 

Roseraie Planter 1080L 299.656P Square 1400 x 1400 1370 215 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 1080 210 n/a n/a 

H 

L 

640 

1280




Marquise 

Marquise Planters 

n Marquise is manufactured from tropical hardwood which is treated with an 

electrostatically-applied varnish. This gives the planter a natural aesthetic as well 

as a high quality smooth finish. 

n The large square model has 100 x 100 mm section corner posts and the Square 

and Rectangular models have 80 x 80 mm section corner posts. These are then 

capped with one of the designs shown. 

n The side panels are constructed from 105mm wide and 20mm thick narrow 

hardwood sections. 



standard. Retractable steel handles or a high-density moulded polyethylene 

liner with fixed lifting points and water reservoir is also available (dependent 

on model). 



n The hardwood is supplied in a natural shade as standard. The range is also 

available in two other colours, moss green RAL 6005 and pure white RAL 9010. 

MARQUISE PLANTERS 


Pole options 

Diamond Point Ball 

Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 






Feet 

Marquise Planter 80L 299.680P Square 640 x 640 640 85 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 80 20 60 20 n n 

Marquise Planter 200L 299.685P Rectangular 640 x 1280 640 120 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 200 50 n/a n/a n n 

Marquise Planter 350L 299.681P Square 920 x 920 900 150 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 350 80 270 50 

Marquise Planter 490L 299.684P Square 1100 x 1100 1000 165 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 490 110 n/a n/a 

Marquise Planter 1080L 299.686P Square 1400 x 1400 1200 275 Tropical Hardwood with Natural Shade Protection 1080 210 n/a n/a 

H 

640 

640 

L 

650 

1280 

252

253 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel Planters 

Bespoke Commission, Steel Planters ‘Four Seasons’, Besançon, France 

Sineu Graff Planters profiled in steel provide a unique contemporary aesthetic to 

any environment and enable the creation of green urban spaces. 

Roots and Domino planters feature side panels with double sheets of steel, which 

are profiled and mounted onto hardwood supporting legs. The surface sheet has 

a pattern laser cut into it and the base sheet provides a contrasting finish or colour 

which shows through the motif and highlights it. A full range of RAL (gloss) and 

Sable (matt) colours are available. Both planters are available in five sizes. 

For truly unique schemes it is possible to commission planters with bespoke 

designs. Sineu Graff was recently briefed to develop planters for inclusion in a 

design concept that would create an identity for and enhance the square in front 

of the Regional Music Academy in Besançon. The resulting visual concept was 

based on a theme of the four seasons and using striking patterns using letters and 

text was well received. The planters, now positioned around the terraces, provide 

a clean, contemporary aesthetic and the planting offers shade and a fresh, green 

environment. 

The Urban Daisy Vase is ideal for the provision of vertical planting, positioned in rows 

or clusters they can be used to breathe new life into any urban space.




Roots 

Roots Planters, Noisy Le Sec, France 

n The Roots planter works in harmony with even the most contemporary of 

outside spaces. Combining wooden uprights with steel panels featuring laser-cut 

roots motifs which are highlighted by contrasting steel sheets beneath them. 

n The planter is mechanically assembled on wooden poles, held together with 

specially crafted stainless steel fastenings. The frame structure holds the planting 

tub which is positioned directly in on corner beads fixed onto each foot. 

n The support poles are made of wood and are 100mm x 100mm wide 

(80mm x 80mm for the 640mm x 640mm version). Each pole has an adjustable 

stainless steel foot. 









ROOTS CONTAINERS 

650 

H 


Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 






Feet 

Roots Planter 80L 299.673P Square 640 x 640 650 85 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 80 20 60 20 n n 

Roots Planter 200L 199.674P Rectangular 640 x 1280 650 120 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 200 50 n/a n/a n n 

Roots Planter 350L 299.578P Square 920 x 920 900 175 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 350 80 270 50 

Roots Planter 490L 299.677P Square 1100 x 1100 950 240 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 490 110 n/a n/a 

Roots Planter 1080L 299.676P Square 1400 x 1400 1200 360 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 1080 210 n/a n/a 

L 

1280 

254

255 




Domino 

Domino Planters, St Vallier, France 

n Domino Planters are uniquely styled with laser-cut motifs and bright colours 

to create a truly vibrant aesthetic. They combine treated hardwood posts with 

polyester powder coated steel panels. 

n Side panels are laser-cut with 28mm square motifs before being zinc plated and 

polyester powder coated in anthracite grey RAL 7016. Back panels, which are 

coated in traffic yellow RAL 1023, are added to enhance the motif. 

n The panels are connected to the posts by anti-vandal bolts and are reinforced at 

the top and bottom by u-shaped returns. 








n Hardwood posts are supplied in a natural shade as standard. Other RAL (high 

gloss) and Sable (matt textured) colours are available as options. 

DOMINO PLANTERS 

640 

H 


Galvanised 

OptiOns 

High Density 






Feet 

Domino Planter 80L 299.673P Square 640 x 640 640 85 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 80 20 60 20 n n 

Domino Planter 200L 199.674P Rectangular 640 x 1280 640 120 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 200 50 n/a n/a n n 

Domino Planter 350L 299.578P Square 920 x 920 900 175 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 350 80 270 50 

Domino Planter 490L 299.677P Square 1100 x 1100 950 240 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 490 110 n/a n/a 

Domino Planter 1080L 299.676P Square 1400 x 1400 1200 360 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 1080 210 n/a n/a 

L 

1280




Urban Daisy Vase 

Urban Daisy Vase shown in Annapurno White with copper rim 

URBAN DAISY VASE 420L 

1270 

Ø930 

Ø720 

URBAN DAISY VASE 265L 


n A unique design, the Urban Daisy Vase exudes simplicity and is ideal for vertical 

planting. Elegant and slender it stands out thanks to its painted steel effect, its 

contrasting cast iron rim and its daisy motif. 

n The Urban Daisy Vase is made of steel and features a cast iron rim held in place by 

a single clasp. 

n The vase is supplied as standard with an internal high density polyethylene liner 

featuring a rotary lifting ring and housing a water tank. 

n The steel outer and cast iron rim are treated with the Powder Blast system, after 



n The Urban Daisy Vase features a daisy motif applied around the top half, 

personalised bespoke motifs can also be custom ordered. 

n Available in three colour combinations as standard: Annapurno White with a 

copper rim, Cannon Blue with an Annapurno White rim and Brown Copper with 

an Annapurno White rim. 

Shown in Cannon Blue with Annapurno White rim Shown in Brown Copper with Annapurno White rim 

High Density 

Polyethylene Liner 

Product Product Shape 

Dimensions 

Diameter Height Weight Finish Capacity Water 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) (L) Tank (L) 

Urban Daisy Vase 420L 299.710 Round 930 1300 105 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 420 92 

Urban Daisy Vase 265L 299.700 Round 800 1200 90 Polyester Powder Coated Steel 265 53 

1225 

Ø800 

Ø600 

256

257 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel and Stainless Steel Planters 

Ollerton Festival Circular Planter, Kirklees 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of steel and stainless steel planters which 

can be used to brighten up urban landscapes. They may also be used for restricting 

vehicular access within pedestrian areas either permanently or temporarily. 

Ollerton Planters feature M3, Festival and Bleasdale. Each is available in a variety of 

sizes and shapes. 

M3 Planters are made from 316L grade stainless steel which is satin polished to give 

a contemporary finish. A major benefit of stainless steel planters is that they will not 

rust and require minimal maintenance. 

Festival and Bleasdale Planters are manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip 

galvanised before being polyester powder coated in a RAL colour of your choice. 

Festival Planters can be specified with seating incorporated. 

Larger models of Ollerton planters can be specified with sub channels for ease 

of movement. 

Imperial and Ollerton Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are ideal for areas 

where ground space is restricted and planters are unsuitable. 

Imperial Hanging Basket Columns are manufactured from mild steel which can 

be coated in a colour of your choice. The hanging basket brackets attached to the 

column are in cast aluminium. Brackets are also available as single items allowing 

them to be wall mounted. Brackets can include personalised motifs such as coats of 

arms to special order. 

Ollerton M3 Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are manufactured from 

316L grade stainless steel. Festival Hanging Basket Columns and Brackets are 

manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated in a RAL colour 

of your choice. Brackets can be supplied as single items to allow for wall mounting 

of hanging baskets.



Seating ........................... page 134 




M3 

M3 Flared Top Planter 

M3 CIRCULAR FLARED TOP 

565Ø 

785 





n Coordinating with the M3 range these stainless steel planters add a clean 

modern aesthetic. 

M3 RECTANGULAR FLARED TOP 

M3 CIRCULAR TERRACE FLARED TOP 

n Manufactured from high quality 316L grade polished stainless steel, the M3 

Circular Flared Top features a commercial planting basket in stainless steel. 

The rectangular and circular terrace sizes have a GRP liner. Liners can be specified 

in a colour of your choice. 

n Rectangular and circular terrace planters can be specified with sub channels 

to allow movement by fork lift. 

Dimensions 



M3 Circular Top Flared OLPS106 Circular 565Ø 785 28 316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel 

M3 Rectangular OLPS1010 Rectangular 1840 x 940 360 340 316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel 

M3 Circular Terrace Flared Top OLPS1090 Circular 1530Ø 625 154 316L Grade Satin Polished Stainless Steel 

1840 

1530Ø 

625 

360 

258

259 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Festival 

Festival Circular Terrace Rolled Top Planter, Havering 

n Ollerton Festival is a range of polyester powder coated steel planters. 

n Available in circular, rectangular and square shapes they can assist in adding floral 

arrangements to your landscape. 

n Large planters may be specified at 900mm high with integral Festival Seating. 

n Planters are hot dip galvanised and then powder coated in a colour of your 

choice. The internal liner may also be colour coded. 

n Larger planters can be specified to allow movement by fork lift. 

n Rolled top planters are also available with flared tops as special order items. 


PLNT03 Planters Q31 292 Bollards ............................. page 50 

Seating ........................... page 139 



FESTIVAL CIRCULAR TERRACE ROLLED TOP 

FESTIVAL CIRCULAR ROLLED TOP 




Dimensions 



Festival Circular Terrace Rolled Top OLPL1090 Circular 1530Ø 625 154 PC any RAL Colour 

Festival Circular Rolled Top OLPL1050 Circular 505Ø 620 22 PC any RAL Colour 

Festival Circular Large Rolled Top OLPL1060 Circular 650Ø 620 29 PC any RAL Colour 

1530 

505Ø 

FESTIVAL CIRCULAR LARGE ROLLED TOP 

650Ø 

620 

620 

625

Festival Square Planter with Festival Straight Seat 

FESTIVAL SQUARE FESTIVAL RECTANGULAR ROLLED TOP 

1100 

1500 sq 

BLEASDALE SQUARE LATTICE FRAME 

1210 

Dimensions 



Festival Square OLPL2040 Square 1500 x 1500 1100* 360 PC any RAL Colour 

Festival Rectangular Rolled Top OLPL1010 Rectangular 1900 x 1000 360 360 PC any RAL Colour 

Bleasdale Square Lattice Frame OLPB103 Square 1210 x 1210 890 280 PC any RAL Colour 

*Festival Square Planter is also available at 900mm high for use with integral seating 

890 

1900 

360 

260

261 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Recycled Plastic Composite Planters 

Intruplas 

Square Planter with Modular Seat 

Recycled Plastic Composite (RPC) Planters are cost effective ways of adding planting 

arrangements to landscapes. Marshalls Street Furniture offer a number of different styles 

and sizes. Raised planting beds allow arrangements to be protected from foot traffic. 

They are produced using plastic waste and manufactured using extruded techniques. 

RPC requires minimal maintenance. Non-porous, it is not subject to rot, algae or fungal 

growth. As a result it is suitable for use in very wet or damp conditions. The non porous 

surface also means that planters are resistant to physical attacks. They are easy to clean 

and paint and marker pen can easily be removed with thinners without compromising 

the finish of the product. RPC planters are also highly durable and robust as the material 

does not crack or splinter. 

As RPC is less susceptible to degradation over time, recycled planters have an extended 

product life. Therefore, whole life costs can be a third of the cost of traditional materials.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PLNT05 

Planters Q31 292 Bollards ............................. page 85 

Seating ........................... page 167 

Recycled Plastic Composite Planters 

Intruplas 

SQUARE PLANTER SQUARE PLANTER WITH STAINLESS STEEL 

SQUARE PLANTER WITH MODULAR SEAT RAISED BED PLANTER 

500mm 

500mm 

1000mm 



Product L x W Height Height Weight Finish 


Square Planter 500 x 500 500 n/a 76 RPC Grain Effect 

Square Planter With Stainless Steel 1000 x 1000 500 n/a 178 RPC Grain Effect 

Square Planter With Modular Seat (Small)* 2200 x 500 500 500 178 RPC Grain Effect 

Square Planter With Modular Seat (Large)* 3200 x 1000 500 500 376 RPC Grain Effect 

Raised Bed Planter 2400 x 1200 150 n/a 55 RPC Grain Effect 






*Seat Section Dimensions 1200mm x 330mm 

2200mm 

3200mm 

500mm 

500mm 

1200mm 

1000mm 

2400mm 

1200mm 

Picnic Tables .................... page 168 


500mm 

See table 

262

263 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Cast Hanging Basket Columns 

and Brackets 

IMPERIAL HANGING BASKET COLUMN 

1334 

114Ø 

356Ømax 

PLNT06 Planters Q31 292 

Hanging Plant Containers Q31 294 


Bollards ............................. page 42 

Seating ........................... page 110 


n Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of hanging basket columns which allow 

floral arrangements to be placed above ground level, either with a supporting 

column or wall bracket. 

n Imperial Hanging Basket Column is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip 

galvanised before being coated in a RAL colour of your choice. 

n The Hanging Basket Bracket is manufactured from cast aluminium. 

n Brackets are available separately to enable wall mounting. 

n Hanging Basket Columns are available with two spandrel brackets as standard 

but can be supplied with three or four spandrel brackets on request. 

n Imperial Basket Brackets also come with the option of motifs. 

Imperial Basket Bracket 

IMPERIAL BASKET BRACKET 

600 

356 max 



Signage & Lamp Columns .. page 307



Hanging Plant Containers Q31 294 

Steel and Stainless Steel Hanging 

Basket Columns and Brackets 

M3 HANGING BASKET COLUMN 

3490 Typ 

750 

1314 

Concrete 

GEN 1 MASS 

750sq 

FESTIVAL HANGING BASKET COLUMN 

1334 

114Ø 

114Ø 

356Ømax 

150 Typ 

356Ømax 


n M3 Hanging Basket Column and Bracket are manufactured from 316L grade 

stainless steel which is satin polished to give a smooth, contemporary aesthetic. 



n Brackets are available separately to allow for wall mounting. 

M3 BASKET BRACKET 

n Festival Hanging Basket Column and Bracket are manufactured from mild steel 

which is hot dip galvanised before being coated in a RAL colour of your choice. 



n Brackets are available separately to allow for wall mounting. 

n Personalised motifs may also be added to brackets. 

Column Basket Fixing Method 

Product Product Height Width Diameter Weight Finish Sub Surface 


Imperial Hanging Basket Column OLHC102 3490 1334 356 41 PC any RAL Colour n 

Imperial Hanging Basket Bracket OLHC201 n/a 600 356 8 PC any RAL Colour n 

M3 Hanging Basket Column OLHS102 3490 1314 356 50 316L Grade Stainless Steel n 

M3 Hanging Basket Bracket OLHS201 n/a 600 356 5 316L Grade Stainless Steel n 

Festival Hanging Basket Column OLHF102 3490 1334 356 50 PC any RAL Colour n 

Festival Hanging Basket Bracket OLHF201 n/a 600 356 8 PC any RAL Colour n 

600 

356Ø max 

FESTIVAL BASKET BRACKET 

600 

356Ø max 

264

265


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Tree Protection 

Tree Frames with Inset Surfaces 267 

Monoscape: Treepave Frame with Inset Paving 267 

Ollerton: Tree Frame for Resin Bound Paving 270 

Cast Iron Tree Protection 271 

Sineu Graff: Series 4000 272 

Imperial 273 

Stainless Steel Tree Protection 275 

Ollerton: M3 Tree Grilles and Guards 276 

Steel Tree Protection 277 



Polyurethane Tree Protection 283 

Ferrocast® 283 

Concrete Tree Protection 286 

Bellitalia 286 

‹ 58P Series Tree Grille in Ferrocast with Monoscape Cubes on Buff Saxon Paving, 

Leeds Valley Business Park, West Yorkshire 

266

267 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 TREE08 Tree Grilles Q50 262 

Tree Frames with Inset Paving 

Treepave 

Treepave: Milton Keynes bespoke specification with Conservation Silver Grey paving 

Treepave frames with inset paving allow paving to be laid close up to the base of 

a tree. They are suitable for pedestrianised locations which are busy or congested, 

allowing paving to be installed close to tree trunks and extending the area of the 

footways that can be trafficked. Treepave frames with inset paving facilitate ‘inclusive 

access’ as they provide a smooth surface without impediments or trip hazards for 

wheelchair users and the visually impaired. Irrigation channels have been designed 

to be an appropriate width so that they are easily traversed and will not trap wheels 

or walking canes. 

Trees play an essential role in urban landscape design and the building of 

sustainable communities; they are recognised as providing aesthetic, social and 

health benefits. Laying paving close to the base of a tree can provide an enhanced 

urban environment, reducing street clutter and providing a continuous run of 

paving through an area. Integral irrigation channels allow adequate watering and 

aeration of the rootball of the tree, ensuring that the tree continues to grow and 

remain healthy. 

Treepave frames with inset paving can be supplied in standard designs or bespoke 

specifications created to order. Custom made tree frames can be fabricated in 

shapes to complement or coordinate with paving layouts. The inset layout can be 

adapted to contain most paving specifications including concrete, block and natural 

stone. Paving is water cut to size giving a crisp finish to edges, and Marshalls water 

cutting capabilities allow paving to be cut with either curved or straight edges. 

Treepave is supplied in kit form, the unit comprises a robust steel frame which is 

divided by irrigation channels and a pack of water-cut paving to bond into it. 


Features 

n Long life span is assured as the frame is made from galvanised sheet steel to 

prevent rust and corrosion from water and other chemicals. 

n Integral irrigation channels allow watering of the rootball and enable adequate 

aeration of the soil. 

n Clean installation finish: each piece of paving is encapsulated so there is no 

paving to paving contact, reducing the risk of spalling. Paving is water cut to 

provide an engineered fit into the frame. 

n Supplied in kit form with pre-cut paving: easy to install, kit is supplied 

with illustrated step by step instructions and supported by online video 

demonstration. 

n Easy installation: the frame comprises two halves bolted together; simply push 

together around an existing tree trunk. 

n Reduced risk from manual handling: each unit of paving is installed 

independently and each unit is below the weights stipulated in manual handling 

regulations. 

n Standard sizes are 1200mm 2 , 1800mm 2 

n Specify continuous Marshalls paving: standard Frames accommodate Marshalls 

Saxon, Conservation and Perfecta paving in 50mm thicknesses. 

n Bespoke frames can be made to suit any frame or aperture size, paving thickness 

or paving design layout. Frames for natural stone can also be created.




Treepave – Standard Specification 

Treepave standard specification frames can be specified either as part of new 

installation or retro-fitted into existing, co-ordinating Marshalls paving. Supplied in 

kit form, with pre-cut paving, the units are extremely easy to install. 

Tree frame 

Size: 1200mm2 and 1800mm2 Standard Paving 

Depth: 50mm 

Style/Colour/Finish: Conservation paving 

Charcoal textured (n.b. not with 1800mm size) 

Charcoal smooth 

Silver Grey textured 

Silver Grey smooth 

Perfecta paving 

Natural 

Buff 

Saxon paving 

Natural 

Buff 

TREEPAVE 1200mm 2 


Product Product Total Grille Paving Pack 

Description Reference Weight (kg) Weight (kg) 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Charcoal textured MN-TR-00001 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Charcoal smooth MN-TR-00002 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Silver Grey textured MN-TR-00003 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Silver Grey smooth MN-TR-00004 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Perfecta - Natural MN-TR-00005 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Perfecta - Buff MN-TR-00006 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Saxon - Natural MN-TR-00007 53.2 130 

Treepave 1200mm sq frame with 50mm Saxon - Buff MN-TR-00008 53.2 130 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Charcoal smooth MN-TR-00010 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Silver Grey textured MN-TR-00011 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Conservation - Silver Grey smooth MN-TR-00012 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Perfecta - Natural MN-TR-00013 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Perfecta - Buff MN-TR-00014 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Saxon - Natural MN-TR-00015 79.8 314 

Treepave 1800mm sq frame with 50mm Saxon - Buff MN-TR-00016 79.8 314 

379.1 569.1 

For standard paving options see table below 

TREEPAVE 1800mm 2 

564.05 869.1 

1200 sq 

1800 sq 

For standard paving options see table below 

10 

10 

57 

57 

40 

40 

268

269 




Treepave – Bespoke Specification 

Treepave Bespoke Tree Frame to take Conservation Silver Grey Paving, Milton Keynes 

Treepave Bespoke Tree Frame with Natural Stone Paving, Albert Square, Manchester 


n Marshalls Street Furniture undertake commissions to create bespoke Treepave 

Tree Frames to suit any installation. Any size or shape can be fabricated, with 

irrigation channels included in any configuration. 

n Tree Frames can be made to take any Marshalls paving, including natural stone. 

All paving will be water cut and supplied in kit form ready for installation. 

n To discuss a bespoke Treepave Tree Frame with inset paving please contact our 

Sales Order Office. You will be asked to provide the following information. 

– A drawing showing; 

• Preferred external shape of the tree frame. 

• Preferred internal aperture shape. 

• Preferred drainage channel layout. 

(with dimensions in mm) 

– The paving to be used in the tree frame, including: 

• Paving type, 

• Paving texture 

• Paving colour 

• Paving Depth. 

(all paving is to be specified from Marshalls Product Selector 3) 

– Any additional features required.



Steel Frames for Resin 

Bound Paving 

Tree Frame for Resin Bound Paving 

Ollerton Tree Frame for Resin Bound Paving 

1200mm, 1362mm or 1818mm 

494 

75 

1200mm, 1362mm or 1818mm 


n The Ollerton Tree Frame for Resin Bound Paving allows the continuous and tidy 

installation of resin bound paving around a tree base. It is to be filled by others. 

n The two sides of the tree frame can be opened easily to allow access to the root 

ball and tie anchors then closed and the opening brackets protected with 

a security cover. 

n An optional removable inner ring is available. 

n Three dimensions are available 1200mm, 1362mm or 1818mm square. 

n It is recommended that the tree frame is used only with a membrane and a resin 

bound paving which is permeable. 

Tree Frame 

Remove Security Cover 

Security Cover in Place 

Attach Lifting Handle 

Open One Side Open Second Side 

270

271 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Cast Iron Tree Protection 

Series 4000 Classic Tree Grille 

MSF 58 Series Cast Iron Tree Grille with Metropolis Benches shown with Marshalls Tegula Paving 

Cast iron tree grilles provide room for water irrigation in areas where paving 

construction has been designed to collect and dispose of surface run off. 

They allow trees to be added to the landscapes without the risk of root growth 

damaging surrounding paving. Tree guards provide newly planted trees with 

protection and growing support. 

Imperial cast iron tree grilles are available in a variety of styles and a range of sizes 

designed to coordinate with most sizes of paving. 

Sineu Graff Series 4000 Classic and Contemporary Tree Grilles are available in two 

designs and can be supplied with irrigation holes.




Series 4000 

Series 4000 Classic Cast Iron Tree Grille 

SERIES 4500 CLASSIC SERIES 4600 CONTEMPORARY 


n Sineu Graff Series 4000 are traditional cast iron tree grilles which have been 

remodelled to suit modern urban environments. Available in two designs, 

Classic and Contemporary, they offer premium quality, optional extras and have 

been redesigned to conform to the French standard PMR; meaning that the 

wheel of a wheelchair cannot be trapped in the apertures of the grille. 

n Colour and finish: Series 4000 can be supplied in four dimensions and can be 

specified in standard Sineu Graff Akzo sable (matt) or RAL (glossy) colours and 

finishes. 

n Installation: Tree grilles are supplied in four parts and need to be ordered 

together with a supporting tree frame for installation. 

n Tree Guard: Both models can be supplied with a Tree Guard. 

n Optional Extras: 

– Irrigation holes: up to four apertures can be cast into the corners of the tree 

grille and removable covers supplied. 

– Temporary Stake Mounting Shoes: These can be specified and removed at a 

later date and removed when the tree is fully established and self supporting. 

– Support Frames 

– Permanent Bolt Fixing Tree Guards 

IRRIGATION SYSTEM STAKING SHOES 

Product Product Dimensions Weight 

Description Reference (mm) (kg) 

Series 4000, 4500 Classic Tree Grille - 2 irrigation holes 42 4512 PMR 1800 x 1800 with 600 aperture 290.4 

Series 4000, 4500 Classic Tree Grille 42 4510 PMR 1800 x 1800 with 600 aperture 292 







Series 4000, 4600 Contemporary Tree Grille - 2 irrigation holes 42 4612 PMR 1800 x 1800 with 600 aperture 290.4 

Series 4000, 4600 Contemporary Tree Grille 42 4610 PMR 1800 x 1800 with 600 aperture 292 







Series 4000 Tree Frame 1500mm square 42 45C CHASS 1500 x 1500 30 

Series 4000 Tree Frame 1800mm square 42 48C CHASS 1800 x 1800 36.5 

272

273 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 TREE02 Tree Grilles Q50 262 Bollards ............................. page 42 

Seating ........................... page 110 



61 Series Tree Grille 

58 SERIES 59 SERIES 


Planters ........................... page 263 



n Imperial cast iron tree grilles are manufactured from ductile cast iron and comply 

with BS EN 1563 1997. 


n Tree grilles are supplied in a black gloss finish as standard. Products can also be 

supplied with irrigation or lighting ports. 

n Medium duty tree grille support frames are available to suit either square or 

circular models. A two piece frame provides support to all edges of the grille and 

is also advantageous when the tree is already established. 

n Two piece frames can also be supplied with removable inner support sections. 

These should be used when the trees are to be planted at a later stage. 

n Marshalls Street Furniture also offer tree guards for additional protection for 

young trees. These are available to suit all tree grille designs. 

n Tree guards are manufactured from mild steel and electroplated before finally 

being painted with black gloss. 

n We would be pleased to quote for the supply of any tree grilles, frames 

or guards to clients’ own specific designs. Please contact our Sales Office for 

further information.


64 SERIES 

66 SERIES 

65 SERIES 

68 SERIES 

DIMENSIONS (mm) 

700 2 with 400Ø Aperture 1000 2 /1000Ø with 1200 2 /1200Ø with 1400 2 /1400Ø with 1800 2 with 600Ø Aperture 

400Ø Aperture 400Ø Aperture 600Ø Aperture 

Product Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Standard 

Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Finish 

58 Series 5807 50 5810 94 5812 126 5814 153 5818 240 Black Gloss 

59 Series n/a n/a 5910 94 5912 126 n/a n/a Black Gloss 

60 Series n/a n/a 6010 126 6012 161 6014 191 n/a n/a Black Gloss 








274

275 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Stainless Steel Tree Protection 

M3 Tree Grille with M3 Pedestal Seats, Newby Primary 

n M3 is a range of 316L grade satin polished stainless steel tree grilles and guards. 

They are available in two sizes and designs; circular or square designs. 

n Tree grilles are supplied in separate segments and fit directly into the tree grille 

support frame. 

n Tree guards are available to match M3 Tree Grilles. They come with bolt fixings 

that allow them to be attached to tree grilles. Alternatively they can be supplied 

with free standing legs which allow them to be used independently. 

n Stainless steel tree grilles are bolted to the frame with security bolts as standard. 

M3 Round Tree Grille with Festival Tree Guard, Flared Top painted silver, Bolsover


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 TREE05 Tree Guards Q50 260 

Tree Grilles Q50 262 

Stainless Steel Tree Protection 

M3 Tree Grilles and Guards 

M3 1200Ø ROUND 

TREE GRILLE 

M3 FLAT TOP 

TREE GUARD 

600 Segment 

505 

1800 

M3 1400Ø ROUND 

TREE GRILLE 

700 Segment 

M3 FLARED TOP 

TREE GUARD 

580 

1800 

M3 1200Ø SQUARE 

TREE GRILLE 

600 Segment 


Bollards ............................. page 55 

Seating ........................... page 134 



Planters ........................... page 258 




M3 1400Ø SQUARE 

TREE GRILLE 

700 Segment 

Product Product Length Height Aperture Weight Standard Free Plaques 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing 

M3 Round Tree Grille OLSG201 1200Ø n/a 495Ø 40 316L Grade Stainless Steel 

M3 Round Tree Grille OLSG203 1400Ø n/a 495Ø 75 316L Grade Stainless Steel 

M3 Square Tree Grille OLSG202 1200 2 n/a 495Ø 72 316L Grade Stainless Steel 

M3 Square Tree Grille OLSG204 14002 n/a 495Ø 90 316L Grade Stainless Steel 

M3 Flat Top Tree Guard OLTS501 505 1800 495Ø 46 316L Grade Stainless Steel n n 

M3 Flared Top Tree Guard OLTS301 580 1800 495Ø 50 316L Grade Stainless Steel n n 

OPTIONS 

276

277 




Steel Tree Protection 

Bespoke Steel Tree Grilles with laser cut text, Bourgoin-Jallieu, France 

Sineu Graff steel tree grilles and frames provide a truly unique and contemporary 

aesthetic to a scheme. Two ranges, Series 2000 and Series 3000, offer a diverse 

choice of designs from patterns and natural motifs in series 2000 to configurative 

and concentric forms in Series 3000. 

Sineu Graff undertake commissions for bespoke designs; they are able to take a 

creative concept, recommend how the laser cut profiles need to be laid out and 

ultimately manufacture the grille. The images above show tree grilles commissioned 

by a college in Jour near Bourgoin-Jallieu in France. The college commissioned six 

tree grilles with bespoke text to convey to students the principles of the Universal 

Declaration of Human Rights made in 1948. 

Series 3000 

n Series 3000 is a new range of steel tree grilles with figurative and concentric 

designs. 

n Material: Series 3000 tree grilles are manufactured from 6mm sheet steel that 

has been profiled by laser cutting. 

n Sizes: Available in four square sizes: 1200mm, 1500mm and 1800mm. and in a 

rectangular shape 1500 x 1800mm. 


Bollards ............................. page 52 

Seating ........................... page 121 





n Colour and finish: Treated by Sineu Graff’s Powder Blast process to prevent 

rusting, then polyester powder coated. 

n Installation: Tree grilles are supplied in two parts and need to be ordered 


n Tree Guard: All Series 3000 grilles have the options of tree guards, please see the 

pages following Series 2000 for models. 


– Irrigation holes: Series 2000 can be specified with removable irrigation covers 

to make irrigating more convenient. Please see diagram below. 

– Temporary Stake Mounting Shoes: These can be specified and removed at 

a later date and removed when the tree is fully established and self supporting. 

Please see diagram below 


– Permanent Bolt Fixing Tree Guards





Series 3000 

GAIA TREE GRILLE 

MODEL 0: SQUARE 

MODEL 1: SQUARE 

UMBRA TREE GRILLE 

MODEL 0: RECTANGULAR 

MODEL 1: RECTANGULAR 


GEOS TREE GRILLE 

1200 x 1200 1500 x 1500 1800 x 1800 1800 x 1500 

Product Product Weight Product Weight Product Weight Product Weight 

Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) 

Gaia Tree Grille 42.320 C03 102 42.350 C03 150 42.380 C03 219 42.358 A03 184 

Umbra Tree Grille 42.320 C06 98 42.350 C06 145 42.380 C06 213 42.358 A06 179 

Geos Tree Grille 42.320 C07 101 42.350 C07 147 42.380 C07 213 42.358 A07 179 

Series 3000 Tree Frame 42.22C CHASS 24 42.25C CHASS 31 42.28C CHASS 37 42.358 CHASS 34 

Model 0 Square/Rectangular 43.350 C50 118 43.350 A50 144 

Model 1 Square/Rectangular 43.350 C51 112 43.358 A51 138 

Series 3000 Tree Frame 42358 CHASS 34 

278

279 





Series 2000 

Round ‘Roots’ Grille with Tree Guard and Sineu Graff Rendezvous Curved Benches 

n Series 2000 is a range of distinctive and contemporary tree grilles which are 

generally specified in prime locations to create a unique identity. Eight different 

designs are available, in both round and square frames. Please be aware that 

Series 2000 model patterns change on 1200mm and 1800mm grilles. Please 

contact our Sales Office for further information. 

n Material: Series 2000 Tree grilles are manufactured from 8mm sheet steel that 

has been profiled by laser cutting. All products are zinc plated. 

n Sizes: Available in three sizes: 1200mm, 1500mm and 1800mm. 


rusting, then polyester powder coated. A standard range of five colours is 

available which provide a unique sand textured finish. Colours available are Sable 

Green 500, Brown 650, Blue 700, Black 100 and Grey 900. 

n Installation: Tree grilles are supplied in four parts and need to be ordered 


n Tree Guard: All Series 2000 grilles have the options of tree guards, please see 

following pages for models. 


Bollards ............................. page 52 

Seating ........................... page 121 






– Irrigation holes: Series 2000 can be specified with removable irrigation covers 

to make irrigating more convenient. Please see diagram below. 

– Temporary Stake Mounting Shoes: These can be specified and removed at 

a later date and removed when the tree is fully established and self supporting. 

Please see diagram below. 


– Permanent Bolt Fixing Tree Guards 

FIG 1: IRRIGATION COVERS FIG 2: STAKING SHOES

PEBBLES (ROUND) 

ROOTS (ROUND) 

TULIPS (ROUND) 

STARS (ROUND) 

PEBBLES (SQUARE) 

ROOTS (SQUARE) 

TULIPS (SQUARE) 

STARS (SQUARE) 


1200 2 /1200Ø with 600Ø Aperture 1500 2 /1500Ø with 600Ø Aperture 1800 2 /1800Ø with 600Ø Aperture 

Product Product Weight Product Weight Product Weight Standard 

Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Finish 

Round Pebbles Grille 42.2204R 78 42.2504R 134 42.2804R 170 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Square Pebbles Grille 42.2204S 108 42.2504S 176 42.2804S 225 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Round Roots Grille 42.2205R 77 42.2505R 125 42.2805R 175 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Square Roots Grille 42.2205S 108 42.2505S 169 42.2805S 234 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Round Tulips Grille 42.2208R 78 42.2508R 125 42.2808R 170 Sand Textured PC Blue 700 

Square Tulips Grille 42.2208S 109 42.2508S 169 42.2808S 225 Sand Textured PC Blue 700 

Round Stars Grille 42.2201R 74 42.2501R 115 42.2801R 148 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Square Stars Grille 42.2201S 107 42.2501S 161 42.2801S 207 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

280

281 

GEODES (ROUND) GEODES (SQUARE) 

FOLIAGE (ROUND) FOLIAGE (SQUARE) 

OCEAN (ROUND) OCEAN (SQUARE) 

WAVES (ROUND) WAVES (SQUARE) 


1200 2 /1200Ø with 600Ø Aperture 1500 2 /1500Ø with 600Ø Aperture 1800 2 /1800Ø with 600Ø Aperture 

Product Product Weight Product Weight Product Weight Standard 

Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Finish 

Round Geodes Grille 42.2207R 77 42.2507R 125 42.2807R 167 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Square Geodes Grille 42.2207S 109 42.2507S 172 42.2807S 229 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Round Foliage Grille 42.2206S 111 42.2506S 183 42.2806S 239 Sand Textured PC Green 500 

Square Foliage Grille 42.2206R 80 42.2506R 134 42.2806R 178 Sand Textured PC Green 500 

Round Ocean Grille 42.2203R 78 42.2503R 124 42.2803R 160 Sand Textured PC Blue 700 

Square Ocean Grille 42.2203S 109 42.2503S 169 42.2803S 221 Sand Textured PC Blue 700 

Round Waves Grille 42.2202R 75 42.2502R 119 42.2802R 157 Sand Textured PC Brown 650 

Square Waves Grille 42.2202S 104 42.2502S 154 42.2802S 207 Sand Textured PC Brown 650





Series 2000 Tree Guards 

Series 2000 Tree Guard Corset 


Bollards ............................. page 52 

Seating ........................... page 121 


SERIES 2000 TREE GUARD SERIES 2000 TREE GUARD: CORSET 

270 

600 

1696 

Product Product Height Bottom Aperture Standard 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) Finish 




n Designed as an integral component of the Series 2000 tree protection system, 

tree guards have a 600mm aperture at the bottom. 

n Material: Series 2000 Tree Guard is manufactured using 30mm diameter round 

steel tubes welded to 4mm flat steel rings. Series 2000 Corset is manufactured 

using 16 vertical strips in 6mm steel and 3 horizontal strips in 4mm steel. 


rusting, then polyester powder coated. Available in the full range of standard 

Akzo RAL (high gloss) and sable (matt textured) colours and finishes. 

n Installation: Supplied in two sections for assembly with stainless steel bolts. 

Guard to grille fixing allows for installation on slopes up to 10% from horizontal. 

1805,4 

Series 2000 Tree Guard 42.5102 1969 600 Polyester Powder Coated 

Series 2000 Tree Guard Corset 42.5200 1850 600 Polyester Powder Coated 

282

283 



Seating ........................... page 163 



Polyurethane Tree Protection 

58 Series Tree Grille with Marshalls Tegula Paving 






n Ferrocast polyurethane is an ideal material for tree grilles. A Ferrocast Tree Grille 

is not only resistant to corrosion but also the degradation that can be caused by 

street cleaning equipment. 

n Grilles are also abrasion resistant and, because of their through colour, always 

present an optimal appearance. 

n In tests on location and independently witnessed by Ceram – Ferrocast Tree 

Grilles and sub-frames proved to be capable of withstanding vehicle over-run 

weight of 43.3 tonnes, 8.92 tonnes per axle and 4.46 tonnes per wheel. 

n Ferrocast Tree Grilles are much lighter than cast iron and will reduce the risk 

of manual handling injuries (Manual Handling Operations 1992). 

n Tree guards are also available, manufactured from galvanised powder coated 

steel. 

n Tree guards are available with spike or bolt fixing. 

n Ferrocast tree grilles are supplied in two parts. 

IMPERIAL TREE GUARD 

OPTIONS 

Product Product Height Diameter Weight Standard Circular Square 


Imperial Tree Guard TP130000 1800 400 or 600 81 Black Gloss n n 

400/600 

1800

PARK LANE 58P SERIES 59P SERIES 

60P SERIES 61P SERIES 65P SERIES 

66P SERIES 68P SERIES 


700 2 with 400Ø Aperture 1000 2 with 400Ø Aperture 1200 2 with 400Ø Aperture 1400 2 with 600Ø Aperture 1800 2 with 600Ø Aperture 

Product Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Grille Weight Standard 

Description Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Reference (kg) Finish 

Park Lane n/a n/a Park Lane 22 Park Lane 28 Park Lane 32 Park Lane 42 Black Gloss 

58P Series 5807 16 5810 22 5812 28 5814 32 5818 42 Black Gloss 

59P Series n/a n/a 5910 22 5912 28 5914 32 n/a n/a Black Gloss 






284

285 



Tree Protection 

Imperial and Festival Tree Guards 

n Imperial Tree Guards are constructed from mild steel bars, electroplated and 

black gloss paint finished. Two fixing methods are available: spike and bolt. 

n Festival Tree Guards are supplied in mild steel, hot dip galvanised and polyester 


n Festival Tree Guards can be coated in colours of your choice from a full range 

of standard RAL colours. 


TREE GUARD 

505 

1800 

FESTIVAL FLARED TOP 

TREE GUARD 

580 

1800 


FESTIVAL ROLLED TOP 

TREE GUARD 

650 


Bollards ............................. page 42 

Seating ........................... page 110 


1800 

Planters ........................... page 263 




SPIKE FIXING DETAIL 

Tree Guard 

Tree Grille 

300 

16 Fixing Spike x 4 


BOLT FIXING DETAIL 

Tree Grille 

Tree Guard 

Tree Grille 

Plan View 

Height 

adjustable 

M16 Nut to 

lock Tree Guard 

FESTIVAL FREE STANDING 

TREE GUARD 

OPTIONS 

Product Product Height 

Internal 

Width Weight Standard Free Plaques 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Standing 

Imperial Bolt Fixing Square Tree Guard MSF402SQ 1800 400 20 Black Gloss 

Imperial Bolt Fixing Circle Tree Guard MSF402CIR 1800 400 20 Black Gloss 

Imperial Spike Fixing Square Tree Guard MSF402SQ 1800 400 20 Black Gloss 

Imperial Spike Fixing Circle Tree Guard MSF402CIR 1800 400 20 Black Gloss 

Imperial Bolt Fixing Square Tree Guard MSF602SQ 1800 600 25 Black Gloss 

Imperial Bolt Fixing Circle Tree Guard MSF602CIR 1800 600 25 Black Gloss 

Imperial Spike Fixing Square Tree Guard MSF602SQ 1800 600 25 Black Gloss 

Imperial Spike Fixing Circle Tree Guard MSF602CIR 1800 600 25 Black Gloss 

Festival Flat Top Tree Guard OLTR501 1800 495 46 PC Any RAL Colour n n 

Festival Flared Top Tree Guard OLTR301 1800 495 50 PC Any RAL Colour n n 

Festival Rolled Top Tree Guard OLTR101 1800 495 54 PC Any RAL Colour n n 

400/600 

1800 

400



Seating ............................. page 96 


Concrete Tree Protection 

Andromeda Natural Tree Protector 

ANDROMEDA NATURAL ANDROMEDA POLISHED 

1220 

1620 

1220Ø 

1620Ø 

225 

255 


n Simple circular tree grilles in concrete and polished concrete. 


HEIgHT 

Overall 

Height Weight 

1220Ø 

Standard 


820Ø 


Planters ........................... page 235 

n The Andromeda Natural is available in 1220mm and 1620mm diameters. 

They are simple, pozzolanic concrete planters which are designed to protect 

tree beds. They come with a clear acrylic coating and are styled with rounded 

edges. The planters are designed to be partially buried, affording protection 

for the plant. 

n The Andromeda Polished is a beautifully polished planter which is made from 

a fine marble aggregate. The planter comes in two diameters 820mm and 

1220mm and the rim features a 40mm diameter brass plate. 

n The tree protectors can be concreted into place if preferred. 

Andromeda Natural BIV412610 1220 225 314 Clear Acrylic Resin 

Andromeda Natural BIV416610 1620 255 486 Clear Acrylic Resin 

Andromeda Polished BIAF3604 820 270 154 Polished 

Andromeda Polished BIAF3605 1220 308 383 Polished 

820Ø 

1220Ø 

270 

270 

308 

308 

286

287


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Notice Boards 

Steel and Stainless Steel Notice Boards 289 



Ollerton: Buffalo 292 

Ollerton: Aviso 293 

Ollerton: Censeo 295 

Ollerton: Aviso and Censeo Post Options 296 

Imperial: Imperial 297 

Recycled Plastic Composite Notice Boards 299 

Intruplas 299 

Polyurethane Notice Boards 300 

Ferrocast® Notice Board Product Selector 301 

‹ M3 A1 Notice Board with M3 Pedestal Seats, Newby Primary School 288

289 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Notice Boards 

Imperial A0 Notice Board, Edinburgh 

Ollerton Aviso Landscape Notice Board, Hyde Park, London 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of notice boards in steel, stainless steel and 

cast aluminium with steel which allow information and notifications to be clearly 

presented within your landscape. Notice boards are available in a variety of styles 

and can be personalised with text, crests, logos and motifs. 

Ollerton Notice Boards are available in polyester powder coated steel, 316L grade 

satin polished stainless steel and silver anodised aluminium. Notice boards are 

available to coordinate with the M3, Festival and Buffalo ranges with the addition 

of Aviso Exterior and Combi Notice Boards. Imperial Notice Boards are manufactured 

from cast aluminium combined with polyester powder coated steel. They coordinate 

with other products under the Imperial brand. 

All notice boards are highly versatile, come with a variety of options, and are supplied 

as standard with a mechanically sealed door which is either top or side opening 

depending on model. Mechanically sealed doors combined with air ventilation 

help to minimise condensation. Sizes of notice boards vary from A1-AO and can be 

specified single or double sided. Notice boards are ideal for tourist areas, city centres 

and shopping centres where visibly identifiable information points are often required.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 NTBD01 Notice Boards Q50 250 

Bollards ............................. page 55 


Notice Boards 

M3 

M3 A1 Notice Board, Newby Primary School 

M3 A1 NOTICE BOARD M3 A0 NOTICE BOARD 

2173 

943 

1075 

696 

114Ø 

100 

Locks (2) 


Seating ........................... page 134 



Planters ........................... page 258 




n M3 Notice Boards have a simple design which is enhanced by the attractive, satin 

polished finish of 316L grade stainless steel. 

n The M3 A1 Notice Board has a notice area measuring 594mm wide x 841mm 

high. It comes complete with a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable glazed 

door and is single post mounted. 

n The M3 A0 Notice Board has a notice area measuring 1189mm wide x 841mm 

high. It also comes complete with a mechanically sealed top hinged lockable 

glazed door with gas assisted struts. It can be supplied either as a single or 

double sided notice board. When specified as double sided, post columns move 

to the end of the notice board. 

n Notice boards are available glazed or unglazed in polycarbonate or toughened 

glass and are supplied with a pinboard. 

n M3 Notice Boards can be supplied open fronted without door. 

n Notice boards are supplied with two locks for added security. 

n M3 Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

2210 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

100 

1310 

750 

114Ø 

290

291 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 NTBD02 Notice Boards Q50 250 Bollards ............................. page 50 

Seating ........................... page 139 




Notice Boards 

Festival 

Festival A1 Notice Board, Westminster 


Planters ........................... page 259 



n Festival Notice Boards provide an ideal way to add notification areas to 

your landscape. 

n All notice boards within the Festival range are manufactured from mild 

steel which is hot dip galvanised and then powder coated in a colour of 

your choice. Header boards are manufactured from cast aluminium. 

n visible areas on the notice boards measure 594mm wide x 841mm high for 

A1, 1189mm wide x 841mm high for A0 and 1440mm wide x 841mm high 

for Large. 

n Festival A1 features a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable glazed door. 

Festival A0 and Large feature a mechanically sealed top hinged lockable door 

with gas assisted struts. 

n Festival A1 can be supplied as a double sided notice board. (Support columns 

will be moved to the end.) 



n All Festival Notice Boards can be supplied open fronted and without a door. 

n Notice boards are supplied with two locks for added security. 

n Festival Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

FESTIvAL A1 NOTICE BOARD FESTIvAL A0 NOTICE BOARD FESTIvAL LARgE NOTICE BOARD 

2230 

943 

1075 

704 

114Ø 

100 Typ 

Locks (2) 

2294 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

1315 

750 

100 Typ 

114Ø 

2450 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

100 Typ 

1555 

1100 

114Ø



Seating ........................... page 145 



Notice Boards 

Buffalo 

Buffalo A1 Notice Board 

BuFFALO A1 NOTICE BOARD 




n The Buffalo is a unique hoop shaped notice board which complements other 

pieces of street furniture in the Buffalo range. 

n It is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being 


n Buffalo A1 Notice Board has a visible area measuring 594mm wide x 841mm 

high. It is supplied complete with a mechanically sealed side hinged lockable 

glazed door. 



n It can also be supplied open fronted without door. 

n Additional text and symbols can be added to the header. 

n Buffalo Notice Board is supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

2520 

943 

1075 

952 

696 

Locks (2) 

76Ø 

100 Typ 

292

293 



Aluminium Notice Boards 

Aviso 

Aviso Landscape Notice Board, Tate Gallery 

n Aviso Notice Boards are hinged along the top and fitted with a gas cylinder to 

allow smooth, easy opening up to 85 degrees. 

n The contemporary design incorporates a permanent ventilation system to 

eliminate the effects of condensation and fogging. 

n The Notice Boards feature hidden anti-vandal locks and are glazed with ESg 

toughened glass for greater strength and durability. 

n Supplied with a galvanised and powder coated magnetic back board (including 

magnets), allowing notices to be easily placed and removed, without the need 

for pins. 

n An acrylic text boarder with up to 20 black vinyl letters is available on request. 

n Aviso Notice Boards are supplied with a wall mount fixing as standard. However, 

a choice of round, square, rectangular or hexagonal posts are also available. See 

page 296 for post options. 


n Aviso Notice Boards are extremely versatile and are available in a number of sizes 

and finishes, in both landscape and portrait orientations. 

n Manufactured from high strength, rust proof aluminium, they can be used both 

internally and externally and have the option of internal lighting for increased 

visibility. 

n Supplied in a silver anodised aluminium finish as standard, the Aviso can also 

be supplied in dark bronze or stainless steel effect anodised finishes, or powder 

coated in an RAL colour of your choice. 

n The Aviso is supplied with a standard depth of 60mm, however, a 120mm option 

is available, enabling shelving to be added and an 80mm double sided option is 

also available. 

Aviso Landscape Notice Board with rectangular posts, Tate Gallery 

gAS HINgED DOOR MAgNETIC BACK BOARD PERMANENT vENTILATION TEXT BORDER

Aviso Portrait Notice Board with circular posts, St James Park, London 

Aviso Portrait Notice Board with circular posts in a silver anodised aluminium finish 

DIMENSIONS STYLE FIXING OPTIONS FINISH OPTIONS OPTIONAL EXTRAS 

60mm 120mm 80mm Post Anodised Anodised Anodised Powder Text 

Product Width Height Deep Deep Deep Wall Mounted Aluminium Dark Stainless Coated Border Lighting 

(Single Sided) (Single Sided) (Double Sided) Mounted (see page 296 

for options) 

Silver Bronze Steel RAL 

Aviso Landscape Notice Board 560 480 AS AS n AS n n n n n 

790 790 AS n n AS n AS n n n n n 





Aviso Portrait Notice Board 580 850 AS n n AS n AS n n n n n 




294

295 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Censeo 

Censeo Notice Board 

Key Features 

n The Censeo features a side hinged door with a front facing security lock with key. 

If used in landscape format, the door will open upwards. A triangular lock is also 

available as an optional extra. 

n glazed with ESg toughened glass for greater strength and durability, with the 

exception of the largest, A0 size, which is glazed with a high strength safety 

acrylic. 

n Supplied with a powder coated magnetic back board (including magnets), 

allowing notices and posters to be easily placed and removed, without the need 

for pins. 

n An acrylic text boarder with up to 20 black vinyl letters is available on request. 

n Censeo Notice Boards are supplied with a wall mount fixing as standard. A choice 

of round, square, rectangular or hexagonal posts are also available. See next page 

for post details. 

NTBD04 Notice Boards Q50 250 


n The Censeo notice board is manufactured from high strength, rust proof 

aluminium. 

n Supplied in a silver anodised aluminium finish as standard, the Censeo can also 

be supplied in dark bronze or stainless steel effect anodised finishes or powder 

coated in an RAL colour of your choice. 

n Available in a variety of sizes from A4 to A0, the Censeo has a usable internal 

depth of 10mm and is available with a choice of square, rounded or angled 

corners. 

SIDE HINgED DOOR CORNER OPTIONS 

OPTIONAL LOCK 

OPTIONS FINISH 

Dimensions Post Mounted Anodised Anodised Anodised Powder 

Product Width Height Square Rounded Angled Wall (see page 296 Text Aluminium Dark Stainless Coated 

Description Corners Corners Corners Mounted for options) Border Silver Bronze Steel RAL 

Censeo Notice Board 290 377 AS n n AS n n AS n n n 

377 500 AS n n AS n n AS n n n 



920 1268 AS n n AS n n AS n n n


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Post Options 

n Aviso and Censeo notice boards are available with a variety of post options. 

n Posts are supplied in pairs and can be provided with either a standard root fixing 

or a sub surface mount plate, suitable for bolting underneath paved areas. 

n Posts are available in square, small rectangular (80 x 40mm), large rectangular 

(100 x 60mm), hexagonal and circular (80mm) styles. 

n Supplied in a silver anodised aluminium finish as standard, posts can also be 

supplied in dark bronze or stainless steel effect anodised finishes or powder 

coated in an RAL colour of your choice to match Aviso and Censeo notice boards. 

NTBD04 Notice Boards Q50 250 


Root Fixing 

n Posts designed for root fixing have a total length of 2400mm. 

n Once installed, it is recommended that the upper edge of the mounted notice 

board should be 2000mm above ground. 

Sub Surface Mount 

n Posts designed for sub surface mounting have a total length of 2150mm. 

n Once installed, it is recommended that the upper edge of the mounted notice 

board should be 2000mm above ground. 

n The integral base plate measures 250 x 120mm and has a thickness of 10mm. 

SQuARE RECTANguLAR SMALL RECTANguLAR LARgE CIRCuLAR HEXAgONAL 

FINISH FIXING OPTIONS 

Anodised Anodised Anodised Powder 

Post Aluminium Dark Stainless Steel Coated Root Sub Surface 

Style Silver Bronze Finish RAL Fix Mount 

Square n n n n n n 

Rectangular Small n n n n n n 

Rectangular Large n n n n n n 

Hexagonal n n n n n n 

Circular n n n n n n 

296

297 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 NTBD05 Poster Display Unit Q50 250 

Notice Boards N10 195 

Cast Aluminium and Steel 

Notice Boards 

Imperial 

Imperial A0 Notice Board, Edinburgh 


Bollards ............................. page 42 

Seating ........................... page 110 


Planters ........................... page 263 



n Imperial Notice Boards have a victorian aesthetic which is particularly suited to 

more traditionally styled landscapes. 

n The notice boards consist of either one or two cast aluminium fluted bollards 

which act as the base and then either one or two posts which support the notice 

board. The posts and notice boards are manufactured from mild steel which is 

hot dip galvanised and powder coated in a colour of your choice. 

n visible areas measure 594mm wide x 841mm high for A1 and 1189mm wide 

x 841mm high for the A0 single and double sided. 

n Imperial A1 Notice Board comes with a mechanically sealed, side hinged glazed 

door and is single post mounted. 

n The A0 Notice Board comes with a cast aluminium heading, mechanically sealed 

top hinged door with glazed front and gas assisted struts. 



n All models can be supplied open fronted and without a door. 

n All Imperial Notice Boards are supplied with two locks for added security. 

n Imperial Notice Boards are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

IMPERIAL A1 IMPERIAL A0 IMPERIAL LARgE 

2250 

943 

1075 

100 Typ 

704 

114Ø 

225Ø Typ 

Locks (2) 

2294 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

1315 

750 

100 Typ 

114Ø 

2450 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

100 Typ 

1555 

1100 

114Ø

Imperial Large Notice Board, Malton and Norton 

n Imperial Large Notice Boards, both single and double sided, have a visible area 

of 1440mm wide x 841mm high and come complete with a mechanically sealed, 

top hinged, lockable glazed door with gas struts. 

n Within the range there are two double sided notice boards, A0 double sided and 

Large double sided. 

n The double sided notice boards consist of cast aluminium fluted bollards, finials 

and headings which are coated in a colour of your choice. 

n Text and symbols can be added to the headers of all notice boards. 

IMPERIAL A0 DOuBLE SIDED IMPERIAL LARgE DOuBLE SIDED 

2540 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

100 Typ 

1476 

1315 

2540 

954 

1100 

Locks 

(2) 

100 Typ 

1726 

1555 

298

299 




Seating ........................... page 167 

Recycled Plastic Composite Notice Boards 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer two Recycled Plastic Composite (RPC) notice boards 

which are manufactured from 100% recycled plastic and are 100% recyclable. RPC 

is a robust material with a high strength and is resistant to degradation, meaning 

it won’t rust or rot. Products have a ‘grain’ effect finish which is a result of the 

manufacturing process. In instances of vandalism with paint or marker pens it can 

be cleaned using thinners without damaging the surface of the product. 

RPC notice boards are ideal for use in parks and conservation areas as they have a 

natural aesthetic. Their robust design means that they can withstand most forms of 

attack. RPC is also a suitable replacement for timber. 

Notice boards come in two styles, Interpretation Board or Notice Board. 

The Interpretation Board is ideal for use with maps or information regarding points 

of interest. The Notice Board is useful for important notices where there is often a 

requirement for a larger display space. Each of the products comes fully assembled 

and is held together using stainless steel bolts. 

n Interpretation Boards available are: 

Small: Measuring 406mm high x 686mm wide. 

Medium: Measuring 762mm high x 1041mm wide. 

Large: Measuring 762mm high x 1194mm wide. 

n Notice Boards available are: 

INTERPRETATION BOARD NOTICE BOARD 

Planters ........................... page 262 

Single Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 700mm wide plus 150mm header board if 

required (total height 1000mm). 

Display area measures 750mm high x 600mm wide. 

When specified with glazing, display area measures 650mm high x 500mm wide. 

Double Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 1250mm wide plus 150mm header board 

if required (total height 1000mm). 

Display area measures 750mm high x 1100mm wide. 


Triple Bay: Measuring 850mm high x 1900mm wide plus 150mm header board if 

required (total height 1000mm). 

Display area measures 750mm x 1800mm wide. 


Interpretation and Notice Boards can be specified with wall or post mounting. 

Post heights can vary according to customer requirements. The maximum height 

available is 2 metres.



Polyurethane Notice Boards 

Notice Board with Hendon Post and Ball Finial, Scarborough 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of Ferrocast® Notice Boards which can 

be customised to meet your needs and to coordinate with the surrounding 

environment. Ferrocast Notice Boards are ideal for tourist areas and city centres where 

clearly presented information points are essential elements of the landscape. 

Ferrocast Notice Boards are durable and low maintenance. As Ferrocast is resistant 

to most chemicals including saline and uric acid they will not rust or corrode and are 

suited to a variety of locations. 

The Ferrocast Notice Board product selector allows you to select each component 

which will make up the final product. Following the easy steps you can quickly create 

a notice board complete with posts and finials. You may also wish to add text to the 

headers along with crests, logos or motifs. Notice boards can be coated in a colour 

of your choice from a full range of RAL colours. Contrasting colours may be used 

to highlight details such as the finial or any crests, logos or motifs. All notice boards 

come with root fixing as standard. 

In situations where your old cast iron notice boards have become degraded, we 

offer a bespoke service to recreate them in Ferrocast. We can recreate exact replicas 

of any design. In addition to this we offer a full bespoke service to create new 

designs to fit in with special schemes and projects. For further information please 

contact our Sales Office. 


300

301 



Seating ........................... page 163 



Polyurethane Notice Boards 

Notice Board Product Selector 

Dewsbury Post and Pointed Finial with info board 1800 






n Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of notice board systems, the components 

of which can be mixed and matched to create your ideal solution. 

n The following product selector will assist you in creating a notice board. 

n Simply select the post style you require and then the finial. Illustrations of posts 

and finials are below. Should you require a bespoke design please contact our 

Sales Office. 

n Once you have selected your post and finial you may then select a colour. 

Black is the standard, however other RAL colours are available. Finials may be 

created in contrasting colours. 

n All posts are supplied with ground fixing. Typical root depth is 500mm. 

DARTFORD POST DEWSBuRY POST HENDON POST JERSEY POST STOCKPORT POST 

2400mm 

POINTED FINIAL BALL FINIAL DOME FINIAL 

142Ø 

255mm 

2400mm 

2400mm 

110Ø 

182mm 

2400mm 

110Ø 

2400mm 

34mm

Hendon Post and Ball Finial with info board 1500 

120mm 

INFO BOARD 1500 

InformatIon 

1500mm 

120mm 1000mm 

240mm 

n The final part in creating your notice board system is to select the size and type of 

notice board that you require. 

n We offer two types of notice board, infrequent use and frequent use, in two sizes, 

1500mm and 1800mm wide. Other sizes are available on request. 

n Infrequent Use: Can be opened by removing the fastening bolts at the top 

and sliding out the perspex front. Add your notice and then simply replace the 

perspex, top and fastening bolts. 

n Frequent Use: Can be opened by using the top hinged door to access the 

notice board area. This door is supplied with two locks. 

n Headers and Footers: Are available and can have text, logos, coats of arms and 

motifs added to customers’ requirements. 

n Text Size: 40mm however other sizes are available on request. 

n Font: Standard fonts are Times Roman and Helvetica. 

n Colours: Any standard RAL colours are available. 

n Either notice board can be supplied single or double sided. 

n Notice boards are manufactured from aluminium and headers/footers are polyester 

powder coated steel. Boards are bracket mounted to the Ferrocast® posts. 

INFO BOARD 1800 

120mm 

InformatIon 

1800mm 

120mm 1000mm 

240mm 

302

303


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Signage and Lamp Columns 

Steel and Stainless Steel Signage 305 

Ollerton: M3, Festival and Buffalo 306 

Cast Aluminium and Steel Signage 307 

Imperial: Imperial and Kingston 307 

Signage Options 308 

Polyurethane Signage 309 

Ferrocast® Fingerpost Product Selector 310 

Ferrocast: Name Plates 315 

Polyurethane Lamp Columns 317 

Ferrocast 317 

‹ Ferrocast Finger Post with Dome Finial, Cardiff 

304

305 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel and Stainless Steel Signage 

M3 Signpost, Newby Primary 

Imperial Signpost, Betws-y-Coed 

Signage systems are an important part of many urban landscapes. They allow for 

effective communication of information to pedestrians. 

Ollerton Fingerposts are available in polyester powder coated steel and 316L grade 

satin polished stainless steel. Styles are available to coordinate with the M3, Festival 

and Buffalo ranges; within each style there a number of design options available. 

In order to create your fingerpost please first select a post, then a finial, style of 

finger and finally the font and the justification that you will require for your text. 

A full reference table is on page 308 which indicates the full range of available 

options for each type of finger post. The Ollerton range of fingerposts comprises 

M3, Festival, Buffalo, Imperial and Kingston. The more traditional style Kingston and 

Imperial have cast aluminium fingers and embellishments. 

All steel and stainless steel signage systems can be personalised with crests, logos 

and motifs to client requirements. Should a bespoke system be required our team of 

designers can receive a design brief to create signage systems to fit in with a specific 

project or theme.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SNLC01 Signage N14 130 Bollards ............................. page 55 

Seating ........................... page 134 



Steel and Stainless Steel Signage 

M3, Festival and Buffalo 

Buffalo Signpost 


Planters ........................... page 258 




n Ollerton steel and stainless steel signage systems are highly functional and come 

with a range of options to allow communication of directional information clearly 

within your landscape. 

n M3 fingerpost: Manufactured from 316L grade satin polished stainless steel and 

comes with a dome finial. Fingers can accommodate one or two lines of text and 

have a rounded end and cut out arrow. 

n Festival fingerpost: Similar in style to M3 but formed from hot dip galvanised 

mild steel which is then coated in a colour of your choice. Festival is supplied as 

standard with a dome finial and fingers which can accommodate one or two 

lines of text with square ends. 

n Buffalo fingerpost: Manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which can then 

be coated in a colour of your choice. A ball finial is supplied which can be coated 

in a second colour to increase aesthetic appeal. Fingers can accommodate one or 

two lines of text and have rounded edges. Pointing fingers are also available with 

Buffalo fingerposts as optional extras. 

n Each fingerpost is supplied as standard with two single fingers. 

n Spacers are available for each fingerpost to leave room for future fingers. 

n Options: Each fingerpost has a number of options ranging from alternative fingers 

to varying fonts. Please refer to the table on page 308 for full details and 

illustrations. 

n Should future changes be required the fingers can be removed and updated, 

at a lower cost than purchasing new fingers. 

n All fingerposts are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

M3 FINGERPOST FESTIVAL FINGERPOST BUFFALO FINGERPOST 

89Ø 

845 

X SPACER 

2500 

150 Typ 

110 

89Ø 

845 

X SPACER 

2500 

150 Typ 

110 

76Ø 

838 

X SPACER 

2500 

150 Typ 

110 

306

307 



Seating ........................... page 110 


Cast Aluminium and Steel Signage 

Imperial and Kingston 

Kingston Fingerpost 

IMPERIAL FINGERPOST KINGSTON FINGERPOST 

1000 

114 

740 

SINGLE LINE 

X SPACER 

DOUBLE LINE 

TRIPLE LINE 

2500 

230Ø 

150 Typ 

92 

152 

214 


Planters ........................... page 263 



n Imperial and Kingston Signage Systems have a time honoured aesthetic which 

makes them ideal for more traditional landscapes. 

n Imperial: Constructed from a fluted, cast aluminium bollard sleeve which houses 

the post. 

n Kingston: Manufactured from hot dip galvanised mild steel. 

n Posts are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated in a 

colour of your choice. Both come with a choice of finial but the standard for each 

is shown in the technical drawings below. 

n Imperial and Kingston also come with the option of single, double, triple and 

quadruple line fingers which are manufactured from cast aluminium. 

n Each fingerpost is supplied as standard with two single fingers. 

n Spacers are available for each fingerpost to leave room for future fingers. 

n Imperial and Kingston can be specified with a number of options. Please refer to 

the table on page 308 for full details and illustrations. 

n All fingerposts are supplied with sub-surface fixing as standard. 

1100 

76Ø 

740 

SINGLE LINE 

X SPACER 

DOUBLE LINE 

TRIPLE LINE 

114Ø 

2500 

150 Typ


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SNLC03 

Signage 

Options 

FONT AND JUSTIFICATION OPTIONS 

FINIAL OPTIONS FINGER OPTIONS 

135Ø 

DOMe RINg 

BaLL 

POINTeD 

305Ø 

Signage N14 130 


n Ollerton Signage Systems have a number of options which allow the standard 

offering to be tailored slightly for individual requirements. The full range of 

options is detailed on this page along with a table which shows all possibilities. 

n We can also add a range of symbols to fingers. Some examples of these are 

shown below. If you have a bespoke symbol you would like to add please contact 

our Sales Office to discuss your requirements. 

n In order to create your signpost select a post, for example M3, then select any 

of the relevant options. 

n Please refer to the illustrations on this page as a guide when creating your signpost. 

POINTINg 

ROuND wITh CuT OuT 

SquaRe ROuND POINTeD 

OPTIONS 

Sign Finger Ends Fonts Lettering Size and Style Column Finials 

Round 

with Times Upper Surface 

Product Pointed Cut Out Round Square Pointing Helvetica Times New Specials 30, 35 or & Lower Left Right Post Point Centred Spacers Trim Dome Ball Point Ring 

Description Arrow Finger Bold Roman 40mm Case Justified Justified Justified Justified Plates 

M3 n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 

Festival n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 

Buffalo n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 

Imperial n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 

Kingston n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n 

308

309 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Polyurethane Signage 

Ferrocast Finger Post with Dome Finial, Cardiff 

Ferrocast® Signage Systems are extremely versatile which makes them ideal for 

communication of information in public areas. A range of signposts and notice 

boards are available, many of which have mix and match elements which means the 

final aesthetic of the product is unique to the client. Simple product selectors guide 

you through the process of selecting each component that you require for your 

signage system. 

A range of styles is available from simple to more traditional. Fingerposts are 

available in a range of RAL colours, and components can be coated in contrasting 

colours to enhance lettering, symbols and detailing. 

Fingerposts are available in five standard designs with a choice of three finials and 

an extensive list of configurations for fingers. Symbols can be added to fingers 

according to client specifications. 

We offer a full bespoke service whereby we can create new designs according to 

client requirements. Furthermore, we also offer a re-creation service whereby 

existing degraded iron signage systems can be replaced with exact Ferrocast 

replicas. For further information please contact our Sales Office.



Seating ........................... page 163 




Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 1 of 4 – Post Selector 

Ferrocast Fingerpost 






Step 1: Post Selector 

n The first step in creating your signage system is to select the design of post. 

n Marshalls Street Furniture offer a range of post designs from simple to traditional. 

n Posts are manufactured from Ferrocast® polyurethane which is cast around a 

steel core. 

n We also offer a bespoke capability where we can create posts to match client 

requirements. This could be reproductions from degraded iron or completely 

new designs. 

n Full dimensions can be found on the diagrams below. 

n Colour: Posts are supplied as standard in black but can be made to order in a 

range of RAL colours. For more information please contact our Sales Office. 

n Fixing: All posts are supplied with ground fixing. Typical root depths are 530mm. 

DARTFORD POST DEWSBURY POST HENDON POST JERSEY POST STOCKPORT POST 

3670mm 

114Ø 

160Ø 

3170mm 

102Ø 

3575mm 

114Ø 

147Ø 

3405mm 

101Ø 

3990mm 

103Ø 

310

311 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 2 of 4 – Finial Selector 

wandsworth Post with Pointed Finial, Double and quadruple Finger 


SNLC04 Signage N14 130 Bollards ............................. page 68 

Seating ........................... page 163 







Step 2: Finial Selector 

n The second step in creating your signage system is to select a finial for your post. 

n Style: We offer three designs, pointed, ball and dome. Should you require 

a bespoke finial, our design team can create either brand new designs or 

reproduce degraded cast iron ones. 

n Colour: Finials are supplied as standard in black but can be made to order in 

other RAL colours. You may wish to have a finial created in a contrasting colour to 

enhance the aesthetic of your signage system. 

POINTED FINIAL BALL FINIAL DOME FINIAL 

142Ø 

255mm 

110Ø 

182mm 

110Ø 

34mm



Seating ........................... page 163 




Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 3 of 4 – Finger Selector 

Fingerpost with bespoke finial: Stockport 

SINGLE FINGER 

DOUBLE FINGER 

TRIPLE FINGER 

TownÊ Hall 

870mm 

870mm 

Train Station 

Library 165mm 

870mm 

Town Hall 

Bus Station 

Hospital 215mm 

110mm 

QUADRUPLE FINGER 

QUINTUPLE FINGER 

TownÊ HallÊ 

TrainÊ StationÊ 

LibraryÊ 

Hospital 

Town Hall 

Train Station 

Bus Station 

Library 

Hospital 

HALF COLLAR FINGER 

Library 

Hospital 


870mm 

870mm 





Step 3: Finger Selector 

n The third step in creating your signage system is to select the type of finger that 

you require. 

n Style: We offer five types of finger which have the option of full or half collars. 

Half collars allow two fingers to be placed at the same height on the post. Up to 

seven single-fingers can be placed on a post. We can also supply spacers which 

allow you to add fingers in the future. 

n Colour: Fingers are supplied in black as standard but can be supplied in a range 

of RAL colours on request. 

n Double sided: Fingers are supplied double sided as standard. 

Town Hall 

Train Station 

Bus Station 

265mm 

315mm 

312

313 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Fingerpost Product Selector: Step 4 of 4 – Text Selector 

FONT, SIZE AND COLOUR 

Helvetica 

FONT STYLE (RAISED OR FLAT) 

JUSTIFICATION 

Point Justified 

SYMBOLS 

Times New Roman 

Centre Justified 

Post Justified 




SNLC04 Signage N14 130 Bollards ............................. page 68 

Seating ........................... page 163 




Step 4: Font Selector 

n The final step in creating your signage system is to select how you would like the 

text and symbols to appear on each of the fingers. 

n Text: On average up to 20 upper case letters and 26 lower case letters can be 

used on a single finger. 

n Select the font, size and colour for your text. 

n Font: Two standard fonts are available, Helvetica and Times New Roman, 

however we can create text in other fonts on request. 

n Size: 40mm is the standard size, however other sizes are available on request. 

n Colour: Standard font colour is white, however other RAL colours are available. 

n Font Profile: Fonts can be created either stencilled flat onto or created raised 

from the surface of the finger. 

n Border Profile: Raised borders are supplied as standard. 





n Border Colour: Borders can be coloured in any standard RAL colour as an 

additional option. 

n Justification: Once all text and symbols have been selected the final step in the 

process is to select the position of your text and symbols. The illustration shows 

the available options. 

n Symbols: We offer a range of symbols which may also be added to the finger. 

Some examples are illustrated, more are available on request. 

n Example: Once you have completed all the steps you can order your Ferrocast® 

signpost. For an example specification, please refer to the right hand page. 

If you have any queries please contact our Sales Office for assistance.



Seating ........................... page 163 




Fingerpost Product Selector: Additional Information 

Single Finger with Ball Finial 

EXAMPLE SPECIFICATION 

Step 1: Post Selector 

Post: Dewsbury Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black 

Step 2: Finial Selector 

Finial: Dome Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black 

Step 3: Finger Selector 

TownÊ Hall 

Train Station 

Library 

Town Hall 

Bus Station 

Hospital 

Finger: Single with Full Collar 

Colour: RAL 9017 Traffic Black 

TownÊ HallÊ 

TrainÊ StationÊ 

LibraryÊ 

Hospital 

Town Hall 

Train Station 

Bus Station 

Library 

Hospital 

Library 

Hospital 

Town Hall 

Train Station 

Bus Station 

Step 4: Font Selector 

Left Justified 


Times New Roman 

Font: Times New Roman, Upper and Lower Case 

Size: 40mm 

Colour: White 

Font Profile: Raised 

Border Profile: Raised 

Border Colour: Black 



Text Justification: Centre Justified 

Text: Bus Station 

Left Justified 

Right Justified Right Justified 




Symbols: Walking Man and Bus 

Symbol Position: Walking Man to left of text, Bus to right 

of text 




Safety Barriers ................. page 321 


n Once you have followed the four steps you should have a specification similar 

to the example shown below. This will allow us to create the signpost that 

you require. 

n Please forward this information onto our Sales Office and they will raise a quotation. 

n As previously mentioned Marshalls Street Furniture offer a unique bespoke 

capability. Our team of designers can recreate existing cast iron signposts which 

may have become degraded. They can also create new designs according to 

client requirements. 

n Should you wish to have a bespoke signage system created, please contact our 

Sales Office who will be happy to discuss this with you. 

314

315 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SNLC05 Signage N14 130 


Name Plates 

STREET PLATE 43 



MORNINGTON 

CRESCENT 

1215mm 

SMALLBROOKEÊ 

QUEENSWAY 

1065mm 

MOTT STREET 234mm 

1130mm 

382mm 

382mm 


Ferrocast® has proven qualities that make it ideally suitable for the manufacture of 

both wall-mounted and post-mounted street nameplates. Rust-proof, corrosionproof 

and resistant to severe weather conditions, Ferrocast street nameplates have 

the advantage of retaining their appearance and clarity, thus minimising ongoing 

maintenance costs. We can manufacture Ferrocast street nameplates to your own 

specifications, and logos, crests and reflectivity can be incorporated into both 

modern and traditional styles. 

n Font: Times Roman or Helvetica. 

n Font Colour: Black or white as standard, full range of RAL colours on request. 

n Background Colour: Black or white as standard, full range of RAL colours 

on request. 

n Border Colour: Gold as standard, full range of RAL colours on request. 

n Fixing: Face fixed. 



OLD SQUARE 176mm 

784mm 

NAVIGATION 

STREET 190mm 

855mm


RUDDINGTONÊ STREET 176mm 


1285mm 

PERSHORE ROAD 230mm 

1220mm 


GRANVILLE STREET 238mm 


1664mm 

BRASSHOUSEÊ 

PASSAGE 

1130mm 

390mm 

316

317 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 SNLC06 

Polyurethane Lamp Columns 

Reproduction of historical Lamp Column 

Signage N14 130 

electrical Systems V90 565 

Lighting Columns V91 365 

Bespoke Lamp Column 


n Due to Ferrocast’s® excellent resistance to corrosion, water and chemicals it is an 

ideal material for use in lamp columns. 

n There are eight designs to suit a wide range of street environments. 

n Flexibility in the manufacturing process means that bespoke items can be 

created to suit a specific client brief. 

n Degraded cast iron lamp columns can be recreated in Ferrocast ensuring 

traditional aesthetics are respected. 

n Lamp Columns can be supplied in most RAL colours and contrasting gold 

banding and reflective finishes are also available. 

n All Ferrocast Lamp Columns comply with the relevant safety and electrical 

British Standards. 

n Please note that lanterns are not included.

DEWSBURY GEORGIAN HANOVER JERSEY 

1185mm 

MERRICK SANDRINGHAM SOMERSET 

930mm 

Dimensions (mm) Fixing Method 

Product Column Column Width Ground 

Housing Length Fixing 

Dewsbury 1185 8000 260 n 

Georgian 1055 3830 256 n 

Hanover 1185 5500 256 n 

Jersey 1275 5000 215 n 

Merrick 930 4600 275 n 

Sandringham 990 4100 290 n 

Somerset 915 3100 225 n 

NB. Lanterns are not included 

8000mm 

4600mm 

1055mm 

990mm 

3830mm 

4100mm 

1185mm 

915mm 

5500mm 

3100mm 

1275mm 

5000mm 

318

319


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Protective Barriers 

Polyurethane Protective Barriers 321 

Ferrocast®: Decorguard 321 

Steel Protective Barriers 323 

Sineu Graff: Series 2000 and 3000 323 

‹ PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap, Neath Bus Station 320

321 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Polyurethane Protective Barriers 

Pedestrian Guard Rail, Westminster 

Decorative Pedestrian Guard Rails provide the means of directing pedestrians in 

those areas where there is a potential for them to come into conflict with traffic. 

They clearly mark those areas to be used only by traffic, with a physical barrier 

preventing pedestrians from entering the traffic zone. By directing the flow of 

pedestrians, they can be encouraged to use the safe road crossing zones. 

In areas where pedestrians need to be separated safely from heavy traffic the 

combination of composite Ferrocast® posts and our high quality steel panels 

provides the perfect solution. 

The system comprises mild steel posts coated with Ferrocast polyurethane 

combined with steel panels. Decorative cap, post and panel options mean that 

different configurations that best suit your scheme can be created. Bespoke designs 

can be commissioned on request. 

A versatile system, installations can be achieved with stepped and/or radiused layouts. 

The combination of composite Ferrocast posts and steel panels means that 

Decorguard Pedestrian Guardrail Systems have the added advantage of bending – 

not shearing or shattering – on impact. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service. 

Fixing: Posts are root fixed. High Visibility panels are mounted and lug bolt fixed. 

Pedestrian Guard Rail panels are mounted in a cup bolt fixed.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PRBA01 Protective Barriers Q41 135 Bollards....................................................... page 68 

Seating ...................................................... page 163 

Litter Bins............................................... page 205 

Cycle Parking...................................... page 228 

Polyurethane Protective Barriers 

Decorguard Decorative Guard Rail 

PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap, Neath Bus Station 

Posts 

n Composite posts are mild steel galvanised with a protective Ferrocast® coating. 

n Posts are polyester powder coated to most standard RAL colours. 

n Two dimensions of post are available 89mm and 114mm. 

n Optional post heights are available. 

n Posts are capped with decorative Ferrocast embellishments in three styles: 

Chancellor, Court or Regent. 

Rail configurations 

HV 2 

HV 4 

HV 8 

Panels 

n All panels are hot dip galvanised. 


n Galvanised panels are supplied powder coated in most RAL colours. 

Tree Protection ................................ page 283 

Notice Boards .................................... page 300 

Signage & Lamp Columns ...... page 310 

Post and Rail ....................................... page 338 

n As well as our standard range of high visibility panels, we can custom-make 

panels to your own design to enhance the character of an area. 

n High Visibility Options: For areas where it is particularly important that drivers 

can see pedestrians, high visibility panels are available. There are three rail 

configurations, shown below, which are selected according to the anticipated 

speed of traffic flow. 

322

323 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PRBA02 Protective Barriers Q41 135 Bollards ............................. page 52 

Seating ........................... page 121 


Steel Protective Barriers 

Series 2000 and Series 3000 

Series 2000 41 271, London 

Series 2000 

n Series 2000 Protective Barriers are a highly functional and aesthetic range of steel 

safety barriers with unique motif infill panels. 

n The system comprises 1.56 metres or 0.86 metres wide barriers featuring a 

8mm thick laser-cut motif panel or a motif panel with additional top rail with 

60mm diameter and 1 metre high uprights with a choice of Classic, Modern or 

Contemporary caps. 

n All individual barriers are supplied fully welded. Barriers can also be supplied for 

fully continuous construction in component form for site assembly, each panel/ 

rail being riveted to connectors on the upright. 

n The Series 2000 System is suitable for flat/level applications and is adaptable 

for direction change by welding the connectors on intermediate uprights to the 

required angle. The standard uprights offer 1.5 degrees of tolerance for direction 

change. Barriers can be stepped if a gradient is constant. 

n Barrier fixing options are ground, baseplate and removable. The root length is 

215mm but that can be extended by use of a separate 80mm extension unit. 

n The system is zinc plated and polyester powder coated and can be supplied in either 

one colour complete or with caps and additional top rail in a different colour. 

n Barriers can be supplied to the standard range of RAL (high gloss) or Sable (matt 

textured) colours. 

n Series 2000 Barriers coordinate with Series 2000 Bollards (see page 52). 





Series 3000 

n The Series 3000 barriers are characterised by contemporary design, with clean 

lines and a modern aesthetic. 

n The steel barrier is formed from a rectangular tube with a 50mm x 30mm section 

and a 30mm x 30mm section square tube, both are 2mm thick. Models 41.321 

and 41.322 also have a 30mm x 15mm section tube just below the upper rail. 

n The steel barriers are treated with the Powder Blast process, that is after cleaning 

and blasting the pieces are covered first in an epoxy powder coating to prevent 

rust and secondly in a polyester powder coating. 

n Barriers are supplied as standard in Metallic Grey 7100, but are also available in 

any RAL (gloss) or Akzo Nobel sable colour.

SERIES 2000 41 271 SERIES 2000 41 272 

SERIES 2000 41 266 SERIES 2000 41 262 

SERIES 2000 41 231 SERIES 2000 41 232 

SERIES 2000 41 253 SERIES 2000 41 251 

SERIES 2000 41 255 SERIES 2000 41 252 

324

325 

SERIES 2000 41 211 SERIES 2000 41 212 

SERIES 2000 41 281 SERIES 2000 41 282 


Product Product HAG Width Weight Standard Cap Style 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Shown Baseplate Removable Ground 

Series 2000 Safety Barrier 41.211 1000 1560 21 PC Metallic Grey Classic n n n 


Series 2000 Safety Barrier 41.221 1000 1560 24 PC Metallic Grey Modern n n n 

Series 2000 Safety Barrier 41.222 1000 860 18 PC Metallic Grey Modern n n n 

Series 2000 Safety Barrier 41.231 1000 1560 24 PC Metallic Grey Contemporary n n n 





















Series 2000 Safety Barrier 41.282 1000 860 18 PC Metallic Grey Contemporary n n n

SERIES 3000 41 301X SERIES 3000 41 302X 





Product Product HAG Width Weight Standard 

Description Reference (mm) (mm) (kg) Finish Baseplate Removable Ground 

Series 3000 Safety Barrier 41.301X 900 1500 13.8 PC Metallic Grey 7100 n n n 








326

327 

CHANCELLOR POST COURT POST REGENT POST 

CHANCELLOR 1 

CHANCELLOR 2 

CHANCELLOR 3 

CHANCELLOR 4 

CHANCELLOR 5 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

COURT 1 

COURT 2 

COURT 3 

COURT 4 

COURT 5 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

REGENT 1 

REGENT 2 

REGENT 3 

REGENT 4 

REGENT 5 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm 

1134mm

PGR3 at 715mm high and Top Vision Rail with Court Cap 

Pedestrian Guard Rail Product Selector 

1) PANEL OPTIONS: 

a) Choose from five different styles of panel: 

– High Vis panel: choose from HV2, HV4 and HV8 configurations 

– Reduced Hi Vis panel in HV8 with top vision rail 

– PGR3 900mm high 

– PGR3 715mm high with top vision rail 

– PGR2 panel. 

b) Choose the size of panel. 

2) POST OPTIONS: 

a) Choose the post dimension. 

Dimensions of 89mm or 114mm are available. 

b) Choose the post height. 

c) Choose the cap option. 

Three styles Chancellor, Court and Regent are offered. 

STOCK 

2 metre Hi Vis panels in HV8/HV4/HV2 

are available ex stock. 

PANEL POST OPTIONS 

Post Post Top Top 

Panel Panel Dimension Dimension Cap Post Intermediate End Corner Ramp Panel Panel Rail Rail Stepped 

Options Sizes 89mm 114mm Options Height 90 deg 3 deg Cupped Lugged Cupped Lugged 

Hi Vis 2000 x 900 x 12mm Chancellor n n n n n n 

in any of 1500 x 900 x 12mm 3 3 Court n n n n n n 

HV8/HV4/HV2 1000 x 900 x 12mm Regent n n n n n n 

Reduced Hi Vis 2000 x 700 x 12mm Chancellor n n n n n n n 

in HV8 1500 x 700 x 12mm 3 3 Court n n n n n n n 

(with top vision rail) 1000 x 700 x 12mm Regent n n n n n n n 

PGR3 2000 x 900 x 20mm Chancellor n n n n n n 

900mm high 1500 x 900 x 20mm 3 3 Court n n n n n n 

1000 x 900 x 20mm Regent n n n n n n 

PGR3 2000 x 715 x 12mm Chancellor n n n n n n n 

715mm high 1500 x 715 x 12mm 3 3 Court n n n n n n n 

(with top vision rail) 1000 x 715 x 12mm Regent n n n n n n n 

PGR2 2000 x 870 x 12mm Chancellor n n n n n 

1500 x 870 x 12mm 3 3 Court n n n n n 

1000 x 870 x 12mm Regent n n n n n 

328

329


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Post and Rail Systems 

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems 331 

Sineu Graff: Bordeaux Handrail 332 

Sineu Graff: Series 9100 Post and Rail System 333 

Sineu Graff: Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System 334 

Ollerton: M3 and Festival Post, and Rail System 335 

Ollerton: M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System 336 

Polyurethane Systems 337 

Benefits of Ferrocast® 338 

Ferrocast: Post and Rail Systems 339 

Ferrocast: Post, Rail and Tension Wire System 346 

Ferrocast: Post and Parapet System 347 

Ferrocast: Bespoke Post and Panel Systems 348 

Ferrocast: Bespoke Systems 349 

Ferrocast: Special Features 350 

‹ Illuminated Torbay Post and Wire System, with bespoke Ferrocast Seating, 

Waterside Bins and Geo Lighting by Woodhouse 

330

331 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Steel and Stainless Steel Systems 

Series 9600 Stainless Steel, Bicentenary Glass House, RHS Wisley 

Series 9600 front profile, RHS Wisley 

Marshalls Street Furniture supply post and rail, rail and post and tension wire systems 

in both stainless steel and steel. 

Providing the means of guiding pedestrians safely. Specifications appropriate to 

where they are to be installed can be created with a minimum of two and up to 

seven rails being specified, for post and rail systems. 

Ideal for locations where maximum visibility is desirable, post rail and tension wire 

systems feature uprights with an anti-climb profile which support rails and cables. 

The number of rails and cables can be selected to suit your scheme. 

Stainless steel systems are supplied in grade 316L stainless steel. Mild steel systems 

are protected against rust and can be polyester powder coated to a colour of 

your choice. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service. 

Sineu Graff systems offer solutions based on options of curved (anti-climb) profile or 

straight profile uprights, root fixing or surface fixing with scope for adapted system 

heights, and for the inclusion of in-line access gates. 

Bespoke detailing can be commissioned, including hardwood top rails, laser cut 

motifs, and panels which can be solid or laser cut.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PTRL11 

Fencing Q41 110 


Bordeaux Handrail 

Bordeaux Handrail, Garonne River, Bordeaux 

Bordeaux Handrail, bespoke option, kilometre marking 


Sineu Graff worked with the Landscape Architect Michel Corajoud to develop a post 

and rail system to go along the left bank of the Garonne River in Bordeaux. The result 

is a secure system which provides a transparent aesthetic allowing a maximum 

view of the river. Integral to the design is a slimline wooden handrail, which allows 

walkers to rest and lean on the surface to enjoy the view. The system also included 

access gates, plus meeting points or markers for joggers which indicate how many 

kilometres they have run. 

Material and Finish Options: Mild steel protected with a zinc rich coating and 

polyester powder coated, hardwood top rail and stainless steel cables. 

Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard RAL colour (high gloss), sable (matt 

textured) or metallic grey, other colours to special order. 

Fixing: Uprights are supplied for either base plate or root fixing. 

Options: Access gates, Panel with meeting points/joggers distance markers. 

332

333 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PTRL01 Fencing Q41 110 


Series 9100 Post and Rail System 

Series 9100 with seven rails in stainless steel, Whittington Hospital 

Series 9100 with three rails in steel, Hillingdon Hospital 


n The Series 9100 Post and Rail System has uprights with a unique curved anti- 

climb profile. The system comprises 1190mm high uprights with a choice of 

three or seven rails. The rail diameter is 42.4mm. 

n Material and Finish Options: The two standard finishes are zinc plated and 

polyester powder coated steel or grade 316L stainless steel. 

– Stainless steel uprights are only supplied matt shotpeened. 

– Stainless steel rails are supplied electropolished as standard or matt 

shotpeened if specifically requested. 

n Fixing: Uprights are supplied for either baseplate or root fixing. 

n Options: Uprights can also be supplied with a straight profile. 

n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard colour; RAL (high gloss), Sable 

(matt textured) or metallic grey; other colours to special order. 

n Assembly: The system can be supplied either as fully welded complete 

2 metres or 3 metres length barriers or as components of uprights, rails and 

rivets for construction of a continuous barrier with recommended upright 

centres of 1.7 metres (minimum 1.5 linear metres, maximum 2.0 linear metres).




Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System 

Series 9600 Stainless Steel Post, Rail and Cable, Jersey 

Series 9600 steel uprights with stainless steel cables with bespoke panels and 

Saint Vallieur logo, Belvedere Saint Vallier. 


n The Series 9600 Post, Rail and Wire System has uprights with a unique curved 

anti-climb profile. The system comprises 1190mm high uprights with two rails 

and six cables. The multi-strand cable is 6mm diameter. 

n Material and Finish Options: Two standard finish options are available either 

zinc plated and polyester powder coated steel or grade 316L stainless steel. 

– Stainless steel uprights are only supplied matt shot peened. Stainless steel 

rails are supplied electropolished as standard or matt shotpeened if 

specifically requested. 

– Cable and cable tension and anchor devices are only supplied in stainless steel. 

n Fixing: Uprights are supplied for either baseplate or root fixing. 

n Options: Uprights can also be supplied with a straight profile. 

n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard colour; RAL (high gloss), Sable 

(matt textured) or metallic grey; other colours to special order. 

n Assembly: The system is supplied as components of uprights, rails, rivets, uncut 

cable, spacers, cable tension and anchor devices with anti-vandal fixings for 

construction of a continuous barrier with maximum upright centres of 1.7 metres 

(minimum 1.5 linear metres, maximum 2.0 linear metres). 

n Cable Length/Radius: The recommended maximum single run length is 

25 linear metres. The cable may have to be replaced by rail for small radii. 

n Cable Holes: Cable holes are protected by plastic spacers. 

334

335 




M3 and Festival Post and Rail System 

M3 Post and Rail System 

M3 AND FESTIVAL POST AND RAIL SYSTEM 

Available in steel and stainless steel 

1200mm 


M3 and Festival Post and Rail System 

Versatile and practical, this system features uprights 1200mm high with a choice 

of two, three, four, five or six rails. Where appropriately specified this system will 

meet the requirements of BS EN 1317/BS7818 Specification for Pedestrian Restraint 

Systems in Metal. 

n Options: Where required uprights of 1400mm high are available to meet 

cycleway requirements as required by BS EN 1317/BS7818. 

n Material and Finish Options: 

– M3: Posts and rails are 1.4401 stainless steel (Grade 316). Matt shotpeened 

uprights contrast with highly polished rails. Shotpeened rails can be supplied to 

special order. 

– Festival: Mild steel protected with a zinc rich coating and polyester powder 

coated to a colour of your choice. 

n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard RAL colour. 

n Fixing: Uprights feature a triangular base plate with three fixing points. A root 

fixed alternative can also be supplied. 

n Modular: Standard components enable assembly to be undertaken quickly and 

easily. The lack of mechanical fixings ensures easy alteration or even repair after 

accidental impact. 

n Assembly: On site, the system is simple to assemble, no special tools are required.




M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System 

M3 Post Rail, and Wire System 


M3 and Festival Post, Rail and Wire System 

Ideal for scenic locations, this attractive system maximises visibility by using 

streamlined uprights and a two rail, six cable configuration. Where appropriately 

specified this system will meet the requirements of BSEN 1317/BS7818 Specification 

for Pedestrian Restraint Systems in Metal. 

n Cables: Cables are supplied in seven by seven configuration and manufactured 

from 1.4401 (316) stainless steel. Cable is supplied in uncut lengths for 

site installation. 

n Connectors: Connectors are supplied in a swageless configuration for easy 

installation on site. 

n Material and Finish Options: 

– M3: Posts, rails and cables are 1.4401 stainless steel (Grade 316). Matt shotpeened 

uprights contrast with highly polished rails. Shotpeened rails can be supplied to 

special order. 

– Festival: Mild steel, hot dip galvanised and polyester powder coated in a colour 

of your choice. 

n Colour: Mild steel is available in any standard RAL colour. 

n Fixing: Uprights feature a triangular base plate with three fixing points. 

Root fixing is also available. 

n Assembly: On site the system is simple to assemble, no special tools are required. 

M3 AND FESTIVAL POST AND TENSION WIRE SYSTEM 

Available in steel and stainless steel 

1200mm 

336

337 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Polyurethane Systems 

Llanelli 3 Rail Post and Rail System 

Ferrocast® Post and Rail Systems are decorative means of restricting access to 

potentially hazardous areas, they are ideally suited to waterfronts, on bridges and 

near steep inclines. 

Ferrocast Post and Rail Systems feature styles that can be specified to recreate a 

traditional look or to provide a more contemporary styling. In areas where it is 

necessary to continue or to refurbish existing schemes copies of historic posts can 

be made on request. Alternatives to post and rail systems include a post and tension 

wire system and a post and parapet system. 

Systems can be created to suit your requirements, corners and bends can be 

accommodated and banisters and handrails that are compliant with DDA 

requirements can be specified. Also facilities for chain links can be supplied to 

restrict access to entrances. 

Ferrocast post and rail is available in most standard RAL colours, a second 

colour may be used to highlight details. Civic crests and company logos can 

be incorporated into posts and schemes can be further enhanced with 

illuminated handrails. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a full site survey and installation service.



Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PTRL05 

Fencing Q41 110 Bollards ............................. page 68 

Seating ........................... page 163 



Benefits of Ferrocast® 

Ferrocast Post and Rail, Herne Bay 

The Benefits of Ferrocast Polyurethane 

Ferrocast is an engineering grade polyurethane with a proven track record in the 

harsh environments of the quarrying, mining and North Sea oil industries. It is an 

ideal material for post and rail systems as it will withstand the demanding conditions 

of modern urban environments, and harsh coastal locations. 

Ferrocast systems comprise steel posts cast into a decorative Ferrocast outer and 

steel rails with a Ferrocast coating. The internal steel core gives structural strength 

and provides increased safety. The Ferrocast polyurethane is pigmented with a 

through-colour making it the same colour as the final paint finish. This means that 

chips and abrasions will not be apparent. 

Ferrocast polyurethane will not rust and offers maximum resistance to chemical 

corrosion including saline, uric acid (human and animal) and water. 

Whole Life Costing 

Ferrocast is a popular choice for the replacement of historic cast iron installations. 

Its durability ensures minimal maintenance is required and provides a maximum life 

expectancy. In analysis of whole life costing comparing galvanised, powder coated 

steel and Ferrocast, the Ferrocast system showed whole life costs less than half those 

of galvanised systems and less than a third of powder coated steel systems. 

The images on the right show a cast iron post and steel rail system four years after 

installation. The Ferrocast system above had been installed adjacent to it just twelve 

months later and after three years it showed none of the natural degradation that 

the cast iron system showed. 

Cast Iron Post and Steel Rail, Herne Bay 






338

339 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 PTRL05 Fencing Q41 110 Bollards ............................. page 68 

Seating ........................... page 163 




Post and Rail Systems 

Berwick Post and Rail System, Slaithwaite 

Berwick Post and Rail at Slaithwaite 

Part of the regeneration scheme in Slaithwaite in Yorkshire involved the restoration 

of the old Huddersfield Narrow Canal. The requirement was for a robust, durable 

post and rail system that separated road and pedestrian traffic from the canal. 

With funding from the Millennium Commission Lottery Project, British Waterways 

and Kirklees MBC, Marshalls solution was for a Berwick Post and specially designed 

heavy duty post calculated to P2 capabilities. Marshalls also supplied gateways and 

hand rails for the staircases. 

BERWICK BUDE 

1100mm 

ANGLESEY KNEE POST 





375mm 

935mm

Deansgate Post and Rail System, Gateshead 

CLEETHORPES 

DELAVAL TRIP DREAM PARK 

1105mm 

415mm 

DEANSGATE 

1134mm 

Now offered with baseplate 

1017mm 

340

341 

Harbour Post and Rail with DDA handrail, Aberavon 

Harbour Post and Rail on steps, Aberavon 

HARBOUR 3 RAIL 

1075mm 



1347mm 1075mm

Hartlepool Post and Rail, Sovereign Harbour 

HARTLEPOOL 

JERSEY 

900mm 1033mm 

342

343 

Llanelli 3 Rail Post and Rail, Aberavon 

Llanelli Post and Rail, Aberavon 

Early in 2006 Neath and Port Talbot County Council approached Marshalls with a 

requirement to create approximately 5km of post and rail and to provide a range of 

other street furniture that had a modern aesthetic yet was capable of withstanding 

the harsh coastal environment. Marshalls solution incorporated Llanelli Posts with 

three Rails, bollards, special oval Waterside Litter Bins and Stockport Fingerposts. 

As a final touch to keep the scheme modern and fresh looking, all the components 

were produced in white. 

LLANELLI 5 RAIL 

1200mm 



1200mm 

1200mm

Scarborough Post and Rail, Scarborough 

MALVERN 

MORPETH POST 2 RAIL 

950mm 

777mm 

MORPETH POST 1 RAIL 

SCARBOROUGH 

577mm 

925mm 

344

345 

Stalybridge Post and Rail, Stalybridge 

SEAHAM 

STAVANGER 

1100mm 

901mm 

STALYBRIDGE 

TREARDDUR 

1170mm 

1100mm



Seating ........................... page 163 




Post, Rail and Tension Wire System 

Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay 

Illuminated Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay 





Ferrocast® Post, Rail and Tension Wire System 

The Torbay Post and Rails System features Ferrocast uprights with an anti-climb arch, 

supporting a continuous hand rail at the top, a rail at the bottom and eight stainless 

steel cables in between. 

Torbay Post, Rail and Tension Wire System, Torquay 

Marshalls Street Furniture were involved in the regeneration of the waterfront at 

Torquay. The scheme required improvements to be made to the town’s seaside 

facilities and public area at Beacon Quay. The proposal called for new post and rail 

systems to go around the harbour, and the area of the boardwalk overlooking the 

World War II embarkation ramps. This was the site used by troops setting off for 

Normandy and the D-Day landings in June 1944 and was given Grade II Listing by 

English Heritage in 2000. Marshalls proposed that two coordinating post and rail 

systems with anti–climb arches were employed: the Ferrocast Llanelli; featuring 

different diameter rails and the Torbay tension wire system. Both are contemporary 

in style and were specified with a silver finish with illuminated handrails. The site also 

required bespoke seating to be built and was completed with the installation of four 

large Waterside Bins. 

346

347 



Seating ........................... page 163 




Post and Parapet System 

Bradford Post and Parapet System, Bradford 

Bradford Post and Parapet System, Warrington 





n Designed for use on parapet applications which require low level containment 

the Bradford System is a decorative solution that can continue and enhance the 

traditional aesthetic of the surrounding area. 

n The Bradford Post and Panel System is designed to meet the requirements of 

BS6779: Part 1 Highways Parapets for Bridges and Other Structures. 

n Created in mild steel with Ferrocast embellishments, the Bradford system 

comprises steel posts with decorative caps in Ferrocast® and steel panels with 

Ferrocast detailing.



Seating ........................... page 163 




Bespoke Post and Panel Systems 

Bespoke Post and Panel System, Cardiff 

Bespoke Panels used with Scarborough Posts, Scarborough 





Post and panel systems can be created to a client’s specifications. Specific posts used 

in the construction of post and rail systems can be fitted with panels to continue a 

scheme or alternatively a post in an existing scheme can be replicated. 

Bespoke Post and Rail System, Cardiff 

In mid 2004, Cardiff City Council wanted to replace the existing perimeter barrier 

around the bay with one that met three specific requirements. 

1. To conform to the height requirements of the new cycle route legislation 

where the cycle route ran parallel to the water. 

2. To replicate the existing style of perimeter barrier. 

3. To be more durable than the existing perimeter barrier. 

Following extensive consultation, Marshalls were able to fulfil the brief with replicated 

Cardiff Ferrocast® Posts, 400 metres of special galvanised and powder coated panels 

and Stockport Fingerposts. The scheme was completed in September 2004. 

348

349 



Seating ........................... page 163 




Bespoke Systems 

Bespoke Post and Rail System, Bewdley 

Bespoke Post and Rail, Bewdley 





Ferrocast® is a material which easily fulfils the requirements of both the designer 

and engineer. The flexibility of the manufacturing process means that post and rail 

products can be manufactured to almost any design. Bespoke Ferrocast post and rail 

schemes have been incorporated into many imaginative schemes to enhance the 

character of the area. 

Ferrocast allows the designer more freedom than traditional materials to create their 

own individual concepts. The manufacturing process means that it is a practical 

proposition to produce specific, unusual and colourful posts and rails. Low cost 

tooling helps to ensure bespoke design is an economically viable option. 

Bespoke System, Bewdley 

In February 2005 the Environment Agency and Volker Stevin approached Marshalls 

with a brief to develop two different post styles for an upper and lower section of 

post and rail for the waterside at Bewdley. In Marshalls design solution the quay post 

for the upper section conformed structurally to BS7818 Class 3 whilst the lower quay 

post was developed with an anti-climb element. By February 2006, the designs had 

been approved and 600 metres of bespoke post and rail had been installed with 

very positive feedback.




Special Features 

Alternative rail diameters, Newport 

Illuminated handrail, Torbay 

Swivel post with DDA Handrail, Gateshead 


Special Features Include: 

n Alternative Rail Diameters: Can be accommodated in certain post and 

rail systems 

n Illuminated Handrails: Lighting units can be incorporated into handrails with 

wiring being run through continuous handrails. 

n Post with Swivel Sockets: The unique swivel post and socket allows rails to be 

adjusted within any angle up to 37 degrees to match the gradient of any ramp, 

staircase or steep incline. 

DDA Handrail 

Handrail design is one of the items covered by the British Standard Code of Practice 

BS 8300: 2001 – ‘Design Of Buildings And Their Approaches to Meet the Needs Of 

Disabled People.’ Compliance with the standards helps designers and engineers 

to create streetscapes that fulfil the requirements of the Disability Discrimination 

Act (DDA) 1995 Part III (Duty of Providers of Services to Make Adjustments). The 

standards cover such items as the design of the rail and its supports, its colouring 

and luminance and its installation. 

Where installations of refurbishment need to conform to the BS 8300: 2001, most 

notably on flights of stairs, ramps or landings, a smooth and continuous handrail can 

be added by using a special fitting. The rail is easy to grip having a circular profile 

with an outside diameter of 50mm. 

DDA bracket fixing, Aberavon 

350

351


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Bandstands, Gazebos 

and Pavilions 

Bandstands, Gazebos and Pavilions 353 

Bandstands 354 

Ollerton: Burnham Bandstand 354 

Ollerton: Imperial Bandstand 355 

Ollerton: Monmouth Bandstand 356 

Ollerton: Spa Performing Arts Bandstand 357 

Shelters 358 

Ollerton: Burnham Shelter 358 

Ollerton: Imperial Shelter 359 

Ollerton: Isis Shelter 360 

Gazebos 361 

Ollerton: Ollerton Gazebo 361 

Ollerton: Campbell Park Gazebo 362 

Pavilions 363 

Ollerton: South Hampton Pavilion 363 

Ollerton: West Hampton Pavilion 364 

Ollerton: Oriental Pavilion 365 

Bowers 366 

Ollerton: Chelsea and Bleasdale Bower 366 

‹ Burnham Bandstand 

352

353 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Bandstands, Gazebos 

and Pavilions 

Imperial Bandstand with Festival Benches, Hinckley 

Ollerton Bandstands, Shelters, Gazebos, Pavilions and Bowers are ideal ways of adding 

performance, shelter and meeting areas to your landscape. A full range of styles is 

available ranging from traditional to Far Eastern to suit many different schemes. 

Ollerton Bandstands are ideal for parks, city centre squares and other public areas. 

Each has their own style and come with a number of options ranging from steel 

or timber roofs to electrical supply points. Both Burnham and Monmouth are 

predominantly constructed from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before 

finally being coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial is manufactured from cast 

aluminium and mild steel. Both are treated against rust before being coated in a 

colour of your choice. Imperial features cast aluminium embellishments which can 

be personalised with motifs. 

The Ollerton Spa Performing Arts Bandstand is a modern, versatile design with 

functional areas. Fixtures and fittings can be easily added to create an ideal venue for 

civic performances. 

Shelters are simple ways to create rest and meeting points within landscapes. 

They can be combined with various models of Ollerton seating to create a coordinated 

aesthetic. A wide range of options is available including wind break panels. 

Gazebos and pavilions are focused around users rather than creating sheltered 

performance spaces. Available in a range of styles they are suited to almost any 

landscape. All are manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel which is then coated 

in a colour of your choice. Structures can be personalised with motifs as well as 

specified with an array of options, including seating and lighting. Some models have 

cast aluminium embellishments to add finishing touches. 

Marshalls Street Furniture also offer two types of bower which have been designed 

to allow climbing foliage to house itself around the lattices. They can be combined 

with seating to create colourful additions to garden areas. Both are manufactured 

from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before being coated in a colour of your 

choice.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BGAP01 Bandstands Q50 264 

Bandstands 

Burnham 

Burnham Bandstand 

BURNHAM 

A 

C 

D 

E 

B 


n The Burnham is an attractive bandstand that has an octagonal footprint which 

features circular detailing. It is ideal for adding a sheltered performance area to 

your landscape. 

n It consists of various parts including a galvanised steel roof, supported by 

eight 168mm diameter columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in 

a colour of your choice. 

n Burnham is available in a wide range of colours. Contrasting colours are also 

available to further enhance aesthetic appeal. 

n Burnham is available in three sizes, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. 

n The following options are available; 

– Simple Lattice Balustrade 

– Full Lattice Balustrade 

– Timber Ceiling 

– Steel Ceiling 

– Lighting 

– Electrical Access Panels (two per structure) 

– Hanging Basket Brackets 

– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Demountable/Hinged Balustrade 

– Other finials are available. 

ACROSS FRAME 


Product Size A B C D E F G 

Description 

Burnham Bandstand 10FT 3970 3240 895 2345 2450 3100 2635 

14FT 4615 4300 1315 2540 2640 4300 3680 

21FT 5500 6430 2175 2650 2750 6500 5750 

G 

F 

354

355 



Bandstands 

Imperial 

Imperial Bandstand 

IMPERIAL 

A 

D 

C 

H 

B 

E 


n The Imperial is a traditionally styled bandstand with an octagonal footprint and 

featuring cast embellishments which has been designed to fit in with more 

Victorian style landscapes. 

n It consists of various parts including a galvanised steel roof, supported by eight 

168mm diameter columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in a 

colour of your choice. 

n Three sizes are available, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. 

n Imperial is available in a wide range of colours. Contrasting colours are also 

available to highlight casting detail. 

n The following options are available: 





– Lighting 



– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Other Finials available. 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 


Product Size A B C D E F G H 

Description 

Imperial Bandstand 10FT 4070 3240 820 2220 2550 3100 2635 1000 

14FT 4775 4300 1250 2470 2800 4300 3655 1000 

21FT 5715 6430 2110 2470 2800 6500 5275 1000 

F



Bandstands 

Monmouth 

Monmouth Bandstand, Ilfracombe 

MONMOUTH 

A 

D 

C 

E 

B 


n Monmouth is a highly versatile bandstand which can change in appearance 

and personality by choice of colour. It has an octagonal footprint. The roof and 

columns can be coated in colours of your choice. 

n It consists of various parts including a steel roof, supported by lattice infill 

columns made from galvanised steel, which is coated in a colour of your choice. 

n Alternative columns are also available and in-fills can be customised to individual 

requirements. 

n Monmouth is available in three sizes, 10ft, 14ft and 21ft. 




– Lighting 


– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Other Finials available. 

ACROSS FRAME 



Description 

Monmouth Bandstand 10FT 3920 3240 720 2275 2400 3100 2635 

14FT 4400 4300 1135 2230 2400 4300 3650 

21FT 5390 6430 1695 2315 2475 6500 5720 

G 

F 

356

357 



Bandstands 

Spa Performing Arts 

Spa Performing Arts Bandstand 

PERFORMING ARTS 

A 

D 

B 


n The Ollerton Spa Performing Arts Bandstand provides the perfect venue for 

organised or impromptu events. It has been specially designed with fixtures so 

that curtains, props and staging can easily be added. 

n The cantilevered roof is supported by 168mm diameter columns, braced by 

intermediate arch panels. 




– Lighting 



– Side Awning Mountings 

– Plaques 

– Demountable/Hinged Balustrade 

– Guttering 

– Stage Curtain Rail Mounting Points 

– Roof Eve Friezes 

– Flag/Banner Poles. 



Description 

Spa Performing Arts Bandstand 21FT 6070 6430 5845 3035 3150 6500 5755 

E 

PLAN SHOWS 

BALUSTRADES 

DEMOUNTED 

ACROSS FRAME 

C G 

F

Motifs 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BGAP05 Shelters Q50 292 

Shelters 

Burnham 

Burnham Shelter 

BURNHAM SHELTER 

A 

C 

D 

E 

B 


n The Burnham is a highly functional octagonal shelter which can be used to create 

covered spaces within your landscape. It is ideal for protecting seating areas from 

the weather. 

n Burnham is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before 

finally being coated in a colour of your choice. 

n It is available in 10ft, 14ft and 21ft sizes. 






– Lighting 



– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Seating 

– Space Heaters 

– Wind Break Panels. 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 

Seating Timber Ceilings Hanging Basket Bracket 



Description 

Burnham Shelter 10FT 3970 3240 895 2345 2450 3100 2635 

14FT 4615 4300 1315 2540 2640 4300 3680 

21FT 5500 6430 2175 2650 2750 6500 5750 

F 

358

359 



Shelters 

Imperial 

Imperial Shelter 

IMPERIAL SHELTER 

A 

D 

C 

H 

B 

E 


n The Imperial is a traditionally styled octagonal shelter which can be used to 

enhance seating areas and provide cover from the elements. 

n Imperial is manufactured from mild steel which is hot dip galvanised before 

finally being coated in a colour of your choice. Imperial also features castembellishments 

which are manufactured from aluminium. 

n It is available in 10ft, 14ft and 21ft sizes. 






– Lighting 



– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Seating 

– Space Heaters 

– Wind Break Panels. 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 


Product Size A B C D E F G H 

Description 

Imperial Shelter 10FT 4070 3240 820 2220 2550 3100 2635 1000 

14FT 4775 4300 1250 2470 2800 4300 3655 1000 

21FT 5715 6430 2110 2470 2800 6500 5725 1000 

F



Shelters 

Isis 

Isis Shelter 

ISIS SHELTER 

A 

E 

D 

B 

C 

F 


n The Isis is a uniquely styled shelter which can incorporate curved or 

straight seating. 

n Isis is formed in mild steel with cast roof eave corner rosettes, hot dip galvanised 

and coated in two colours of your choice. 


– Seating 

– Side, Central or Rear Wind Break Panels. 


Product A B C D E F G H I J K 

Description 

Isis Shelter 3400 3750 1850 2000 2150 3750 1200 750 800 1725 1700 

H 

TYP 

K 

I 

J 

G 

360

361 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BGAP08 Gazebo Q50 264 

Gazebos 

Ollerton 

Ollerton Gazebo 

OLLERTON GAZEBO 

A 

D 

C 

E 

B 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 


n Ollerton and Campbell Park Gazebos are ideal ways to create sheltered 

spaces within gardens, parks and public areas. Their modular design means 

that columns, balustrade panels and even colours can be customised for 

total individuality. 

n Ollerton Gazebo is an octagonal structure formed in mild steel which is hot 

dip galvanised and then coated in a colour of your choice. It comes in three sizes, 

10ft, 14ft and 21ft. 

n Campbell Park is also an octagonal structure and can incorporate cast motifs 

within rings, different columns, arches and balustrade panels. Two sizes are 

available, 10ft and 14ft. 


– Simple Balustrade Panel 

– Plaques 

– Motifs 

– Dragon Chaser 


– Railing Balustrade 

– Seating 

– Lighting 

– Other Column Designs. 



Description 

Ollerton Gazebo 10FT 3920 3240 720 2275 2400 3100 2635 

14FT 4400 4300 1135 2230 2400 4300 3650 

21FT 5390 6430 1695 2315 2475 6500 5720 

N.B For the 10ft gazebo base pads 500mm square by 300mm deep can be used instead of the base slab, subject to satisfactory ground conditions. 

F 

Customised Options 

n Arch 

Decoration:These 

can be altered to 

your specification. 

n Lattice Column: 

Other designs are 

possible. 

n Seating: 

A Bleasdale fitted 

bench can be 

mounted in the 

gazebo.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BGAP09 Gazebo Q50 264 

Gazebos 

Campbell Park 

Campbell Park Gazebo 

CAMPBELL PARK 

A E 

D 

C 

B 


ACROSS FRAME 



Description 

Campbell Park Gazebo 10FT 4150 3240 765 2320 2630 3100 2620 

14FT 4600 4300 1180 2320 2630 4300 3745 

G 

F 

362

363 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 BGAP10 Pergola Q50 264 

Pavilions 

South Hampton 

South Hampton Pavilion 

SOUTH HAMPTON 

A 

D 

C 

E 

B 

A 


n West and South Hampton Pavilions can help add a touch of charm to gardens, 

parks or public areas. We offer a choice of styles, heights, decorative features and 

colours to allow you to create a truly unique pavilion. 

n South Hampton Pavilion is octagonal in shape and is manufactured from mild 

steel which is galvanised and finished with a colour of your choice. 

n South Hampton is available in 9ft and 12ft sizes. 


– Plaques 

– Windbreak Panels 

– Seating. 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 

n Cast Maple Leaf: Allows rain 

water to issue forth from roof 

eave corners. 

n Cast Oak Leaf: An alternative 

roof eave corner detail. 



Description 

South Hampton Pavilion 9FT 4300 2720 825 2375 2400 3000 2720 

D 

C 

12FT 5350 3660 1215 2765 2790 4150 3660 

E 

B 

F 

Min. across �ats of concrete base slab

D 



Pavilions 

West Hampton 

West Hampton Pavilion 

C 

WEST HAMPTON 

E 

B 

A 

D 

C 

E 

B 


n West Hampton Pavilion is octagonal in shape and is manufactured from mild 

steel which is galvanised and finished with a colour of your choice. 

n West Hampton is available as a 9ft Pavilion. 


– Plaques 


– Seating. 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 



Description 

West Hampton Pavilion 9FT 3800 2720 825 2375 2400 3000 2720 

F 

Min. across �ats of concrete base slab 

364

365 



Pavilions 

Oriental 

Oriental Pavilion 

ORIENTAL PAVILION 

A 

D 

C 

E 

B 

A 


n Oriental is an exquisite pavilion which has a beautiful Far Eastern aesthetic. 

It features a unique shaped roof which has contrasting colour detailing. Roof 

eaves are also embellished with castings to further enhance aesthetic appeal. 

n The Oriental is manufactured from mild steel which is galvanised and coated in 

a colour of your choice. It is available in 9ft or 12ft sizes. 


– Plaques 


– Seating. 



Description 

Oriental Pavilion 9FT 5200 3150 885 2240 2450 3100 2845 

D 

C 

12FT 6350 4050 1180 2525 2990 4300 3745 

E 

B 

ACROSS FRAME 

G 

F



Bowers 

Chelsea and Bleasdale 

Chelsea Bower 

CHELSEA BOWER BLEASDALE BOWER 

900 

1800 

2000 

2140 


n The Chelsea and Bleasdale Bowers are available with square lattice framework, 

with or without a bench, in standard form with 25mm x 5mm lattice and 30mm 

x 30mm frame. 

n If required they can be manufactured with extra heavy duty 30mm x 5mm lattice 

and 40mm x 40mm frame. A heavy duty bench made with 40mm x 40mm frame 

can also be supplied. 

n Chelsea Bower is bolted down using four expansion bolts through its base, the 

Bleasdale uses six. 

n Both bowers can be coated in a colour of your choice. 


– Spigot Mounting using four or six Long Ground Fixings 

– Extra Heavy Bower 

– 180 degree Bench 

– Finial (Bleasdale only). 

1250 2500 

2600 

366

367

www.marshalls.co.uk/trafficmanagement 


Email: trafficmanagement@marshalls.co.uk 

Traffic Calming and 

Management Systems 

Traffic Calming and Management Systems 369 

S-Ramp 371 

Speed Cushions 373 

Plateau 

Domed 

Traffic Ramps 375 

Planar 

Sinusoidal 

Speedcheck 377 

Keycheck 378 

Traffic Islands 379 

Satellite Island 

Refuge Island 

Interlocking Traffic Block 380 

Safety Barrier Systems 381 

Delta Bloc 80 

‹ Natural S-Ramp, Crossways Business Park, Dartford 

368

369




Traffic Calming and Management Systems 

Marshalls range of traffic calming systems are designed to improve environments 

for vehicular and pedestrian traffic through proactive traffic management. 

Designed to improve the livability of trafficked environments, Marshalls products 

provide a safe and secure traffic management solution for all users. 

Marshalls traffic calming products are aesthetically pleasing and proven in use 

for a variety of applications ranging from Homezones, adoptable estate roads to 

highways either new or existing. 

The accurate preformed shapes and profiles of Marshalls traffic management 

products, produced by quality controlled manufacturing processes, ensure 

compliance to standards and specifications. 

Legislation 

n All products illustrated are designed to be installed in the highway giving due 

regard to the appropriate legislation and standards. 

n 1999 No 1025: Highways, England and Wales. The Highways (Road Hump) 

Regulations 1999. 

n 1999 No 1026: Highways, England and Wales. The Highways (Traffic Calming) 

Regulations 1999. 

In addition to Marshalls traditional range of concrete traffic calming products, 

architects and specifiers are beginning to look at the use of street furniture, such as 

bollards, barriers and planters to influence the speed and flow of traffic, particularly 

with the introduction of the Homezones. 

Manual Handling 

n The recommendations of the Manual Handling Operation Regulations 1992 

should be complied with. 

‹ Ferrocast® Swansea Bollard, High Street, London 

370

371




S-Ramp 

Pre-Cast Reinforced Concrete Road Hump 

n S-Ramp is a pre-formed segmental sinusoidal profiled ramp system 

acknowledged as giving the best ride-over quality for all vehicles including 

buses and emergency vehicles, which cannot be achieved using 

in-situ methods. 

n Enables road humps or table tops of 75mm high to be constructed. 

n Provides a highly effective, speed reducing transition from the carriageway to 

the surface of the road hump table top, compatible with Concrete Block Paving 

and black top. 

n Alternatively S-Ramp units can be installed back to back to form a road hump. 

n Units can be laid kerb-to-kerb using standard pieces only. 

n Alternatively a free-standing table can be achieved by the inclusion of corner 

and side units. 

n Durable construction makes the system low maintenance reducing whole 

life costings. 

n Optimised thickness allows for haunching of the unit to aid stability, coupled 

with keyed base profile improving the resistance to imposed vehicle loads. 

n S-Ramp is suitable for use in all forms of carriageway construction. 

Note: The joint between the adjacent units needs to be sealed with M-Flex or 

alternative material approved by an engineer. 

‹ Natural S Ramp, Leeds Valley Business Park, West Yorkshire 

TMCO04 

Colours 



Pimple 

Red Buff 

Textured 

Red Marigold 


Bollards ....................... page 33 Protective Barriers ...... page 321 

Reference Length Width Height Weight Red Buff Marigold Natural 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (Ref No.) (Ref No.) (Ref No.) (Ref No.) 

Pimple 

S-Ramp Standard S1 914 200 180-255 96 RK9701500 RK9701000 RK9702000 RK9700500 

S-Ramp Corner – high, right hand S2 914 200 180-255 86 RK9761510 RK9761010 RK9762010 RK9760510 

S-Ramp Corner – low, right hand S3 914 200 180-217.5 79 RK9781510 RK9781010 RK9782010 RK9780510 

S-Ramp Corner – high, left hand S4 914 200 180-255 86 RK9761500 RK9761000 RK9762000 RK9760500 

S-Ramp Corner – low, left hand S5 914 200 180-217.5 79 RK9781500 RK9781000 RK9782000 RK9780500 

S-Ramp Side – high S6 914 200 217.5-260 105 RK9721500 RK9721000 RK9722000 RK9720500 

S-Ramp Side – low 

Textured 

S7 914 200 180-217.5 80 RK9741500 RK9741000 RK9742000 RK9740500 

S-Ramp Standard S1 914 200 180-255 96 RK9811500 RK9812000 RK9810500 

S-Ramp Corner – high, right hand S2 914 200 180-255 86 RK9841510 RK9842010 RK9840510 

S-Ramp Corner – low, right hand S3 914 200 180-217.5 79 RK9851510 RK9852010 RK9850510 

S-Ramp Corner – high, left hand S4 914 200 180-255 86 RK9841500 RK9842000 RK9840500 

S-Ramp Corner – low, left hand S5 914 200 180-217.5 79 RK9851500 RK9852000 RK9850500 

S-Ramp Side – high S6 914 200 217.5-260 105 RK9821500 RK9822000 RK9820500 

S-Ramp Side – low S7 914 200 180-217.5 80 RK9831500 RK9832000 RK9830500 

S-Ramps with reference numbers indicated in bold black are available ex-stock. 

S-Ramps with reference numbers indicated in light black are manufactured to order. Contact our sales office to discuss your requirements. 

*Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible. 

Marigold 

Natural* 

Natural* 

372

373 




Speed Cushions 

Reinforced Concrete Cushion 

Speed Cushions, Southowram Junior and Infant School, Halifax 

n Two Speed Cushion designs are offered to reduce speeds of traffic with 

differing characteristics to different levels. 

n The cushions comply with the Traffic Advisory Leaflet issued by the DfT, 

October 1994. 

TMCO05 

n One piece structural units designed to withstand all traffic loadings. 

n Easy installations and low maintenance reduces whole life costings. 

n Dimensional accuracy ensures compliance to design standard. 

n Coloured concrete contrasts with road surface increasing visibility to road users. 

Plateau Speed Cushion 

n A reinforced concrete cushion with a plateau top of 70mm. 

n A range of widths is available to suit different traffic management and 

vehicle requirements. 

n Approach/exit ramp of 1:8:6 and side slope of 1:4:3 optimised for 

effective performance. 

n Available in red although other colours can be made to order. 

Domed 

n A reinforced concrete cushion with a dome of 65mm high. 

n Rewards drivers travelling at an appropriate speed with a smoother crossing. 

n A more suitable solution than the Plateau for areas with numerous 

bus movements. 

Colours 





Red Black Buff Natural* 

*Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible.

Speed cushions available ex-stock. 

PlaTeau SPeed CuShion 

PlaTeau SPeed CuShion 

domed SPeed CuShion 

domed SPeed CuShion 

Speed Cushion Length Width* Height Weight Red Black Buff Natural 


Plateau 

SP1 Plateau 1900 1900 205 1450 TCSP10000 SP1-TCSP11000 SP1-TCSP12000 SP1-TCSP13000 



Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4) 

domed 

ReliF0001 

SP1 Domed 1900 1900 200 1470 TCSP10100 SP1-TCSP11100 SP1-TCSP12100 SP1-TCSP13100 

Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4) ReliF0001 

374

375 




Traffic Ramps 

Pre-Cast Reinforced Concrete Road Hump 

Pedestrian Crossing, Ridgeway, Arnold 

n Traffic ramps are reinforced pre-cast concrete ramp units that form part of a road 

hump installation. 

n The central plateau section of the road hump can be constructed from material 

to suit the application from concrete block paving to black top. 

n The substantial size and weight of the units ensures suitability in locations such 

as arterial routes where traffic is heavy and faster moving. 

n Across a horizontal distance of 1 metre the profile creates a ramp 70mm high. 

n Ease of installation technique ensures right-first-time construction. 

n Low maintenance reduces whole life costings. 

n Compared with in-situ construction techniques, pre-formed profiles require less 

skilled workmanship to achieve the correct profile. 

n Available in two profiles, Planar and Sinusoidal. 

Planar Traffic Ramp 

n Planar has a concrete block paving style finish. 

n Ramp profile being in one plane. 

n Robust structure with proven capability to withstand normal highway loading. 

n Range of widths allows kerb-to-kerb installation to within 100mm. 

n The Planar profile rewards a slower speed of traverse and is suited to areas where 

a greater reduction in speed is required. 

n Available in two colours as standard with other colours to special order. 

TMCO03 Bollards ....................... page 33 Protective Barriers ...... page 321 

Sinusoidal 

n Sinusoidal has a textured finish and Sinusoidal ramp profile is acknowledged to 

give the best ride quality. 

n Rewards drivers travelling at the appropriate speed with a smooth ride. 

n More suited to areas with numerous bus movements. 

n Available in three colours as standard with other colours to special order. 

Colours 



Planar 

Red Black 

Sinusoidal 

Red Natural* 



Traffic Ramp 

PlanaR SinuSoidal 

Length Width* Height Weight Red Black Natural 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (Ref No.) (Ref No.) (Ref No.) 

Planar 1200 1500 200-270 1120 TRSR30000 TRSR30002 

1200 1400 200-270 960 TRSR31400 TRSR31402 

1200 1300 200-270 890 TRSR31300 TRSR31302 

1200 1200 200-270 820 TRSR31200 TRSR31202 

1200 1100 200-270 750 TRSR31100 TRSR31102 

1200 1000 200-270 680 TRSR31000 TRSR31002 

1200 900 200-270 610 TRSR30900 TRSR30902 

Sinusoidal 1210 1500 200-270 1030 TSRB01500 

1210 1400 200-270 960 TSRB21400 

1210 1300 200-270 890 TSRB01300 TSRB21300 

1210 1200 200-270 820 TSRB01200 

1210 1100 200-270 750 TSRB01100 

1210 1000 200-270 680 TSRB01000 TSRB21000 

1210 900 200-270 610 TSRB00900 TSRB20900 

Lifting Loops M20 Swivel (pk 4) 4 ReliF0001 

*Other sizes to special order. 

Traffic ramps with reference numbers indicated in bold black are available ex-stock. 

Traffic ramps with reference numbers indicated in light black are manufactured to order. Contact our Sales Office to discuss your requirements. 

376

377 




Speedcheck 

Concrete Road Hump 

Housing development, Castleford, West Yorkshire 

n Unique product acts as a restraint and starter block for 1:10 ramp slopes to be 

constructed in block paving, however, ramps of 1:15 can also be constructed. 

n A cubic shape intended for use with flexibly laid concrete block paving, 

although other materials can be used. 

n Size and finish complements concrete block paving allowing aesthetic 

consideration in road hump design for conservation or residential areas. 

n Ramp lengths of 1000mm will create a height of 100mm (maximum advised). 

n Installation causes minimum disruption to carriageway, as excavation is only 

required beneath the ramp areas. 

n Units easily cut on site. 

n Available in three colours. 

TMCO01 Q25 215 

Q25 225 

Colours 




Red Charcoal Natural* 


Unit 

Length Width Height Weight Red Charcoal Natural 


Speedcheck 200/220/200 200 200 19.3 PV8401500 PV8400500 PV8400250 

Approximate number of units per metre width = 5. 

Speedcheck available ex-stock. 





Keycheck 

Rumble Strip and Deterrent Paving 

Car park, office facility, West Yorkshire 

n Installed in a line forming a rumble strip across the carriageway. 

n Ideal for use with concrete block paving although can be used with other 

surfacing materials. 

n When installed in alternating directions forms vehicular and pedestrian 

deterrent paving. 

n The small plan size allows complicated or irregular areas to be installed 

relatively easily. 

n Available in three colours. 

TMCO02 Q25 215 

Q25 225 

Colours 



Red Charcoal Natural* 

75 

Unit 

Length Width Height Weight Red Charcoal Natural 


Keycheck Rumble Strip 200 200 60/75 6.6 PV8351500 PV8350500 PV8350250 

Approximate number of units per metre width = 5. 

Keycheck available ex-stock. 

200 



*Natural products are manufactured from aggregates sourced locally to the works and contain no pigmentation, therefore colour variation between products from different works is possible. 

200 

15 

60 

378

379 




Traffic Islands 

One Piece Concrete Traffic Islands 

Satellite 

n A Satellite Island is a one piece reinforced concrete pre-formed traffic island for 

discrete islands, including a circular aperture for a bollard. 

– One piece construction ensures ease of installation with fewer operations 

on-site resulting in a speedier installation reducing road closure time. 

– Pre-formed in factory controlled conditions to ensure accuracy. 

– Offered in a half battered kerb profile as BS EN 1340:2003 

– Speed of installation and low maintenance reduces whole life costings. 

– 2 x M16 lifting sockets cast into product. 

– Central aperture of 350mm diameter for installation of bollard. 

Length Width Height Weight Natural 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (Ref No.) 

Satellite Islands 1500 610 170 670 TdSaT0000 

M16 Lifting Loops ReliF0002 

Refuge Islands 1800 1800 260 1587 Timea1800 

1500 1500 260 959 Timea1500 

1200 1200 260 581 Timea1200 

M16 Lifting Loops ReliF0002 

Islands available ex-stock. 

TMCO06 

Refuge 

n A Refuge Island is a one piece reinforced concrete pre-formed traffic island 

including an aperture for an illuminated ‘keep left’ bollard. 

– One piece construction ensures ease of installation with fewer operations 

on-site resulting in a speedier installation reducing road closure time. 

– Pre-formed in factory controlled conditions to ensure accuracy. 

– Offered in a half battered kerb profile as BS EN 1340:2003 

– 3 x M16 lifting sockets cast into product. 

– 400-450mm aperture for ‘keep left’ bollard. 


Bollards ....................... page 33 Protective Barriers ...... page 321




Interlocking Traffic Block 

Temporary Concrete Traffic Blocks 

n Circular concrete blocks connected by means of a galvanised bar attached 

to a central bolt. 

n Used for the construction of temporary traffic islands and junctions allowing 

trials to be undertaken without the costs of excavation. 

n Flexible and versatile to allow any size or shape of traffic island to 

be constructed. 

n Units can be reused time and time again ensuring cost-effectiveness. 

n Ease of handling and connection results in a speedy installation. 

Temporary junction, Braintree 

Length Width Height Weight Grey White Black Paint Yellow Paint Ref No. 


Interlocking Traffic Block 225 300 150 21.5 Fm7500100 Fm7500200 Fm7500300 Fm7500400 

Locking Bar for Traffic Block Fm7505000 

Traffic Block Stanchions 930 8 Fm7505100 

Traffic blocks available ex-stock. 

TMCO07 Q41 135 



380

381 




Safety Barrier Systems 

Delta Block 80 

n As our roads and highways become more congested each year, accidents are 

inevitably on the increase. 

n Delta Bloc 80 is a unique concrete safety barrier system, designed specifically 

to control the impact of a crash. 

n Designed and tested to BS EN 1317 – 1 & 2: 1998 and BS 8110, the elements can 

be placed unfixed to the road surface. 

n The interaction of its weight, additional displacement space and patented 

tension bar and coupling make it possible to absorb high energy levels. 

n The risk to passengers in the vehicle is much lower than that of rigid systems. 

Crash tests have clearly shown that the additional displacement space in the 

event of an accident results in considerable reduction of the Acceleration 

Severity Index (ASI). 

n At the heart of the system is a special coupling that links the barriers and the 

integrated tension bars together. 

n Delta Bloc 80 is a pre-cast concrete rigid safety barrier system that offers 

protection for containment levels N1 and H1 and means that the forces 

produced in any impact are absorbed throughout the entire length of 

the barrier. 

n The system’s flexibility allows it to be used permanently or temporarily. 

n Marshalls offer the Delta Bloc 80 system on a supply and fit basis, installed by our 

own operatives using Moffett Fork Lift off-loading to industry best health and 

safety practices. 

Performance 

n Delta Bloc 80 is tested and used extensively throughout Europe in containment 

level H1, and is manufactured under licence from Delta Bloc Europa GmbH. 

n Approved by the Highways Agency to containment level N1, requiring a 

working width of only 1.09 metres. 

n Complies with Interim Requirements for Road Restraint Systems (IRRRS) and 

Interim Advice Note 44/02: Appendix 2 documents. 

n Marshalls manufacturing and installation team have gained Sector Scheme 

SS2B certification. 

n Characteristic profile ensures that there is no vehicle body contact if the impact 

occurs at a shallow angle – ensuring the vehicle is left manoeuvrable and the 

barrier undamaged. 

n With direct collisions, the front wheel impacting the barrier is generally 

destroyed. This increases the rolling resistance dragging the vehicle along the 

face of the barrier and preventing it from being dragged onto the carriageway – 

reducing the risk of secondary collisions. 

n Vehicles are prevented from ‘breaking through’ the barrier by the patented 

tension bar and coupling arrangement. The tension bar has a precise tensile 

force that absorbs the impact energy. 

n The coupling is designed by optimising the acceptable deflection with the 

reduction of ASI and the associated injury to the vehicle occupants. 

n Drainage apertures cast in the base allow for surface water drainage. 

TMCO08 Q41 135 

Vehicle guidance safety barrier, Blackpool 



n Simple to install, the installation requires only positioning of the barrier and 

placement of the coupling. 

n Delta Bloc 80 units are not ‘handed’ therefore they do not require turning from 

verge to central reserve installation. 

n M24 x 400mm anchor bolts for the termination units and self-adhesive reflectors 

are available. 

Alternative Use 

n Delta Bloc 80 can be used for many non-highway applications such as perimeter 

security, lane segregation, temporary flood defences and entrance barriers.

BAffLe PLATe 

The Baffle Plate lifts the vehicle, 

transforming the impact energy 

and diminishing the overturning 

moment. Most impacts occur 

at small angles up to 2º and/or 

at low speeds. In this instance, 

the vehicle is redirected off the 

repellent plate into its proper 

course 

BASe PLATe 

The base plate is designed to give stability to the 

system and allows drainage to the kerb-side 

Delta Bloc 80 

Unit Length Width* Height Weight Ref No. 

(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) 

Intermediate 4000 600 800 2240 dB0804000 

Termination 4000 300-600 170-800 1690 dB0804001 

Coupling Redel0001 

Reflectors Red dB0000001 

Delta Bloc 80 available ex-stock. 

Tension Bar and Coupling 

Termination Unit 

RePeLLeNT PLATe 

In the event of heavy impact 

at high speeds and wide angles, 

the Repellent Plate prevents break 

through, providing optimum 

safety by interacting with the 

continuous bar 

382

383 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS01 

Materials Specification 

Concrete Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Monoscape 

Two types of concrete are used in the manufacture of Monoscape products; 

standard concrete and self compacting concrete. Standard concrete is a simple mix 

of cement and aggregate, such as gravel, with water. Self compacting concrete has 

additional strength and does not require vibrating, which makes the manufacturing 

process more efficient. 

Marshalls Street Furniture uses a number of grades of concrete in our products. Each 

type is of the highest quality and always fit for purpose. Marshalls test quality control 

cubes of concrete to ensure that they reach a minimum specification of 30 N/mm² 

at 28 days old. This ensures that products are of the highest quality. All concrete is 

tested in accordance with EN 12390-3:2001. 

Concrete in general offers many benefits when used as a material for street furniture 

products. Some of these benefits include: 

Durability Concrete street furniture products are strong and extremely robust 

which means they can withstand many forms of physical attack. Concrete products 

are also reinforced with steel to add further structural strength. 

Resistance to Corrosion Concrete will not rust or corrode and as a result can be a 

consideration for coastal locations. This ensures longevity of products and ultimately 

value for investment. 

Colours and Finishes 

Marshalls Concrete Products are available in four finishes and a number of different 

colours which can be matched to coordinate with our ranges of paving. Finishes 

available are ground, exposed, etched and polished. Patterned finishes are also 

available. Stencils are placed over the product and then sandblasted. The result is 

a patterned effect on the surface of the product. Marshalls also offer a silver grey 

colour which makes use of waste from the china clay industry. Small pieces of 

granite found in the clay are removed and normally disposed of. The granite particles 

are used by Marshalls as aggregate for products made in silver granite colour. 

This not only gives a unique finish but also offers environmental benefits 

by reducing waste. 

Smooth Grey 

Conservation 

Harvest Buff Charcoal 

Smooth White Exposed Silver Grey Exposed Cream 

New mixes to coordinate with Marshalls Paving 

Exposed White 

Exposed Black Exposed Brown Exposed Black/White Exposed River Gravel Etched Silver Grey 

Etched Pale Buff Beadalite 

Saxon 

Silver Grey 

Natural Buff Charcoal Red Marigold 

Finishes 

Polished Ground 

Maintenance 

Exposed Etched Patterned 

Concrete street furniture requires little or no maintenance. Should products become 

soiled, which is normal over time, they can be cleaned using the appropriate 

equipment. Where soiling occurs cleaning with a sweeping brush, water and mild 

detergent/non-acidic detergent can remove surface dirt and discoloration.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS01 


Concrete Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Bellitalia Concrete Products 

Bellitalia Concrete Products are manufactured using Pozzolanic concrete. Pozzolanic 

concrete contains pozzolans which are siliceous and aluminous materials with 

little or no cementing properties. When added to cement, pozzolans will, in the 

presence of moisture, react with calcium hydroxide at normal temperatures to form 

a compound with cementitious properties. Commonly used pozzolans are fly ash 

and volcanic ash. 

Pozzolanic concrete offers the following benefits when used in street furniture 

applications: 

Increased Strength As concrete cures free lime is formed, with pozzolanic filler 

in the concrete the resultant reaction, when water is present, will fill the voids in the 

concrete. The pozzolanic reaction will occur whilst the concrete is still plastic thus 

preventing any expansive failure. The benefit of this is a more durable and stronger 

concrete. 

Increased Durability The reduced volume of pores in pozzolanic concrete help to 

prevent the ingress of water born chemicals such as sulphates and chlorides. This 

reduces the risk of failure from ground sulphates, acids and sea water, making these 

products suitable for use in all environments. 

Colours 

Concrete products are available in two colours, silver grey and dark grey as standard. 

Black is available as a special order. 

Reconstituted Marble Aggregate 

Bellitalia also offer a range of polished products in which pieces of marble aggregate 

are added to the pozzolanic mix to create a unique aesthetic. This is then put 

through a unique polishing process before being coated in a clear varnish to give a 

fine, lustrous, polished finish. 

Colours 

Polished concrete products are available in seven different colours. 


Nero Porfido 

384

385 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Natural Stone Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Granite is formed from the cooling of molten rock; this violent elemental process 

combined with the presence of different proportions of minerals in each deposit 

produces striking crystalline structures in a wide range of subtle colours. No two 

pieces of granite are identical. Each piece is custom made enabling you to choose 

the colours and textures of your individual piece or suite of furniture. 

Natural stone offers the following benefits: 

Quality Control Only first grade granite is used in our street furniture products. 

This means that they are free from veining and spots which can often lower the 

overall aesthetic appeal of the stone. Our supplier is externally accredited with 

ISO9001 QA system. Marshalls also have a dedicated quality control team member 

who inspects the quality of the granite before manufacture. 

Ethically Sourced Marshalls was the first hard landscape manufacturer to become 

a member of the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI). Our granite is sourced from an ETI 

audited supplier to ensure compliance with the ETI Base Code. 

Durability Granite is an extremely strong material and is ideal for use in street 

furniture applications. It is resistant to staining and non-permeable which ensures 

a product with a long life. Granite is also resistant to scratching. 

Maintenance 

As granite is virtually inert it requires very little maintenance and can be cleaned 

using a power washer. 

Colours 

Geoform Furniture is available in six different colourways. 

Silver Grey Mid Grey 

Polished 

Black Light Beige 


Fine Picked Polished Fine Picked 

Pink Dark Green 


Polished Fine Picked Polished Fine Picked 

MATS02 

Finishes 

The range is available in a choice of two finishes: 

Polished Enhancing the natural beauty of the stone, providing an elegant lustrous 

finish with enhanced aesthetic qualities. 

Fine Picked Yielding a natural looking matt, textured finish that possesses superior 

slip resistant properties.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS03 


Cast Iron and Aluminium Material Specifications, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

The two most common forms of iron used today are grey iron, commonly known 

as cast iron, and ductile iron. Marshalls Street Furniture uses only ductile iron in 

its cast iron products. The main difference between the two types of iron is their 

chemical make-up. Grey iron is made up of elongated flakes of graphite where as 

ductile iron has spherical graphite particles. During the manufacturing process of 

ductile iron graphite is formed, this solidifies and causes an internal expansion. 

This eliminates defects caused by shrinkage that other cast iron types are prone to, 

and gives ductile iron an increased strength to weight ratio when compared with 

grey iron. Ductile iron is therefore less prone to fracturing in usage. Ductile iron also 

uses less energy and resources in its manufacture; it may be cast either without the 

use of additional feeders or with a smaller quantity than those used for other types 

of iron. This reduced requirement for feed metal increases the productivity of ductile 

iron and reduces its material and energy requirements. All Marshalls Street Furniture 

cast iron products are manufactured to BS EN 1563:1997. 

The main benefits of using ductile iron are as follows: 

Durability Cracking is eliminated due to the spherical formation of the graphite 

particles, increasing the ductility of the iron, and making it less brittle. 

Greater Impact Resistance Due to the extra strength and ductility of cast iron, 

when compared to grey iron, it has a higher resistance to impact. This makes ductile 

cast iron an ideal material for bollards as they will not fracture on impact. 

Corrosion Resistance Ductile iron offers greater corrosion resistance when 

compared with grey iron. Also, each piece of street furniture is protected against 

rust with a rust inhibited primer before being painted with a gloss paint finish. 

This ensures longevity of the product. 

Aluminium 

Marshalls Street Furniture also use cast aluminium in some of its products. Cast 

aluminium has similar properties to cast iron such as durability and high impact 

resistance. However it is much lighter, this is particularly useful for demountable 

bollards. Cast aluminium will not rust and as a result requires less maintenance 

when compared with cast iron. 

386

387 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Stainless Steel Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendations 

Grades of Stainless Steel 

Stainless steel from the Austenitic range are selected for use in street furniture 

fabrication. There are two main grades of Austenitic stainless steel used in our street 

furniture; grades 304 (1.4301 EN classification) and 316 (1.4401 EN classification). 

Each grade of stainless steel is suited to different locations. Grade 316 (1.4401) is 

suited to all areas, especially marine locations where high sodium chloride levels in 

the air can degrade other types of stainless steel. Grade 304 (1.4301) is more suited 

to urban locations where there is less risk of sodium chlorides contaminating the 

surface of the steel. Our products are of the highest quality and will perform their 

purpose whilst remaining aesthetically pleasing throughout their lifetime provided 

the correct grade of stainless steel is specified and maintenance is carried out when 

necessary. 

The main differences between the two grades are as follows: 

• Grade 316 (1.4401) has a greater chromium and nickel content and includes 

molybdenum. This increases its corrosion resistant properties and makes it 

less susceptible, when compared to grade 304 (1.4301), to surface pitting and 

staining. 

• Recommended maintenance schedules for the two grades differ slightly 

due to the differences in their chemical make-up. The table below shows the 

recommended cleaning frequencies for the two grades of stainless steel in each 

type of atmosphere. 

Location 304 (1.4301) 316 (1.4401) 

Internal As required to maintain appearance or design 

Suburban or rural 6-12 month intervals (as appropriate to location and design) 

Industrial or urban 3-6 months 6-12 months 

Coastal or marine Not recommended 6-12 months 

MATS04 

Stainless steel has the following advantages: 

Durability Austenitic stainless steel is very durable making it ideal for use in street 

furniture applications. 

High Corrosion Resistance Increased amounts of chromium and the addition of 

nickel increase austenitic stainless steel’s resistance to corrosion. This lessens the risks 

of surface pitting occurring, lowering the overall aesthetic quality of the material’s 

finish. 

Resistant to Staining Austenitic stainless steel is highly resistant to staining. This 

ensures that products remain looking their best for longer. Furthermore, it requires 

very low maintenance, lowering costs in the longer term. 

100% Recyclable Stainless steel is one of the most environmentally friendly metals 

used by man today. If selected and maintained correctly it will remain attractive 

over its required life cycle. Once it is no longer needed it can be recycled. Around 

90% of stainless steel is made from recycled scrap. It is stainless steel’s corrosion 

resistant property that makes it a “green” material. If well maintained corrosion is 

highly unlikely, as a result the metal can be fully recycled when no longer essential. 

Stainless steel has no down cycling no matter how many times the steel has been 

recycled. For architects that are looking for “green” materials to use in their designs, 

stainless steel should be a definite consideration. 

Cleaning and Maintenance 

Stainless steel requires relatively low maintenance. However its corrosion resistant 

and aesthetic properties can be compromised if its surface is not kept clean. Regular 

cleaning schedules will enhance the performance of the product and result in a 

long service life. 

Surface contamination is the main cause of staining. This can be down to minute 

particles of detritus or iron settling on the surface of the steel during installation. 

Common problems occur when iron particles from the surrounding environment, 

for example stone cutting equipment, gather on the surface of the metal. These 

particles then rust and give the appearance of staining. In addition, naturally 

occurring atmospheric conditions can produce deposits which may be corrosive, 

e.g. salt deposits from marine atmospheres, or highway gritting in winter. 

The cleaning frequency is dependent on the application, however cleaning is 

recommended when the metal is soiled. In doing so, the original appearance can 

be restored. 

Stainless steel is very easy to clean. Washing with soap or mild detergent and warm 

water followed by a clear water rinse is usually adequate. Where stainless steel has 

become extremely dirty alternative methods of cleaning can be used, as shown in 

the table. 

Marshalls Street Furniture offer a stainless steel cleaning pack, for further information 

contact our Sales Order Office.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Stainless Steel Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendations 

Requirement Suggested Method 1,2 Comments 

Routine cleaning of light soiling 

Soap, detergent or dilute (1%) ammonia solution in warm clean 

water. Apply with a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft-fibre brush 

then rinse in clean water and dry 6 

Fingerprints Detergent and warm water, alternatively, hydrocarbon solvent 

Oil and grease marks 

Stubborn spots, stains and light 

discoloration. Water marking. 

Light rust staining 

Localised rust stains caused by 

carbon steel contamination 

Adherent hard water scales and 

mortar/cement splashes 

Heating or heavy discolouration 

Badly neglected surfaces with 

accumulated grime deposits 

Paint, graffiti 

MATS04 

Hydrocarbon solvents (methylated spirit, isopropyl alcohol 

or acetone) 2 

Mild, non-scratching creams and polishes. Apply with soft cloth or 

soft sponge and rinse off residues with clean water and dry 6,7 

Proprietary gels, or 10% phosphoric acid solution (followed 

by ammonia and water rinses), or oxalic acid solution (followed by 

water rinse) 6 

10-15 volume % solution of phosphoric acid. Use warm, neutralise 

with dilute ammonia solution, rinse with clean water and dry6 . 

Alternatively soak in a 25% vinegar solution and use a nylon brush 

to remove deposits 

a) Non-scratching cream or polish 

e.g. Solvol Auto Chrome Metal Polish 1,9 

Satisfactory on most surfaces 

Proprietary spray-applied polishes available to clean and 

minimise remarking 

Alkaline formulations are also available with surfactant additions 

e.g. D7 Polish1 Avoid cleaning pastes with abrasive additions3 . Suitable cream 

cleansers are available with soft calcium carbonate additions, 

e.g. ‘Cif’, or with the addition of citric acid, e.g. Shiny Sinks1 . 

Do not use chloride solutions8,9 Small areas may be treated with a rubbing block comprising fine 

abrasive in a hard rubber or plastic filler. Carbon steel wool should 

not be used, nor should pads that have previously been used on 

carbon steel. A test should be carried out to ensure that the original 

surface finish is not damaged 

Proprietary formulations available with surfactant additions. 

Take special care when using hydrochloric acid based 

mortar removers 8,9 

a) Creams are suitable for most finishes, but only use ‘Solvol’ on 

bright polished surfaces. Some slight scratching can be left. 

b) Nylon-type pad, e.g. ‘Scotchbrite’ 3,4,5 b) Use on brushed and polished finishes along the grain 

A fine, abrasive paste as used for car body refinishing, 

e.g. ‘T-cut’ rinsed clean to remove all paste material and dried1 Proprietary alkaline or solvent paint strippers, depending upon paint 

type. Use soft nylon or bristle brush on patterned surfaces 

May brighten dull finishes. To avoid a patchy appearance, 

the whole surface may need to be treated 

Apply as directed by manufacturer 

Notes 

1. The products referenced in this information sheet are understood to be suitable for stainless steels. However, no endorsement of the products or their manufacturers is implied and it is acknowledged 

that other manufacturing companies may provide products of equal or better quality. The following companies manufacture proprietary names mentioned: – ‘Cif’ – Lever Brothers Ltd, ‘Shiny Sinks’ – 

Home Products Ltd, ‘Ajax’ – Colgate Palmolive Ltd, ‘D7 Stainless Steel Polish’ – Diversey Ltd, ‘T-Cut’ – Automotive Chemicals Ltd and ‘Solvol Auto Chrome Metal Polish’ - Hammerite Products Ltd 

2. Cleaning agents should be approved for use under the relevant national environmental regulations and, in addition, prepared and used in accordance with the manufacturers’ or suppliers’ 

health and safety instructions. Solvents should not be used in enclosed areas. 

3. Nylon abrasive pads should be adequate for dealing with most deposits. If a more severe treatment is needed to mask coarse scratches or physical damage on a surface, use the finest abrasive 

medium consistent with covering the damage marks. With directional brushed and polished finishes, align and blend the new “scratch pattern” with the original finish, checking that the resulting 

finish is aesthetically acceptable. Silicon carbide media may be used, especially for the final stages of finishing. Avoid using hard objects such as knife blades and certain abrasive/scouring agents as it 

is possible to introduce surface scuffs and scratches. Scratching is particularly noticeable on sink drainer areas. These are usually superficial and can be removed with proprietary stainless steel cleaners 

or, alternatively, with a car paint restorer, such as ‘T-cut’. 

4. If wire brushes are used, these should be made of a similar or better grade of stainless steel. Ensure that all abrasive media used are free from sources of contamination, especially iron and chlorides. 

5. When cleaning a surface with any chemical preparation or abrasive medium, a trial should be done on a small, unobtrusive hidden or non-critical area of the surface, to check that the resulting finish 

matches with the original. 

6. To avoid water marks, use clean rinsing water, such as reasonable quality potable (tap) water. Drying marks may be avoided using an air blower or wiping with clean disposable wipes. 

7. Rust marks or staining on stainless steels is unlikely to be the result of corrosion to the stainless steel itself. These marks are likely to result from small particles of carbon steel from wire wool or 

scouring pads becoming attached or embedded in the surface. In the damp environment of a sink, these iron particles rust and cause staining. Rust marks may be removed using non-scratching 

creams or alternatively using an oxalic acid solution, where iron particles have been embedded in the surface. Special precautions are necesary with oxalic acid, as, although it may not ‘burn’ 

unprotected skin, it is poisonous, if ingested. 

8. Chloride-containing solutions, including hydrochloric acid-based cleaning agents and hypochlorite bleaches can cause unacceptable surface staining and pitting, and should not be used in 

contact with stainless steels. Under no circumstances should concentrated bleaches contact decorative stainless steel surfaces. Hydrochloric acid based solutions, such as silver cleaners, building 

mortar removal solutions must not be used in contact with stainless steels. Hypochlorite containing bleaches must be used in the dilutions suggested in the manufacturers’ instructions and contact 

times kept to a minimum. Thorough rinsing after use is very important. A frequent cause of staining and micropitting of stainless steels is splashing with undiluted bleach solutions and mortar 

cleaners. 

9. After a repair or fire damage it may be necessary to clean products using nitric acid-hydrofluoric acid pickling pastes or nitric acid passivation solution. Changes in surface appearance usually result 

when cleaning with these acids. Strong acids should only be used for on-site cleaning when all other methods have proved unsatisfactory. Nitric and phosphoric acids can be used with care for 

cleaning and maintenance on stainless steel items. Citric acid cleaners are less potentially hazardous. Rubber gloves should be used when handling strong acids and care taken to avoid spillage over 

adjacent areas (see note 2). 

10. If all the suggestions and actions in the table have been attempted unsuccessfully, it is worth bearing in mind that stainless steel can be mechanically polished or electropolished by specialists on 

site. Stainless steel is homogenous and does not rely on surface pitting for its corrosion resistance. If in difficulty please contact our Sales Office for assistance. 

This information has been provided by the British Stainless Steel Association (BSSA) and should be considered as current best practice only. Should you be unsure as to the suitability of any 

commercially available cleaner always check with the product manufacturers. 

388

389 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Steel Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Carbon steel or mild steel as it is more commonly known is a highly functional 

material when used in street furniture applications. It can withstand high impacts 

which is particularly useful when used as a bollard material. The main features and 

benefits of steel are as follows: 

Durability Steel is an exceptionally strong material and has a high strength to 

weight ratio. This makes it an ideal material for use in street furniture applications as 

it can withstand high impact without becoming severely damaged. 

Resistance to Corrosion All our steel products are hot dip galvanised to coat 

them in a 40-60 micron zinc covering. Hot dipping is a process whereby the steel is 

submerged in a bath of molten zinc for around 4-5 minutes. This forms a thin layer 

of zinc which helps protect the steel from corrosion. The process complies with the 

BS EN ISO 1461 standard for hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel. 

In addition to galvanising, polyester powder coating increases steel’s weathering 

characteristics making it even more resistant to corrosion. 

Resistant to Chips and Abrasions In addition to the galvanising process, some 

steel products have a polyester powder coating. Polyester powder has excellent 

colour and gloss retention in outdoor exposure. It also has good wear resistant 

properties which gives our products more resistance to chips and abrasions. 

Colours 

Polyester powder coating is available in full range of RAL colours. 

MATS05 

Maintenance of Polyester Powder Coated Steel Products 

Once steel has been effectively treated against corrosion it will require very little 

maintenance. Polyester powder coated steel is extremely easy to clean and has a 

long life span. In order to retain the aesthetic qualities of polyester powder coated 

steel products, it is important that they are cleaned regularly. The frequency of 

cleaning depends upon the environment in which the product is situated. 

In urban environments we recommend a maximum of 18 months between cleaning 

operations, unless undue soiling is apparent on the coating. In this case, cleaning 

should be done more frequently. In areas of high pollution, marine and swimming 

pool environments cleaning should be carried out every three months. 

Polyester powder coating can be cleaned using a solution of mild detergent in 

warm water. All surfaces should be cleaned using a soft cloth, sponge or natural 

bristle brush. Use of abrasive materials should be avoided as this will damage the 

coating, lowering the aesthetic of the product. If the product is heavily soiled then 

repeated cleaning may be required. In order to assist with this problem the following 

products have been tested: 

• Ajax Cream 

• Liquid Gumption 

• Flash in water 

• Ajax Liquid in water 

While tests show that products of this type may be used to successfully remove 

heavy surface deposits, extra care must be taken to avoid any scuffing of the powder 

coating film. 

It is recommended that in all cases, such products are reserved for heavy soiled 

coatings only. Cleaning products should be tested on a small area first to assess their 

efficiency. After application all detergents and cleaners must be thoroughly rinsed 

away with clean water, ensuring there is no risk of pollution to the surrounding area. 

The information contained should be considered as best practice only. Should you 

be unsure as to the suitability of any commercially available cleaner always check 

with the product manufacturers.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS06 


Polyurethane Materials Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Ferrocast® is created from a polyurethane compound which comprises two 

components. When both parts are mixed together they create a thermal reaction, 

known as polymerisation, which hardens the compound, creating a thermo set 

material. The Ferrocast polyurethane compound can be cast into very complex 

shapes, making Ferrocast extremely versatile. To increase the strength of some 

Ferrocast products, they are set around a steel core. 

The main benefits of Ferrocast are as follows: 

Resistance to Corrosion As Ferrocast is a non-ferrous material it is completely 

resistant to rust and corrosion. This makes Ferrocast an ideal material for use 

in coastal areas where high saline content in the atmosphere can cause other 

materials, such as cast iron, to corrode. Ferrocast is a highly suitable replacement for 

degraded cast iron which is often used in post and rail systems in harbours. 

High Abrasion and Chip Resistance The polyurethane cast product is coated with 

a two part polymer paint which chemically bonds itself to the surface. This increases 

resistance to chips and abrasions. Furthermore, the Ferrocast polyurethane is 

pigmented to the same RAL colour as the polymer paint finish. This ensures that the 

aesthetic of the product is not compromised should any damage occur to the paint. 

Durability Ferrocast was developed for use in mining, quarrying and North Sea oil 

industries. This means it can perform in the toughest of environments. 

Non-Freezing Ferrocast will not freeze which makes it a suitable material with 

which to coat rails with as it will not be cold to the touch. This contributes towards 

some of the requirements for D.D.A. compliance for Post and Rail systems. 

Versatility Ferrocast can be shaped into almost any style. A simple moulding 

process is all that is required to create a finished product. Standard or bespoke 

products can be easily made giving the designer absolute freedom in creating 

whatever piece of street furniture they require. Fully coordinating ranges of bespoke 

street furniture can also be created. 

Reproductions Original cast iron street furniture which has become degraded can 

be replicated easily, ensuring the landscape’s aesthetics are not affected. 

Low Cost Tooling Tooling costs for bespoke items of street furniture can be 

expensive. When compared with other processes, Ferrocast has low tooling costs 

offering solutions for all budgets. 

Colours 

Ferrocast products can be supplied in most RAL colours and come with a range 

of options including gold banding and ballotini rings. For a full colour list please 

see page 394. 

Maintenance 

Due to its non-ferrous and high chip and abrasion resistant properties, Ferrocast 

requires only minimal maintenance which means that life time costs of the product 

are low. Generally, cleaning regimens can be infrequent if dirt and grime build up is 

minimal. Products can be cleaned using a mild detergent, water and a soft cloth. 

390

391 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS07 


Sineu Graff Timber Material Specification 

Hardwood and Softwood used in Sineu Graff products is sourced exclusively from 

sustainable plantation forests, some of which are certified by the FSC. Each type of 

timber is rigorously checked at each stage of their transformation as they are put 

through a process of drying, planing and machining before being treated prior to 

final assembly. 

Hardwood 

Hardwood is Garapa timber from sustainable plantation forests, some of which is 

processed and then treated with solvent free, natural coloured emulsion which 

protects against ingress of water, fungus and insects. This is applied in two stages. 

The first stage is a flow-coat application to 20 microns. The wood is then coated 

using a fully automated electrostatic process to 100 microns. This not only protects 

the hardwood but also gives a high quality finish. Various colours are available 

depending on product type. Please refer to individual product pages for details. 

Softwood 

Softwood is a specially selected high quality timber from sustainable local sources 

which are closely situated to Sineu Graff in the Alsace region of France. Softwood 

is pressure treated and sealed with a ‘green tint’ protective stain which is free from 

arsenic and chrome. Timber is immersed in a liquid preservative and placed in an 

autoclave forcing the chemical deep into the wood fibres. This approach ensures 

that the chemical makes it to the core of each piece of wood making it much more 

effective than simply soaking the wood in a treatment chemical.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Moulded Polyethylene Material Specification, Colourways and Maintenance Recommendations 

Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) is a highly versatile plastic material ideal for 

moulding, and is used in a number of different street furniture products. Plastic 

street furniture can be used in an array of different landscapes and is even suited 

to harsh coastal areas where atmospheric conditions can degrade other materials 

rapidly. The benefits of using MDPE are as follows: 

Durability MDPE is extremely durable with outstanding impact, fracture and shatter 

resistance properties. These mechanical properties are tested to BS 2782. 

Weathering Properties MDPE is ideal for external applications. Materials used are 

UV stabilised to meet the demands of Northern Hemisphere weather conditions. 

Chemical Resistance The material is resistant to most acids, salts and solvents. 

Environmental elements such as acid rain, soot, diesel fumes, salt and seawater will 

not corrode MDPE. 

Manufacturing Standards (as applicable) All Marshalls Street Furniture MDPE 

products are manufactured to BS EN ISO 9002. 

Plastic materials: Mechanical properties tested to BS 2782. 

Hot dip galvanised: BS 729 

Powder coating: BS 3900 

Standard Colours 

Black 

PMS BLACK 

Ultramarine Blue 

PMS 288 

Reflex Colours 

Black 

PMS BLACK 

Onyx 

PMS BLACK 7 

Trafalgar Blue 

PMS 2955 

Bluebell White 

Heritage Colours 

Black 

PMS BLACK 

Onyx 

PMS BLACK 7 

Modern Colours 

Black 

PMS BLACK 

Onyx 

PMS BLACK 7 

Heritage Green 

PMS 5605 

Golden Yellow 

PMS 116 

Heritage Green 

PMS 5605 

Racing Green 

PMS 5467 

Burgundy 

PMS 5115 

Pallet Orange 

PMS 165 

Burgundy 

PMS 5115 

Admiralty Grey 

PMS 425 

Admiralty Grey 

PMS 425 

Dark Green 

PMS 553 

Classic Navy 

PMS 533 

MATS08 

Kwiksave Grey 

PMS 423 

Grey White 

PMS COOL GREY 1 

RSJ Green 

PMS 349 

Tile Grey 

PMS 7540 

Recyclable MDPE is an environmentally friendly material and is 100% recyclable. 

Some of Marshalls Street Furniture plastic products can be manufactured using 

recycled materials where appropriate. The recycled plastic is made using a 

combination of 50% chipped bottles and 50% regular polymer. Making use of 

recycled plastic bottles at the chipped bottle stage ensures that re-processing is 

kept to a minimum. Bottles are collected, washed, chipped and then mixed with the 

polymer. 

Colours 

Our full range of colours can be found below. We also offer a range of 

personalisation options including corporate colouring and branding. 

Maintenance 

The solid body colour is permanently moulded-in, eliminating the need for 

maintenance painting. Units are wear resistant, scratches and parking nudges being 

less evident. Products can be flushed with clean water and then washed with a mild 

detergent solution using a bristle brush or sponge. Care should be taken not to 

apply undue pressure that may damage labels. Flush clean with water after washing. 

Kwiksave Grey 

PMS 423 

Racing Green 

PMS 5467 

Classic Navy 

PMS 533 

Bluebell White 

Tile Grey 

PMS 7540 

Boat Blue 

PMS 3005 

Dark Brown 

PMS 4975 

Red Signal 

PMS 485 

392

393 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS09 


Recycled Plastic Composite Material Specification and Maintenance Recommendation 

Marshalls Street Furniture has an exclusive partnership agreement with Intruplas, 

a recycled plastic composite (RPC) manufacturer, to work together to develop and 

distribute street furniture made from recycled plastic and other recyclable materials. 

Intruplas have a very strong environmental ethos and contribute to helping develop 

a sustainable environment. Their core belief is that what is good for business can 

be good for the environment. In keeping with their ethos, Intruplas ensure that all 

electricity used on their site comes from renewable resources. Furthermore, they are 

accredited by the Environment Agency as recyclers of plastic waste. 

All of Intruplas’s hard work and commitment to the environment has not gone 

unnoticed as they have received awards for excellence including an award from 

former Prime Minister, Tony Blair. The award was presented to them for achieving all 

the targets set out in Agenda 21. Additionally, Intruplas were awarded with the Eco 

Design for Profit award from the Environmental Business Network. 

RPC products are manufactured from waste material and are therefore made from 

100% recycled plastic. No paint, preservation or surface treatments are added to the 

mix. Intruplas are also unique in the fact that they can process many forms of waste 

plastic including plastic which is deemed to be contaminated. 

The manufacturing process starts with the arrival of plastic waste which comes in an 

array of sizes and formats. Intruplas clean and granulate waste on site to make it easier 

to handle. Different types of plastic are blended together to ensure the correct mix 

is achieved. The mix is melted and this process, combined with the special blend of 

plastics, creates a new material which has a high tensile strength making it ideal for 

use in street furniture applications. The material is then extruded into profiles, each 

one of which is hand-finished and assembled as required. 

The main benefits of using RPC in street furniture applications are as follows: 

Durability RPC is extremely strong meaning it can perform its purpose even in 

the toughest of urban environments. Due to the robustness of the material it has 

increased resistance to physical attack. Each piece of RPC street furniture is free from 

cracking and splintering and will not chip. This offers improved safety in public areas. 

Increased Strength Sagging can sometimes be a problem in recycled plastic 

seating when only one type of plastic is used in the mix. Because Intruplas use a 

number of plastics the material has a much higher strength and products are not 

prone to sagging. 

Long Lifespan RPC is impervious to water, insect and fungal ingress and as a result 

will not rot. This ensures that the product has a long life and means that repair and 

replacement costs can be kept to a minimum. Whole life costs of the RPC products 

can be up to a third of the costs of a traditional solution. 

Consistent Quality As an extruded product, every piece of recycled plastic has 

consistent characteristics unlike timber. 

Environmentally Friendly Using RPC in street furniture not only offers the 

customer a low cost product but also helps to reduce the amount of plastic waste 

which goes to landfill or incineration. Recycling a plastic bottle can conserve 

enough energy to light a 60W bulb for up to 6 hours. As RPC is used as replacement 

for timber it also reduces the amount of trees that need to be felled. Official figures 

state that for every ton of recycled plastic used, 1.66 tons of CO output is saved. 

2 

100% Recyclable Each piece of RPC street furniture can be completely recycled at 

the end of its useful life. 

Maintenance 

No painting or treatment of the material is required, which not only minimises 

general maintenance but also lowers costs and environmental impact. The surface 

of the product can be wiped clean easily. Paint or marker pen can be easily removed 

with thinners without damaging the product.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

MATS10 


RAL standard colour list for paint and powder 

Standard Colour Chart 

Standard RAL colours for each brand are listed below. 

Products are listed with a gloss finish as standard. Ferrocast® is available in three finishes, matt, semi gloss and gloss. 

Other RAL colours are available to order 

Sineu Graff Ollerton Ferrocast Sineu Graff Ollerton Ferrocast 

Gloss Gloss Gloss S. Gloss Matt Gloss Gloss Gloss S. Gloss Matt 

CREAM/YELLOW GREEN 

RAL 1001 ● ● RAL 6000 ● ● 

RAL 1003 ● ● RAL 6002 ● ● ● 

RAL 1006 ● ● RAL 6004 ● 

RAL 1011 ● RAL 6005 ● ● ● ● ● 

RAL 1013 ● ● ● RAL 6009 ● ● 

RAL 1015 ● ● ● RAL 6010 ● 

RAL 1016 ● RAL 6011 ● 

RAL 1018 ● ● ● RAL 6012 ● 

RAL 1021 ● ● RAL 6013 

RAL 1023 ● ● RAL 6014 ● 

RAL 1028 ● ● ● RAL 6018 ● ● ● 

BS10E53 ● RAL 6019 ● ● 

RAL 6021 ● 

ORANGE RAL 6024 ● 

RAL 2000 ● ● ● RAL 6025 ● 

RAL 2002 ● ● ● RAL 6026 ● 

RAL 2004 ● ● RAL 6028 ● ● ● 

RAL 2011 ● RAL 6029 ● 

RAL 6034 ● 

RED BS12B29 ● 

RAL 3000 ● ● ● ● BS14C39 ● 

RAL 3002 ● 

RAL 3003 ● ● ● ● ● GREY 

RAL 3004 ● ● ● RAL 7000 ● ● 

RAL 3005 ● RAL 7001 ● ● ● 

RAL 3009 ● RAL 7005 ● ● ● 

RAL 3011 ● RAL 7011 ● ● 

RAL 3016 ● RAL 7012 ● ● ● ● 

RAL 3018 ● RAL 7016 ● ● ● ● ● 

RAL 3020 ● ● ● ● ● RAL 7021 ● ● 

BS04E53 ● RAL 7023 ● ● 

RAL 7024 ● 

PURPLE RAL 7031 ● ● ● 

RAL 4002 ● RAL 7032 ● ● ● 

RAL 4003 ● ● RAL 7035 ● ● ● 

RAL 4004 ● RAL 7040 ● 

RAL 4008 ● ● ● RAL 7042 ● ● ● 

BS00A05 ● 

BLUE 

RAL 5000 ● BROWN 

RAL 5002 ● ● ● ● ● RAL 8001 ● ● 

RAL 5003 ● ● ● ● RAL 8007 ● 

RAL 5004 ● RAL 8011 ● ● 

RAL 5005 ● RAL 8014 ● ● ● 

RAL 5010 ● ● ● ● RAL 8016 ● 

RAL 5011 ● ● RAL 8019 ● ● 

RAL 5013 ● ● ● ● RAL 8028 ● ● 

RAL 5015 ● ● ● ● ● BS08B29 ● 

RAL 5019 ● 

RAL 5021 ● SILVER 

RAL 5022 ● ● ● RAL 9006 ● ● ● 

BS20C40 ● ● RAL 9007 ● ● ● 

BLACK 

SINEU GRAFF SABLE COLOURS RAL 9005 ● ● 

Grey 900 sable RAL 9017 ● 

Green 500 sable 

Blue 700 sable WHITE 

Black 100 sable RAL 9010 ● ● ● ● ● 

Brown 650 sable RAL 9016 ● ● ● ● ● 

394

395 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Installation Details 

Bollards 

Standard Ground (Root) Fixing Bollard Installation 

Root depth varies across our range of static bollards from 200mm-500mm depending 

on model. For details on root depths please refer to individual product pages. 

1. Determine where the bollard is to be situated. 

2. Check utilities/services drawings and perform a visual inspection to ensure there 

are none in the area. This may also require scanning the location for live cabling. 

3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. For 

example, a bollard with a 300mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated 

measuring 300mm x 300mm, fixed on the post centre, by 300mm deep. 

4. Locate the bollard centrally into the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, 

medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 

5. Ensure the bollard is vertical in all planes. 

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse 

off any concrete residue from the base of the bollard with a soft cloth and water, 

taking care not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 

7. Finish off top surface of in situ concrete to give a tight surface finish. Concrete 

should be protected by polythene during the first 24-hours following installation. 

This is particularly important during inclement and/or cold weather. Units should 

not be used until the concrete has cured. 

Anti-Ram Bollard Installation 




3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. 

For example, anti-ram bollards require a cube no less than 500mm x 500mm 

fixed on the post centre, by 600mm deep. 

4. Where applicable, ensure the root cross bar is inserted through the core. 

5. Locate the bollard centrally into the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, 


6. Ensure the bollard is vertical in all planes. 

7. Where applicable, infill bollard with concrete and attach top T cap.* 








* Only applicable for Reinforced Steel Bollards. 

INST01 

Lift Out and Lockable Bollard Installation 




3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. 

For example, Lift Out and Lockable bollards require a cube no less than 400mm x 

400mm, fixed on the post centre, by 400mm deep. 

4. Where applicable, ensure the root cross bar is inserted through the core of 

the socket. 

5. Locate the socket centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium 

slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 

6. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes. 

7. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off 

any residue concrete from base of bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care 

not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 





Base Plate Bollard Installation 

Fix the post to a suitable homogeneous substrate using a suitable bolting system 

used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. If the base material is 

concrete then a chemical or drop in type anchor may be suitable. Anchors such 

as these are available through the local builder’s merchants or direct from the 

manufacturer. Marshalls Street Furniture would be happy to assist in suitable bolt 

selection if required.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Bollards 

Rhino Telescopic Bollard Installation 




3. Excavate a cube in the substrate approximately 300mm x 300mm and 200mm 

deeper than the ground socket to be installed. 

4. Put approximately 200mm of minimum 15mm clean loose stone into the hole 

for drainage purposes. 

5. Lower the ground socket into the hole and check the top of ground socket is 

approximately 5mm above ground level. 

6. Locate the ground socket centrally in the hole and ensure socket is vertical in 

all planes. 

7. Add approximately 200mm of clean loose stone. 

8. Back fill the hole, tamping down until approximately 300mm from the surface. 

9. Raise telescopic bollard and check for alignment (if more than one post is to 

be installed). 

10. Then fill the hole with grade C30 concrete, including a rapid hardening agent 

and sulphate resisting cement as required, medium slump and smooth off the 

area around the lid to allow fall away. 

11. Lower the telescopic bollard into the ground socket. Please ensure the bollard 

and lid are kept clear of debris during installation. 





Rhino Telescopic Bollard Operating Instructions 

To Lock 

1. Lift lid, draw up inner post to full extension. Rotate handle clockwise a quarter 

turn. Press down push button lock. 

To Unlock 

1. Release push button lock with key. 

2. Return key to original position by depressing slightly and remove key. Rotate 

handle a quarter turn clockwise. 

3. Lower the post slowly and in a controlled manner. Do not allow it to free-fall into 

base. 

4. To lock repeat step 1 from ‘To Lock’ instructions above. 

INST01 

Weekly Maintenance 

1. Ensure sliding post is kept clean and free from debris. 

2. Clean and lubricate lock using a lubricant similar to WD40. 

3. Installations with high water tables or adverse conditions should be checked daily. 

4. Always ensure that the cover plate is closed when bollard is not in use. 

5. Clear any debris from around hinge and cover plate. 

Bellitalia Alto 33 Copper Bollard Installation Details 

The bollard may be fixed directly into the ground. 




3. Drill a 100mm wide hole in the ground, 300mm deep with an appropriate 

core borer. 

4. Fix the bollard’s base with grade C30 concrete, medium slump including a rapid 

hardening agent if required. 

5. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes. 








This bollard may be specified with a removable system using a Floor Socket and a 

key to open and close the locking system. 




3. Drill a 120mm wide hole in the ground, 350mm deep with an appropriate 

core borer. 

4. Fix the Floor Socket with grade C30 concrete, medium slump including a rapid 

hardening agent if required. Ensure the socket is vertical in all planes. 

5. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the socket. Where necessary, rinse off 

any residue concrete from the Floor Socket using a soft cloth and water. 





396

397 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Sineu Graff Bollards 

Sineu Graff Cast Iron Bollard Ground Post Fixing (Style and 

Classic Models) 




3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the bollard’s specification. For 

example, a bollard 800 – 1000mm high will require a 350mm root, hence a cube 

measuring 350mm x 350mm, fixed on the post centre, by 350mm deep. Shorter 

bollards only require a root depth of 300mm. 

4. Locate the post centrally in to the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, medium 

slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 

5. Ensure the post is vertical in all planes. 

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the bollard. Where necessary, rinse off 

any residue concrete from base of bollard with a soft cloth and water, taking care 

not to scratch the surface of the bollard. 





8. Attach the bollard to the ground post using a fixing bolt. 

INST01 

Cast Iron Bollards – Fixing Options 

Sineu Graff cast iron bollards are available with the choice of three fixing options. 

Sineu Graff Timber Bollards with Ground Anchor Fixing 




3. Excavate a cube in the substrate measuring 350mm x 350mm, fixed on the post 

centre, by 350mm deep. 

4. Locate the ground anchor centrally in to the hole and fill with grade C30 

concrete, medium slump, including a rapid hardening agent if required. 

5. Ensure the post is vertical in all planes. 








8. Attach the bollard to the ground anchor using two fixing bolts. 

All necessary protective equipment is to be used during the installation process. 

Care should be taken to avoid damage to surrounding areas. 

GROUND POST FIXING (H) CONCEALED BASE PLATE (E) REMOVABLE (D)


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 



Four ground fixing options are available as options on our plastic bollards to suit 

all likely applications. This ensures that a uniform appearance is achieved whilst 

allowing the bollards to perform a number of different functions. 

PERMANENT (GROUND) FIXING 

For permanent fixing, the bollard base is concreted in below ground. 

The moulded return at the base ensures that the bollard cannot be removed. 

Permanent fixing features a 400mm root depth. 

ANTI-RAM FIXING 

INST01 

A robust steel core, permanently concreted into the ground, provides a rigid 

and effective deterrent to ram-raiding. 

Anti-Ram fixing features a 645mm root depth 

400mm 

645mm 

SOCKETED FIXING 

This form of fixing is ideal for use in applications where the occasional 

replacement or removal of a bollard may be required. This new socket 

system ensures secure fixing by rotating the bollard through 90˚ 

interlocking the bollard and socket. 

Socketed fixing features a 456mm root depth 

SURFACE FIXING 

A fixing system for use in multi-storey car parks, bridges or any application 

where below ground services or surface membranes may be vulnerable. 

The bollard base is fixed directly to a shallow concrete substrate using 95mm 

expanding bolts 

456mm 

398

399 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Seating Fixing Details Litter Bin Fixing Details 

Free standing 

Free standing seats can be situated directly into place on site using the correct lifting 

equipment. The large weight of the products means that fixing to the ground is 

unnecessary. 

Ground (Root) Fixed 

The seat legs are designed to be situated directly into a concrete mix. Root depths 

vary depending on product. 

Base Plate/Surface Mounting 

A positive bolting system should be selected by the installer based on the type and 

condition of the substrate taking into account any applicable close edges 

and thicknesses. 

Sub-Surface 

This is similar to surface mounting, however seat legs are bolted to a concrete 

substrate and then a surface material, such as paving, is laid on top. The seat legs are 

extended to ensure the same seat height above ground as surface mounting. 

Sineu Graff Seating Fixing Types and Installation Details 

Sineu Graff seating is available with various types of fixing. Fixing methods are 

dependent on model. Please refer to individual product pages for specific details on 

which types of fixing are available for each model. 

Type T – Bolt Fixing. Seat is bolted into the in situ concrete. 

Type P – Anchor fixing. This type of fixing is designed for seats with either hardwood 

or softwood feet. 

Type DT – Bolt fixing through mounting block which is supplied as an 

additional item. 

Type DE – Bolt fixing through mounting block supplied which is supplied as an 

additional item. An additional angle bracket is also supplied. 

Type DT and DE fixing methods provide additional anchorage where ground 

conditions are less stable. 

Fixing Methods for Sineu Graff Seats 

In situ concrete 

250 

Type T – Bolt fixing 

In situ concrete 

INST02 

200 

Type P – Anchor fixing 

(seats with either hardwood or 

softwood feet). 

Type DT and DE provide addition anchorage where ground conditions are less stable. 

Free standing 

Generally the weight of the litter bin will deter unauthorised movement, for example 

Bellitalia concrete litter bins. Additionally some products are available with a 

weighted self stabilising base plate which provides additional security. 

Plastic litter bins may also be specified with integral ballast cartridge which also 

provides additional security. 

Ground Fixed 

Part of the litter bin body or supporting post is permanently set into a C30, medium 

slump grade concrete mix. Some Sineu Graff models are supplied with a concrete 

mounting block. The bin can be fixed to the block once it has been situated at the 

correct level in an in situ mix. This allows the litter bin to be permanently installed. 

Please refer to individual product pages for details on which Sineu Graff litter bins are 

available with this type of fixing. 

Base Plate/Surface Mounted 

Base plate is secured to suitable substrate, for example concrete, using rag bolts via a 

base plate or fitting/drainage holes at the base of the bin. Some models have holes 

for the rag bolts incorporated in their feet avoiding the need for base plates. 

Bellitalia Self Levelling Litter Bins 

Bellitalia Litter bins are supplied as standard with a patented self levelling system 

which allows litter bins to be installed level on slopes of up to 5% - 6.5% from 

horizontal (depending on model). 

1. Ensure area is totally clean. 

2. Place base element and lift main body into position using appropriate lifting 

equipment. 

3. Level main body and ‘lock’ adjustment bolts level in position. 

4. Litter bin is now level and ready to use. 

180 

180 

250 

Type DE – Bolt fixing 

through mounting block 

supplied as additional item. 

180 

180 

250 

Type DT – Bolt fixing through 

mounting block supplied as 

additional item. Additional angle 

bracket also supplied.

1. Place base elements and adjust level. 2. Secure level and place top elements in position. 3. Completed Planter ready for planting. 

1. 2. 3. 5. 4. 

P=10% 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Cycle Stand Fixing Details 

Ground (Root) Fixing Cycle Stand Installation 

Root depth varies across our range of cycle stands from 200mm-350mm depending 

on model. 

1. Determine where the cycle stand is to be situated. 



3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the cycle stand’s specification. For 

example, a cycle with a 300mm root depth will require a cube to be excavated 

measuring 300mm x 300mm, fixed on the post centre, by 350mm deep. 

4. Locate the cycle stand centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, 


5. Ensure the cycle stand is vertical in all planes. 

INST03 

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the cycle stand. Where necessary, rinse 

off any concrete residue from the base of the cycle stand with a soft cloth and 

water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product. 





Base Plate Cycle Stand Installation 

Fix the cycle stand to a suitable homogeneous substrate using a suitable bolting 

system used in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. If the base material 

is concrete then a chemical or drop in type anchor may be suitable. Anchors such 

as these are available through the local builders’ merchants or direct from the 

manufacturer. Marshalls Street Furniture would be happy to assist in suitable bolt 

selection if required. 

Classica Planters, Ginevra Planters, Litter Bins with Self Levelling System 

Cosmoarredo Planter 

Generally, planters can be installed by lifting them into position using appropriate lifting 

equipment. Certain models of planters can be specified with sub-channels, which allow 

for movement by fork lift truck. Additionally, steel lifting hooks may be specified which 

can be used to move planters even when they have been fully planted. 

Classica Planters, Ginevra Planters, Litterbins with 

Self-levelling System 

1. Place base elements and adjust level. ‘Lock’ adjustment bolts in the level position. 

2. Manoeuvre top elements into position. 

3. Completed planter is now ready for planting. (The planter is equipped with hotgalvanised 

steel eyes to make it easier to lift and move even when fully planted) 

Cosmoarredo Planters 

1. Use a level to locate the upper part to the ground. 

2. Carefully lock the two parts of the planter with some rounded stones, as shown 

in the picture. 

3. Place a layer of Geo-textile to prevent ‘flushing’ of top soil. 

4. Fill the water reservoir area with some loose gravel. 

5. Fill with top soil and planting media. 

4% 

MAX 

400

401 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Notice Board and Signage Board Fixing Details 

Ferrocast® Notice Board Ground (Root) Fixed Installation 

Root depth varies across our range of notice boards from 150mm-400mm 

depending on model. Please refer to individual product pages for details or contact 


1. Determine where the notice board is to be situated. 



3. Excavate either one or two cubes in the substrate; the number depends on how 

many posts the notice board has. When two cubes are required, the distance 

between them will be determined by the width of the notice board. For example, 

a single post notice board with a 150mm root depth will require a cube to be 

excavated measuring 150mm x 150mm, fixed on the post centre, by 200mm deep. 

4. Locate the notice board centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, 


5. Ensure the notice board is vertical in all planes. 

INST04 

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the notice board. Where necessary, 

rinse off any concrete residue from the base of the notice board with a soft cloth 

and water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product. 





Ollerton and Imperial Fingerpost and Notice Board Installation 

Posts are bolted to a concrete substrate and then a surface material, such as paving is 

laid on top 

Ferrocast Fingerpost Ground (Root) Fixing Installation 

Root depth varies across our range of Fingerposts from 150mm-500mm 

depending on model. Please refer to individual product pages for details or contact 


1. Determine where the fingerpost is to be situated. 



3. Excavate a cube in the substrate according to the fingerpost’s specification. 

For example, a fingerpost with a 400mm root depth will require a cube to be 

excavated measuring 400mm x 400mm, fixed on the post centre, by 450mm deep. 

4. Locate the fingerpost centrally in the hole and fill with grade C30 concrete, 


5. Ensure the fingerpost is vertical in all planes. 

6. Reinstate any surface finishes disturbed by the fingerpost. Where necessary, rinse 

off any concrete residue from the base of the fingerpost with a soft cloth and 

water, taking care not to scratch the surface of the product. 





8. Once the concrete has cured add the fingers to the post in the correct positions.


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Traffic Management Installation Guidelines 

INST05 

General 

These guidelines are for use with Marshalls Traffic Calming products and should 

be used in conjunction with the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice. 

Marshalls are unable to accept any responsibility for the quality of workmanship or 

design criteria employed in the placement and fixing of Marshalls Traffic Calming 

products. This does not affect the normal statutory rights of our customers. 

Health and Safety 

All necessary Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) should be worn on site, as the site 

rules dictate. 

The recommendations of the Manual Handling Operation Regulations 1992 should 

be complied with, and where necessary, suitable lifting equipment utilised. 

Inclement Weather 

Laying operations should be discontinued (and any open work face covered) if 

weather conditions are such that the performance of the construction may be 

jeopardised. 

Construction operations should not be undertaken when the temperature is below 

3 degrees on a falling thermometer and below 1 degree on a rising thermometer. 

All unfinished areas and stockpiles of materials should be covered in the advent of 

inclement weather to prevent saturation. 

Contact 

To ensure that the most current edition of these guidelines is obtained please 

telephone 0845 30 40 708. 

TRAFFIC RAMP, SPEED CUSHION AND REFUGE ISLAND UNITS 

Scope 

These guidelines are for the construction of Traffic Ramp, Speed Cushion and Refuge 

Island Units only. 

Foundation 

The Units should be placed within the carriageway structure, the excavation should 

leave at least 200mm clear around the periphery of the Unit. 40mm of wearing 

course should be planed from the pavement, to be replaced upon completion of 

the installation. 

The underlying construction should be excavated to the correct depth to 

accommodate the Unit and the concrete base. 

The base of the excavation should be inspected by the Engineer for approval and 

then well compacted to level. Dependent on the carriageway construction it may be 

necessary to install a concrete foundation such as minimum thickness 150mm and 

C30 concrete, to the Engineer’s approval. 

Laying 

The Units should be lowered into position and packed at each corner with Class B 

engineering bricks to bring up to the desired line and level. 

Note: Threaded lifting sockets are incorporated in the Units to facilitate lifting and 

handling. Alternatively, Marshalls are able to supply lifting loops if required. CDM 

regulations must be adhered to with regards the mechanical handling of heavy 

concrete products. In order to protect the edges of the Units, they should be laid so 

that they do not stand proud of the final carriageway surface. 

CONCRETE BASE 

Materials 

The Units should be laid securely onto a concrete base that is a minimum of 150mm 

thick and extends at least 100mm beyond the edge of the Unit. The concrete used 

to form the base should have a minimum strength of 40N/mm2 and a maximum 

aggregate size of 20mm. It is imperative that the concrete has sufficient workability 

to flow under the Unit. 

Construction 

The concrete should be vibrated into place under the Units completely filling the 

void and supporting the Unit. No voids shall exist between the Unit and the base. 

Note: The concrete must have gained adequate strength before any trafficking of the 

Unit is permitted. 

Reinstatement of Carriageway 

The wearing course should be reinstated as directed by the Engineer. All joints 

between new and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and 

sealed with a hot bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress. 

135 

40 

150 

400 

100 

Tra�c Calming Unit (Speed Cushion Plateau shown) 

Existing carriageway 

Engineering bricks 

Typical installation detail All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale 

Typical installation detail All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale 

SATELLITE ISLANDS 

Satellite Islands are bonded onto the base course using modified mortar. The upstand 

required to the kerb face will dictate the depth of planing or excavation required, 

e.g. with an upstand of 125mm, a product height of 170mm and a bonding layer of 

20mm, a foundation 65mm from the finished surface level would be required. 

It is recommended that Units are placed in position using lifting loops secured to the 

M16 sockets cast into the product. 

The wearing course should be reinstated as directed by the Engineer. All joints 

between new and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and 

sealed with a bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress. 

GUIDELINES FOR THE INSTALLATION OF MARSHALLS S-RAMP 

AND SPEEDCHECK TRAFFIC CALMING SYSTEMS 

Scope 

These guidelines cover the installation of S-Ramp and Speed check Units. The 

design and installation of other aspects of the traffic calming measure, i.e. table top 

construction should follow the recommendations of the appropriate code of practice 

and are not covered under these guidelines. 

Foundation 

The foundation should consist of C30 concrete with a minimum thickness of 150mm, 

designed in accordance with the relevant code of practice and DfT specifications. 

The addition of mesh reinforcement may be considered, depending on the 

application and existing pavement construction. The concrete should be allowed to 

reach sufficient strength before any trafficking is permitted. 

400 

100 

402

403 


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 


Traffic Management Installation Guidelines 

INST05 

Haunching 

Units should be haunched at the front and rear with a minimum C30 concrete, 

of sufficient size and strength to prevent lateral movement during trafficking. An 

indication of appropriate haunching details is illustrated in the cross-sectional views. 

The Units must gain sufficient bond to the haunching concrete. 

For heavily trafficked areas, dowel bars may be used to further increase the joint 

strength between the haunching and foundation. Dowel bars should be 10mm 

diameter typically, placed at 200mm centres, centralised behind the Units. 

Where flexibly laid block paving is used in conjunction with the Units, the concrete 

haunching must not encroach into the laying course layer. 

Note: For S-Ramp the haunching should be placed to a level of at least half the 

height of the S-Ramp Unit, and extend past the Unit by a minimum of 150mm. 

Laying 

Lay Units to line and level using a paviors maul, ensuring that the foundation 

concrete is sufficiently workable to produce an effective bond. 

Note: All castellations on the underside of each S-Ramp Unit should be completely 

filled to achieve the necessary compaction. 

Where early trafficking is required or heavy vehicle use is anticipated, the use of 

modified bedding materials may be considered to increase bond strength between 

the foundation and the Units. 

Jointing 

Units must not be butt jointed; they should be close jointed, leaving gaps between 

2mm to 5mm. These joints should be sand filled and then sealed with a bead of 

Marshalls’ M-Flex; the bead should be square in profile i.e. 5mm wide x 5mm deep. 

M-Flex is a grey polyurethane sealant, supplied in 600cc sausages; this is theorectically 

sufficient for 16 joints, at 6mm each. 

Note: It is recommended where possible, to eliminate or reduce the road camber in 

the vicinity of the Road Hump to enable a consistency of joint width to be achieved. 

This is particularly important with S-Ramp. 

The vertical joints between Units, where abutting concrete block paving, must be 

sealed to avoid migration of the laying course material. All joints between new 

and existing surfaces should be saw cut to a depth of 40mm and sealed with a hot 

bituminous binder to prevent moisture ingress. 

Cutting 

Wherever possible cutting of Units should be avoided, however, if Units have to be 

cut the latest Health & Safety guidance must be followed. Units can be cut using 

a powered disk cutter with suitable blade. It is recommended that the width of 

highway be measured prior to construction, with the observed dimension being 

divided by 200mm to ascertain the number of full Units required 

Maintenance of Concrete Block Paved Humps 

A full reference manual may be obtained from Marshalls Advisory Services, 

highlighting the necessary maintenance routines to be undertaken for the ensured 

longevity of the pavement. 

The use of mechanical pavement cleaning machinery should be avoided during the 

initial life to avoid loss of jointing material until such time as the joints have stabilised 

naturally or chemically. 

If the natural method is adopted, the time period to abstain from the use of these 

machines will be dependent upon the location of the area and the volume of traffic 

that the area is to receive, although a 3 to 4 month period is typically recommended. 

Sealants 

Proprietary sealing agents are commonly used on paved surfaces, to reduce moisture 

penetration of the laying course material, and minimise staining from spillages. 

Whilst such products may offer certain short-term advantages, Marshalls do not 

recommend the use of such systems on its paving products. Further advice may be 

sought from Marshalls Advisory Services. 

Existing roadway 

surfacing 

Existing road 

construction 

Joint between 

S-Ramp and surfacing 

sealed with hot 

bituminous binder 

S-Ramp unit 

Reinforcing mesh (where required) 

100 

Speedcheck 

reversible unit 

1000 

Table-top construction formed with 

�exibly laid block paving or 

reinstated roadway surfacing 

Bead of M-Flex 

C30 concrete haunch/anchored to base with dowel 

bars (where required) (Typically 10mm dia. @ 200mm 

centres centralised behind S-Ramp units) 

Speedcheck 

reversible unit 

Concrete base 

and haunch 

Typical S-Ramp and Speedcheck installations within existing road. 

All dimensions mm (nom.) Not to scale 

60 or 65mm thick 

block paving 

40 or 35mm thick 

laying course 

100mm existing 

road construction


Sales Office: 0870 600 2425 

Quality Policy Statement 

Please Note 

Marshalls is committed to innovative product development and manufacture. 

The evolution of new product design is continuous and information is subject 

to change without notice. Customers should check with the supplier to ensure 

that they have the latest details. All Marshalls products are manufactured to the 

appropriate British Standard where applicable. Where products, (or intended 

usage), lie outside the scope of a British (or intended European) standard or no 

appropriate standard exists, Marshalls own standard will be employed. All products 

are supplied subject to Marshalls Standard Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is 

available on request. Liability in respect of any statements, conditions, warranties 

and representations made on behalf of the Company is limited in accordance with 

the terms set out in the Standard Conditions of Sale. 

Maintenance 

Routine cleaning and maintenance is required to keep the overall appearance 

of the product. 

Application 

Should customers be in doubt as to the suitability of any Marshalls product for a 

given application, guidance from our Technical Team should be sought. The colours 

shown in this literature are as exact as photographic and printing processes will 

allow. We strongly recommend that colours are judged and chosen from actual 

materials rather than photographic representation depicted herein. Although 

every effort is made to ensure consistency of product colour, variations between 

production batches can occur. We therefore recommend that products are 

thoroughly mixed on site by drawing, if possible, from a minimum of three packs. 

Marshalls is committed to providing a customer oriented service and would 

welcome feedback on our products and services. 

404

Landscape House, Premier Way, 

Lowfields Business Park, Elland HX5 9HT. U.K. 

Telephone: 0870 600 2425 Fax: 0870 600 2426 

Email: msf.sales@marshalls.co.uk www.marshalls.co.uk/streetfurniture 

A Subsidiary of Marshalls plc 

Registered Office 

Marshalls plc, Birkby Grange, Birkby Hall Road, 

Birkby, Huddersfield, HD2 2YA. 

© MARSHALLS 2010

Street Furniture Product Selector - Marshalls

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?